Tri Ton Connect User Manual

TRITON CONNECTTM
4.4
USER MANUAL
TDN 07103-00174 01/2008
CORPORATE HEADQUARTERS: 522 E. Railroad Street Long Beach, MS 39560 Phone: (228) 868-1317 Fax: (228) 868-0437
RMA (RETURN MATERIAL AUTHORIZATION) RETURN ADDRESS: 21405 Avenue B Long Beach, MS 39560
COPYRIGHT NOTICE 1996-2008 Delaware Capital Formation, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Triton Systems of Delaware, Inc is an operating company of Dover Electronics, Inc., a subsidiary of Dover Corporation (NYSE-DOV). DOVER, the DOVER logo and the Dover family of marks and TRITON, the TRITON logo and the Triton family of marks are registered trademarks of Delaware Capital Formation, Inc., a wholly owned subsidiary of Dover Corporation.
TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL

Information in this document is subject to change without notice. Companies, names and other data used in examples are fictitious unless stated otherwise.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

This publication is protected by copyright and all rights are reserved. No part of it may be reproduced or transmitted by any means or in any form, without prior consent in writing from Triton Systems of Delaware, Inc. The information in this publication has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate. However, Triton Systems of Delaware, Inc. assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies, errors, or omissions that may be contained in this document. In no event will Triton Systems of Delaware, Inc. be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages resulting from any defect or omission in this manual, even if advised of the possibility of such damages. In the interest of continued product development, Triton Systems of Delaware, Inc. reserves the right to make improvements in its documentation and the products it describes at any time, without notice or obligation.
TRADEMARK ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
Microsoft Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Triton Connect is a trademark of Triton Systems of Delaware, Inc. Intel is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation.
WARRANTY STATEMENT
Manufacturer warrants that the product delivered to a distributor will perform in accordance with the Manufacturers published specifications for 12 months from date of shipment in Long Beach, MS. Manufacturers warranty shall not apply to any damages resulting from abuse, negligence, accident, or any loss or damage to the product while in transit. Written notice and explanation of circumstances surrounding any claims that the goods have proved defective in material or workmanship shall be given promptly from the distributor to the manufacturer. No claim will be made, or action brought, by or through a distributor after the expiration of 14 months following any alleged breach of warranty. Tritons Technical Services Department The primary purpose of the technical services department is to provide assistance to customers in the operation, troubleshooting, and repair of equipment manufactured by Triton. A toll-free phone number (1-800259-6672) is provided for convenience. The technical services department operates to serve our customers. The staff is trained to follow our policies and procedures to ensure fair and uniform treatment of all our customers.
ii
TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL AUTOMATED TELLER MACHINE (ATM) SOFTWARE END-USER AGREEMENT
IMPORTANT: PLEASE READ CAREFULLY:
BY INSTALLING OR OTHERWISE USING THE ATM, YOU (AS THE OWNER OR LESSEE OF THE ATM). AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE WARRANTY DISCLAIMERS, LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY AND TERMINATION PROVISION WHICH APPLY TO YOUR USE OF THE ATM SOFTWARE CONTAINED IN THIS ATM AND IS HEREBY LICENSED BY TRITON SYSTEMS OF DELAWARE, INC. (Triton) TO YOU PURSUANT TO THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO OR ARE NOT WILLING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT, DO NOT INSTALL OR OTHERWISE USE THIS ATM AND PROMPTLY CONTACT YOUR VENDOR. INSTALLING OR OTHERWISE USING THE ATM INDICATES THAT YOU ACCEPT THESE TERMS. This ATM is manufactured by, and utilizes proprietary software owned by Triton Systems of Delaware, Inc. and/or its suppliers. All right, title and interest in and to all component software installed or embedded in the ATM (ATM Software) including all associated intellectual property rights, are and will remain the property of Triton and/or its suppliers. LICENSE: Triton grants you a limited, nonexclusive license to use the ATM Software but only in connection with the operation of this ATM subject to the terms and restrictions set forth in this License Agreement. You are not permitted to use the ATM Software in any manner not expressly authorized by this License. You acknowledge and agree that ownership of the ATM Software and all subsequent copies thereof regardless of the form or media are held by Triton or its suppliers. The software is licensed for use on this specific Triton ATM product and may not be used on any other product. Otherwise, the supporting documentation, if any, may be copied only as essential for backup or archive purposes in support of your use of the ATM. You must reproduce and include all copyright notices and any other proprietary rights notices appearing on any copies that you make. ASSIGNMENT: NO REVERSE ENGINEERING: You may transfer the ATM Software to another party but only in connection with a transfer of all your right, title and interest in and to this ATM and if such party accepts the terms and conditions of this License Agreement. If you transfer the ATM, you must at the same time transfer the supporting documentation, if any, to the same party or destroy any such materials not transferred. Modification, reverse engineering, reverse compiling, or disassembly of the ATM and/or the ATM Software is expressly prohibited. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES AND LIMITATION OF DAMAGES TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, THIS ATM SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL INCORPORATED THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, AND DERIVATIVES IS PROVIDED, AS IS. TRITON MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS WITH RESPECT TO, AND DOES NOT WARRANT THE PERFORMANCE OR RESULTS YOU OR YOUR CUSTOMERS MAY OBTAIN BY USING THE ATM. TRITON SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, NONINFRINGEMENT, AND MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. TRITON MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES AND ASSUMES NO OBLIGATIONS TO YOU OR YOUR CUSTOMERS WITH RESPECT TO ANY TRANSACTION OR SERVICES ACCESSED AND/OR UTILIZED IN CONSUMERINITIATED TRANSACTIONS MADE FROM THIS ATM. IN NO EVENT WILL TRITON, ITS AFFILIATES, DIRECTORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES, AGENTS OR SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE TO YOU UNDER ANY THEORY OF TORT, CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHER LEGAL OR EQUITABLE THEORY FOR ANY PUNITIVE, CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR SIMILAR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY LOSS PROFITS OR LOST SAVINGS, EVEN IF A TRITON AGENT OR REPRESENTATIVE HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY THIRD PARTY.
iii

YOUR SOLE REMEDY AGAINST TRITON FOR DEFECTIVE PERFORMANCE OF THE ATM SOFTWARE WILL BE LIMITED EXCLUSIVELY TO REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE ATM AND/OR THE ATM SOFTWARE, AT TRITONS SOLE DISCRETION. Any warranty pertaining to the ATM, its mechanical components exclusive of the ATM software, shall be governed and controlled by any warranty given to you by Triton in a separate document accompanying this ATM. The foregoing limitation of liability and exclusion of certain damages will apply regardless of the success or effectiveness of other remedies. GOVERNING LAW: This License Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of Mississippi and by the laws of the United States, excluding their conflicts of laws principles. SEVERABILITY: In the event any provision of this License Agreement is found to be invalid, illegal or unenforceable, the validity, legality and enforceability of any of the remaining provisions shall not in any way be affected or impaired. ENTIRE AGREEMENT: This License Agreement and the accompanying Limited Warranty set forth the entire agreement between you and Triton, supersedes all prior agreements, whether written or oral, with respect to the ATM Software, and may be amended only in writing signed by both parties.
iv
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 - INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................... 1-1
WHAT IS TRITON CONNECT? ..................................................................................................................... 1-2 ADVANTAGES ........................................................................................................................................... 1-2 FEATURES ................................................................................................................................................ 1-2 WHATS NEW IN TRITON CONNECT 4.4 .................................................................................................... 1-5 ISO SCREEN ACTIONS ............................................................................................................................ 1-5 BULK DELETE TERMINALS ...................................................................................................................... 1-8 ALLOW ARCHIVING A CORRUPT DATABASE ............................................................................................. 1-10 SUPPORT X2 LOAD FILE FORMAT ......................................................................................................... 1-11 CALL MONITOR SUPPORTS UP TO 20 CALL PROCESSORS ......................................................................... 1-12 TRITON CONNECT INSTALLER WILL NOT COPY DATABASE BY DEFAULT .................................................... 1-13 USE JOURNAL ARCHIVE FILE FOR JOURNAL DATA REPORT ....................................................................... 1-14 DATA MANAGER WILL RESPECT DATABASE SIZE LIMIT ........................................................................... 1-15 FEATURES INTRODUCED IN TRITON CONNECT 4.3 ..................................................................................... 1-16
CHAPTER 2 - INSTALLATON .............................................................................................. 2-1

TRITON CONNECT SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS ............................................................................................. 2-2 RECOMMENDED SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS ................................................................................................. 2-4 INSTALLING TCP/IP ................................................................................................................................. 2-5 INSTALLATION STEPS - GENERAL .............................................................................................................. 2-6 SECURITY ................................................................................................................................................ 2-8
CHAPTER 3 - CALL MONITOR ......................................................................................... 3-1

INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................................... 3-2 OVERVIEW OF CALL MONITOR FUNCTIONS ................................................................................................. 3-2 STARTING THE CALL MONITOR .................................................................................................................. 3-4 SHUTTING DOWN THE CALL MONITOR ....................................................................................................... 3-4 ENABLING/DISABLING THE CALL VIEWER .................................................................................................. 3-5 CONFIGURING DATABASE SETTINGS ........................................................................................................... 3-5 DATA MANAGER OPERATIONS ................................................................................................................... 3-6 CONFIGURING CALL MONITOR TCP/IP SETTINGS ....................................................................................... 3-7 FIRST JOURNAL TIMEOUT ......................................................................................................................... 3-8 CONFIGURING TERMINAL ORIGINATED CALL EXPIRATION TIME ................................................................... 3-8 ADDING AND REMOVING A CALL PROCESSOR ............................................................................................... 3-9 ENABLING/DISABLING EXTENDED STATUS TEXT UPDATING .......................................................................... 3-9 VIEWING CALL PROCESSOR ACTIVITY IN A SEPARATE WINDOW ................................................................... 3-9 VIEWING CALL PROCESSOR ACTIVITY IN A SINGLE FRAME ......................................................................... 3-10 DISPLAYING HEX DATA ON SCREEN ......................................................................................................... 3-10 CAPTURING CALL PROCESSOR DATA TO A FILE ......................................................................................... 3-10 REDIRECTING THE CALL PROCESSOR DATA LOCATION ............................................................................... 3-10 RESERVING A CALL PROCESSOR FOR INCOMING CALLS ................................................................................ 3-11 CONFIGURING THE COMMUNICATIONS TIMEOUT DURATION ........................................................................ 3-11 v
CONTENTS
SAVING FLAT FILES ................................................................................................................................ 3-11 LOGGING DATA MANAGER ACTIVITY TO A FILE ......................................................................................... 3-11 OUTPUT TO CSV FILES ......................................................................................................................... 3-12 OUTPUT TO TAPE FORMAT FILES ........................................................................................................... 3-12 EXPORT JOURNALS ................................................................................................................................. 3-12 SELECTING A CALL PROCESSOR SETTINGS DIALOG .................................................................................... 3-12 STARTING A CALL PROCESSOR ................................................................................................................. 3-13 VIEWING CALL PROCESSOR ACTIVITY ...................................................................................................... 3-13 CONFIGURING CALL PROCESSOR SETTINGS ................................................................................................ 3-13 RSP - REMOTE STATUS FEED ................................................................................................................. 3-19
CHAPTER 4 - TERMINAL SETUP ......................................................................................... 4-1

INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................................ 4-2 ADDING A NEW TERMINAL ....................................................................................................................... 4-2 DELETING A TERMINAL ............................................................................................................................. 4-5 MODIFYING A TERMINAL RECORD .............................................................................................................. 4-6 VIEWING TERMINAL SETUP ...................................................................................................................... 4-7 SETTING THE PC TIME ZONE ................................................................................................................... 4-7 CONFIGURING USER FIELDS ....................................................................................................................... 4-8 SORT TERMINALS BY ................................................................................................................................ 4-9 USER PERMISSIONS .................................................................................................................................. 4-10 MODIFY STATUS MESSAGE SETTINGS ....................................................................................................... 4-11 SCHEDULE DATABASE BACKUP ................................................................................................................ 4-13 REPAIR/COMPACT/REPLACE DATABASE .................................................................................................... 4-14
CHAPTER 5 - GETTING TERMINAL DATA ............................................................................ 5-1

INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................................ 5-2 GET TERMINAL DATA FUNCTION ............................................................................................................... 5-2 SELECTING A TERMINAL ............................................................................................................................ 5-2 SELECTING A DATA OPTION ...................................................................................................................... 5-4
CHAPTER 6 - STATUS MONITORING ................................................................................. 6-1

INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................................... 6-2 VIEWING TERMINAL STATUS ..................................................................................................................... 6-2 VIEWING THE CALL LIST .......................................................................................................................... 6-3 VIEWING THE CALL ERROR LIST ............................................................................................................... 6-5 RESCHEDULING CALLS .............................................................................................................................. 6-6 USING THE CALL VIEWER ......................................................................................................................... 6-7 ALARM MONITOR .................................................................................................................................... 6-9 VIEWING THE STATUS MESSAGE LOG ....................................................................................................... 6-10
vi
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 7 - USING FILTERS ............................................................................................ 7-1
INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................................ 7-2 THE FILTERS MENU ................................................................................................................................. 7-2 FILTER CREATION AND MANAGEMENT ....................................................................................................... 7-3 CREATING A FILTER .................................................................................................................................. 7-3 VIEWING A FILTER ................................................................................................................................... 7-4 SAVING A FILTER ...................................................................................................................................... 7-4 MODIFYING A FILTER ................................................................................................................................ 7-4 DELETING A FILTER .................................................................................................................................. 7-5
CHAPTER 8 - TERMINAL PARAMETERS ............................................................................... 8-1

INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................................ 8-2 ACCESSING TERMINAL PARAMETERS ........................................................................................................... 8-2 SETTING TERMINAL PARAMETERS ............................................................................................................. 8-5 MESSAGES/COUPONS ................................................................................................................................. 8-6 STATUS ................................................................................................................................................... 8-8 ISO NO./OWNER INFO ........................................................................................................................... 8-10 EMV SETTINGS ..................................................................................................................................... 8-13 COMM .................................................................................................................................................. 8-14 TERMINAL TOTALS ................................................................................................................................. 8-17 TEXT AD SCREENS ................................................................................................................................ 8-18 AMOUNTS .............................................................................................................................................. 8-19 CASSETTE STAT ..................................................................................................................................... 8-20 VERSION NUMBERS ................................................................................................................................. 8-21 AD GRAPHICS/FILE MANAGER ................................................................................................................ 8-22 RECEIPT GRAPHICS ................................................................................................................................ 8-26 ADVANCED SETTINGS ............................................................................................................................. 8-28 PASSWORDS ............................................................................................................................................ 8-31 SURCHARGE ........................................................................................................................................... 8-32 TRITON CONNECT SETTINGS ................................................................................................................... 8-36 CONTROL .............................................................................................................................................. 8-38 FORMAT ................................................................................................................................................ 3-41 EXTENDED PARAMETERS ........................................................................................................................ 8-42 EXTENDED PARAMETERS - AD DATA ....................................................................................................... 8-43 EXTENDED PARAMETERS - COUPONING .................................................................................................... 8-48 EXTENDED PARAMETERS - MISC ............................................................................................................. 8-51 EXTENDED PARAMETERS - OPTIONAL SCREENS ........................................................................................ 8-54
CHAPTER 9 - JOURNAL DATA .......................................................................................... 9-1

INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................................... 9-2 ACCESSING THE JOURNAL DATA FUNCTION ................................................................................................. 9-2 VIEWING JOURNAL DATA .......................................................................................................................... 9-2 NAVIGATION ............................................................................................................................................ 9-2 vii
CONTENTS
PRINTING JOURNAL DATA ......................................................................................................................... 9-3 TRANSACTION RESPONSE CODES ................................................................................................................ 9-5 ARCHIVING JOURNAL DATA ....................................................................................................................... 9-5 VIEWING ARCHIVED JOURNAL DATA .......................................................................................................... 9-6 MASK JOURNAL DATA (PAN DATA) .......................................................................................................... 9-7
CHAPTER 10 - LED SIGN MESSAGES ............................................................................ 10-1

INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................... 10-2 ACCESSING THE LED SIGN MESSAGES FUNCTION ...................................................................................... 10-2 OVERVIEW OF THE LED SIGN MESSAGES FUNCTION .................................................................................. 10-2 CREATING A MESSAGE ............................................................................................................................. 10-4 SAVING A MESSAGE ................................................................................................................................. 10-7 OPENING A MESSAGE .............................................................................................................................. 10-8 MODIFYING A MESSAGE ........................................................................................................................... 10-8 SENDING A MESSAGE ............................................................................................................................... 10-9 REVIEWING MESSAGES .......................................................................................................................... 10-10
CHAPTER 11 - REPORTS MANAGER ................................................................................ 11-1

INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................... 11-2 ACCESSING THE REPORTS MANAGER ......................................................................................................... 11-2 VIEWING REPORTS ................................................................................................................................. 11-2 CHANGING REPORT CRITERIA ................................................................................................................. 11-2 REPORT VIEWER .................................................................................................................................... 11-4 CALL FAILURES REPORT ......................................................................................................................... 11-5 CALL LIST REPORT ................................................................................................................................ 11-5 CASSETTE CLOSE REPORT ...................................................................................................................... 11-6 CASSETTE STATUS REPORT ..................................................................................................................... 11-7 CHECK DIGITS ....................................................................................................................................... 11-8 CHECK DIGITS TRIPLE DES .................................................................................................................... 11-8 COUPON REPORT ................................................................................................................................... 11-9 DAY CLOSE REPORT ............................................................................................................................. 11-10 DENIED TRANSACTIONS REPORT ............................................................................................................ 11-11 ISO NUMBERS REPORT ........................................................................................................................ 11-11 JOURNAL DATA REPORT ........................................................................................................................ 11-12 JOURNALS DOWNLOADED ...................................................................................................................... 11-13 JOURNALS NOT DOWNLOADED .............................................................................................................. 11-13 SCHEDULED CLOSE REPORT .................................................................................................................. 11-14 MOST COMMON STATUS MESSAGES REPORT ........................................................................................... 11-14 TERMINAL CONFIGURATION REPORT ...................................................................................................... 11-15 TERMINAL DOWN TIME REPORT ............................................................................................................ 11-15 TERMINAL STATUS REPORT ................................................................................................................... 11-16 TERMINAL STATUS MESSAGES REPORT ................................................................................................... 11-16 TERMINAL TOTALS REPORT ................................................................................................................... 11-17 VERSION NUMBERS REPORT .................................................................................................................. 11-17 viii
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 12 - SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD ........................................................................... 12-1
INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................... 12-2 ACCESSING THE SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD FUNCTION ................................................................................... 12-2 DOWNLOADING SOFTWARE ..................................................................................................................... 12-2 DOWNLOAD OPTIONS ............................................................................................................................. 12-2
CHAPTER 13 - AD DESIGNER .......................................................................................... 13-1

INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................... 13-2 AD SCREEN CHARACTERISTICS ................................................................................................................ 13-2 ACCESSING THE AD DESIGNER .................................................................................................................. 13-3 AD DESIGNER FEATURES ......................................................................................................................... 13-3 CREATING AN AD SCREEN ....................................................................................................................... 13-4
CHAPTER 14 - COUPON UTILITY ................................................................................... 14-1

INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................................... 14-2 ACCESSING THE COUPON UTILITY ........................................................................................................... 14-2 COUPON IMAGE CHARACTERISTICS .......................................................................................................... 14-2 COUPON UTILITY FEATURES .................................................................................................................... 14-3 CREATING A TRITON CONNECT COUPON FILE ........................................................................................... 14-4
APPENDIX A - TERMINAL PARAMETERS ............................................................................. A-1 APPENDIX B - TERMINAL STATUS CODES .......................................................................... B-1
ix
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
CHAPTER 1 - INTRODUCTION
What is Triton Connect?

Triton Connecttm is a PC (Personal Computer) based software that enables you to remotely manage one or more Triton Systems ATMs. Triton Connect is a proven ATM monitoring solution, which is currently being used to manage literally thousands of Triton Systems ATMs throughout the United States and abroad.
Triton Connect can access your terminals via PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network) or wherever standard (voicegrade analog) dial-up telephone service is available. For applications that require additional flexibility, Triton Connect offers support for wireless, VSAT (satellite), and TCP/IP (Ethernet) communications.
Security
Multiple levels of password protection prevent the use of Triton Connect by unauthorized individuals. Sensitive terminal functions receive additional protection.
Advantages
Triton Connect significantly increases your efficiency and reduces the costs associated with managing your ATMs. Some of the more significant advantages include:
Features
Triton Connect offers a wealth of features, all of which are designed to maximize the value of your investment in Triton Systems ATM products. These features can be grouped within the following program areas, which are really the software applications that make up Triton Connect: Terminal Manager Data Manager Call Monitor Call Viewer Alarm Monitor
Flexibility
Depending upon your needs, the software can be configured to operate on either a single PC (standalone configuration), providing a single point for administration of your terminal(s), or on multiple PCs (network configuration), allowing the distribution of terminal management tasks among multiple personnel (an advantage in large volume environments).
Convenience
The software enables you to perform a wide range of monitoring and control functions from the convenience of a central location. In many cases, the need to travel to the terminal location to perform configuration or data retrieval functions can be eliminated, along with the associated personal and travel costs.
Standalone PC
Networked PCs
Triton Connect can run on standalone or networked PCs. Multiple terminals can be remotely controlled and monitored.
1-2
Terminal Manager
Examples of the types of status information available are: Terminal Error conditions. Cassette Status (cash loaded, remaining, etc.) Status of Last Dispense operation.
Data Manager
The Terminal Manager application provides a wide range of features to support remote terminal configuration, retrieval and storage of terminal data, and status monitoring. Remote Configuration. Using Terminal Manager you can set, monitor, and change many terminal parameters from the convenience of your PC. Examples of these parameters are: Display and Coupon Message Text. Fast Cash Amounts and Withdrawal Limits. Surcharge Amounts. Text or Graphics Advertising Screens.
The Data Manager application is designed to manage many of the data-processing functions previously handled by the Call Monitor and Call Processors, significantly improving the speed and functionality of those applications.
Data Retrieval and Storage. A powerful feature of the Terminal Manager is its ability to retrieve and store terminal data. Triton Connect uses databases to store this information. Many of the Terminal Manager functions are used to manipulate the data in the databases in various ways. Examples of the types of data maintained in the databases are: Terminal Identification information. Terminal Configuration parameters. Electronic Journal transaction data.
The Call Monitor gives Triton Connect the ability to make calls to terminals (call-out operations) and receive calls from terminals (call-in operations), using a combination dial-up, TCP/IP, wireless, or VSAT connections. The Call Monitor exercises overall control of all call activity by assigning each communications line to an application called a Call Processor. Each Call Processor will monitor and control the calling activity of its associated line. The Call Processor will make calls to terminals, automatically answer calls that come in from terminals, provide indications of the activity taking place during a call, and terminate the connection at the conclusion of a call. The Call Monitor gives even a standalone PC the ability to handle a high volume of call activity.
Status Monitoring. Triton Connect can be scheduled to periodically call out to your terminals and retrieve the most current status information. In addition, error conditions detected by the terminal are automatically reported to Triton Connect in real time. Once stored in the database, this information can be retrieved using the appropriate Terminal Manager functions and viewed at your convenience.
1-3

Call Viewer Alarm Monitor
The Call Viewer enables you to view the activity of all active Call Processors from a licensed workstation on your network. A Call Processor is a software component that acts as an interface medium between the Call Monitor application and the communications hardware (modems, telephone lines, etc.).
The Alarm Monitor checks incoming calls for alarm conditions that may be reported by terminals, and provides visual indications of such conditions. A report of the alarm conditions is maintained by the Terminal Manager and may be printed out if desired.
CDMA
Triton Terminals
Analog Modem
Triton Connect PC
TCP/IP
VSAT
Dial-up, TCP/IP, Wireless, and VSAT are some of the ways Triton Connect can communicate with your terminals.
1-4
CHAPTER 1 - INTRODUCTION Whats New in Triton Connect 4.4

The latest release of Triton Connect has a number of new and modified features. The following is a list of features that are either new or have been modified in the latest release of Triton Connect 4.4:
NEW FEATURES: ! ! !
Support for ISO screen actions. Bulk terminal deletion. X2 software download support.
MODIFIED FEATURES: ! ! ! ! ! !
Method for configuring ISO-based behavior. Journal archiving capability will handle corrupt records. Increased the maximum number of Call Processors displayed to 20. Triton Connect installer will not copy existing databases by default. Archived Journal data can be used to generate Journal Data Report. Data Manager will respect 1-gigabyte database size limit.
ISO S CREEN ACTIONS

The support for configuring ISO-controlled behavior has been changed in the Triton Connect 4.4 release. In particular, the method for displaying and configuring the existing ISO-based behavior has been modified, and support for ISO Screen Actions (ISO-based behavior that is specific to the particular screen file loaded on the terminal) has been added. ISO ENTRY FORM 1. 2. 3. Access the Set Terminal Parameters dialog from the Terminal Manager main menu. Select the terminal in question to display the parameter tabs. Click the View/Modify ISO Numbers button on the ISO No. / Owner Information tab (Figure 1-1).
Figure 1-1. Modified ISO No. / Owner Information tab
1-5

Clicking the View/Modify ISO Numbers button will cause the ISO Entry Form in Figure 1-2 to appear: You will use this form to view and modify the terminals ISO-based behavior, by entering an ISO number and specifying the specific Action to take place if the number is read from a customer card. Note that multiple entries can be made for a single terminal.
Figure 1-2. The new ISO Entry form
Figure 1-4. Selecting a Value with the new ISO Entry form
Figure 1-3. Selecting ISO Action with the new ISO Entry form ADDING A NEW ISO ENTRY To add a new entry, perform the following steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. Double click (with the left mouse button) on an empty cell under the ISO Number column. A data entry box will appear. (See Figure 1-2, above) Type in a new ISO number and press Enter. A default entry will be placed in the adjoining cell, in the ISO Action column. In the new entry under the ISO Action column, right-click the cell and select an available Action from the pop-up menu. (See the example in Figure 1-3) To set the Value, right click in the adjoining cell in the Value column and select an available Value from the pop-up menu, as shown in Figure 1-4. Note: If you selected the Use Defined Surcharge ISO action in Step 3, a text box will appear instead of the pop-up menu, allowing you to enter a surcharge amount.)
1-6
Control E ven t Function
Spreadsheet / Flex Grid
C e ll o p e ns to re c e i ve i np ut d a ta . P re s s i ng the D o u b l e C l i c k " L e f t " m o us e <Enter>, <Up> arrow, or <Down> arrow saves the button i n a cell under the IS O keyed in information to the selected cell and adds a Num ber column. new row to the spreadsheet. S in g le C lic k " R i g h t" mo us e Causes a menu to appear with the option to copy, button i n a cell under the IS O paste, or delete data. Num ber column. Causes a menu to appear with the option to change the value of the cells to Block Surcharge, D ecli ne S in g le C lic k " R i g h t" mo us e C a r d , U s e D e f i ne d S ur c ha r g e , A c c e p t , A w a r d button i n a cell under the IS O C oupon, MPTU Block, Block Transacti on Type, or Num ber column. Screen Action. This function will change the value of several cells when the user selects multiple cells. Causes a menu to appear with the option to change S in g le C lic k " R i g h t" mo us e the value of the cells to Allow Balance, Track 2 PAN button in a cell under the Value Dutch, Track 3 PAN Dutch, PIN Services, or Value. column. [This function will change the value of several cells when the user selects multiple cells] (1) C he cks fo r i nco mp le te a nd i nco nsi ste nt d a ta S i n g l e C l i c k " L e f t " m o u s e fi elds; (2) Allows all of the changes made by the system operator to be saved; (3) Close the ISO Entry button. form. S i n g l e C l i c k " L e f t " m o u s e Causes the ISO Entry form to close without saving button. any changes to the ISO list/spreadsheet. (1) C he cks fo r i nco mp le te a nd i nco nsi ste nt d a ta S i n g l e C l i c k " L e f t " m o u s e fi elds; (2) Allows all of the changes made by the button. system operator to be saved; (3) Lets the system operator to continue work.
Table 1-1. Overview of the Basic ISO Entry form functionality.
OK Button
Cancel Button
Apply Button
1-7

BULK DELETE TERMINALS
This new feature enables you to delete multiple terminals at one time. ACCESSING THE BULK DELETE TERMINALS DIALOG To access the Bulk Delete Terminals dialog, select the Bulk Delete option from the Terminal Manager Setup menu. The Bulk Delete Terminals dialog appears (see Figure 1-5):
Figure 1-5. Bulk deletion tool form.
IMPORTING TERMINALS VIA INPUT FILE On the bulk delete dialog there is a button named Select Input File button. This button allows you to browse the PC file system for an input file. When you locate and open an input file, the bulk delete application will evaluate the input file using the following criteria: The file must be a simple text file, with an extension of .TXT. The contents of the file must be a list of Terminal IDs. There should be no more than one Terminal ID per line. Each Terminal ID must be no longer than a maximum of 17 characters in length. (See the example in Figure 1-6)
IMPORTANT: If the bulk delete application has problems processing the text file (i.e., the text file does not contain any data, etc.), the application will display the warning message shown in Figure 1-7.
Figure 1-6. Input text file (contains terminal IDs selected for removal).
Figure 1-7. Input file error message.
1-8
The bulk delete application will compare the input file to the current database. If the application is unable to find a corresponding match in the database for each terminal in the input list, it will list the invalid Terminal ID in a dialog box (see Figure 1-8).
Figure 1-8. Dialog box for invalid IDs. DELETING DATA When the user presses the Clean button on the Bulk Delete Terminals main window, the application will use the list of valid Terminal IDs from the input file to locate and delete the associated data (i.e., tables, records, and folders) from the TC_Main database. Note: The ### following the names of the first 3 tables denotes that theyre multiple tables with the same name. Each one of the tables is associated with a particular terminal ID. DATABASE
TC_MAIN
TABLE
ADDATA### JOURNAL### PARAMETERS### CONFIGURE STATUS FeatureSettings ScheduleReboot ExtErrorInfo EMVData EMVParameterDataAppList EMVParameterDataBoolean LCCassStructure LCDayStructure LCEEValues SurchargeScreen
DELETION TARGET
Entire Table Entire Table Entire Table Record matching specific ID Record matching specific ID Records matching specific ID Records matching specific ID Records matching specific ID Records matching specific ID Records matching specific ID Records matching specific ID Records matching specific ID Records matching specific ID Records matching specific ID Records matching specific ID
CONFIRMING COMPLETION Once the bulk delete application has successfully deleted all of the data related to the targeted terminals, it will display a message box to confirm that it has completed the task (see Figure 1-9). It is recommended that you run the Repair/Compact/Replace Database function after performing a bulk delete operation. This option is located under the Terminal Manager File menu.
Figure 1-9. Successful completion message.
If the bulk delete application runs into a problem processing the Terminal IDs (i.e., no data found or database errors encountered), the application will annotate these errors in a log file (see the next section, Logging Activity). LOGGING ACTIVITY The Bulk Delete application will keep a log file of all of its actions in the current directory (typically the Triton Connect installation directory). The log file will be titled Delete.log.
1-9

ALLOW ARCHIVING A CORRUPT D ATABASE
The archive function has been updated to improve the handling of corrupt databases during a journal archive operation. ACTIVATING JOURNAL ARCHIVE PROCESS Follow these general steps to perform a journal archive operation: 1. Select Archive Journal Data from the main menu under the File heading (see Figure 1-10)
Figure 1-10. Archive Journal Data option on Terminal Managers main menu. 2. Enter the target archive date, database date format, and computer date format when the archive journal records form appears (see Figure 1-11). Note that the target date refers to the date the records were downloaded. Press the Archive button.
3.
When you press the Archive button, the dialog will display the status of the archive operation at the bottom of the archive journal records form (see Figure 1-12).
Figure 1-11. Archive journal records form.
Figure 1-12. Archive journal records form with status of progress.
PROCESSING RECORDS Once the archive operation has been initiated, the application will cycle through the journal records, comparing each record date to the target archive date. If the record date is greater than or equal to the target date, the record is skipped. All other records will be stored in the archive database. Corrupt records will be skipped. LOGGING ACTIVITY The Terminal Manager will log activity information related to the archive operation to a file named Archivelog.log. The file will be created in the current directory (typically the Triton Connect installation directory).
1-10
SUPPORT X2 LOAD FILE FORMAT
X2 systems use a new load file format (with a TFV file extension) to ensure that the load file has been digitally signed by Triton Systems. Triton Connect has been modified to recognize this format and verify the load file prior to sending it to the terminal. TERMINAL-SPECIFIC LOAD FILE SELECTION To access the Software Download dialog, highlight the Utilities menu on the Terminal Manager menu bar, then select Software Download. When you click the Select File button on the Software Download dialog, the application will display an Open Load File dialog box. The file type displayed will depend on the Terminal ID you selected. If the application identifies the terminal as an X2 terminal, load files with the TFV file extension will be displayed, as shown in Figure 1-13. If the version information identifies the terminal as an X-Scale or Z-180, the dialog will display the file formats shown in Figure 1-14. Note: If you have not downloaded parameters for the selected terminal, the system will display an error message and prompt you to download parameters for the selected X2 terminal (see Figure 1-15).
Figure 1-13. Open Load File dialog box for X2.
Figure 1-14. Open Load File dialog box for X-Scale.
Figure 1-15. Data access error.
1-11

TFV FILE FORMAT VALIDATION Once youve selected a load file with a TFV extension and have pressed the Open button, the application will start the file validation process. If the file is determined to be a valid TFV load file, the Open Load File dialog box will close and return you to the Software Download dialog main form. If the load file is not valid, the application will display an error message (see Figure 1-16).
Figure 1-16. Open Load File dialog box. When you acknowledge the error by pressing the OK button you will be returned to the Software Download dialog main form.
CALL MONITOR SUPPORTS UP TO 20 CALL PROCESSORS

Triton Connect 4.4 supports the display of more than the previous limit of eight Call Processors in the Call Monitor dialog. You can now configure as many as 20 Call Processors. MAXIMUM CALL PROCESSORS TO DISPLAY A new option named Maximum Call Processors to Display has been added to the View menu in the Call Monitor application, as shown in Figure 1-17.
Figure 1-17. Call Monitor with new menu option.
1-12
CONFIGURING MAXIMUM NUMBER OF CALL PROCESSORS Follow these steps to configure the maximum number of Call Processors to display: 1. From the Call Monitor main menu select the Maximum Call Processors to Display option from the View menu, as shown in Figure 1-17 (previous page). The Maximum CPs to Display dialog is displayed, as shown in Figure 1-18.
Select from 1 to 20. Default value is 8. 2. 3. Use the up or down arrows as applicable to increase or decrease the maximum number of Call Processors to display. Note: The default number of Call Processors is eight, and the maximum number is twenty. Click OK to accept the selection and return to the Call Monitor main form. The Call Processor display will reflect the setting you specified in Step 2.
Figure 1-18. Maximum Call Processors configuration dialog.
TRITON CONNECT INSTALLER WILL NOT COPY D ATABASES BY DEFAULT

In previous versions of Triton Connect, if existing databases were found in the installation location, the installer would perform the following operations by default: 1. 2. 3. Make backup copies of the existing (old) databases. Create new (empty) databases in the database folder. Copy the data in the old databases into the new databases.
For large databases this process could take a considerable amount of time. This process has now been made userselectable, and in fact is only recommended when upgrading your version of Triton Connect from version 4.2 or earlier. EXTENSIVE DATABASE INSTALLATION OPTION During the installation of Triton Connect 4.4, the Database Location dialog will now include an option to perform Extensive Database Installation (see Figure 1-19) Note: The option is a checkbox that is unchecked by default. In most cases you will not enable this feature. However, if you are updating a 4.2 or earlier version of Triton Connect, you should select this option and allow the installer to update your existing databases. Figure 1-19. Database location dialog.
1-13

USE JOURNAL ARCHIVE FILE FOR JOURNAL DATA REPORT
Previous versions of Triton Connect only allowed you to generate a Journal Data Report using the journal data in the main database. Triton Connect 4.4 enables you to select a Journal Archive file (.ach) as the data source when generating a Journal Data Report. To generate a Journal Data Report using a Journal Archive file, follow these steps: 1. 2. 3. From the Terminal Manager main menu, select Utilities/Reports Manager. In the Available Reports listbox, select Journal Data. See Figure 1-20. Note: There is a new checkbox on the form, called Select Archive File. Click the checkbox to enable the feature and note that a Browse button appears (see Figure 1-20)
Figure 1-20. Reports Manager dialog. 4. Click the Browse button. A dialog appears, as shown in Figure 1-21. Use this dialog to locate and select an existing journal archive file (files with the .ach extension).
Figure 1-21. Select Journal Archive to View - Browse dialog.
1-14
5. Click Open on the browse dialog to load the file and return to the main dialog window. An entry for the selected journal file will appear in the main window as shown in Figure 1-22.
Figure 1-22. Journal Archive file selected. 6. Configure the dialog controls as needed and click the View button to generate the report.
DATA MANAGER WILL RESPECT DATABASE SIZE LIMIT

The Triton Connect databases use the Microsoft Access database management system and thus have a 1 gigabyte limit. However, in previous versions of Triton Connect it was still possible to add data beyond the 1 gigabyte limit, and could potentially result in a corrupt database. To prevent this from occurring, the Data Manager in the Triton Connect 4.4 has been modified so that it will not add any more journals or parameter data if the database is close to the 1 gigabyte limit.
1-15
TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL Features introduced in Triton Connect 4.3

The release of Triton Connect 4.3 added features and many existing features had been redesigned. Many enhancements had been made to increase efficiency, interoperability, and robustness of the various Triton Connect component applications. The following is a list of features that were either new or had been redesigned in the release of Triton Connect 4.3:
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Added an option in the Report window to allow for the suppression of account numbers. When selected, only the last four (4) digits of the account numbers will be displayed in the journals. Added error code description for 587 in the iniErrors.ini file. Modified the description of the TDM dispensers to TDM Single Cassette and TDM Multi Cassette. Added the ability to remove a user from an ATM and change users password (for WinCE terminals only).
Added an option to schedule the cycling of the Call Processors. This will cause all call processors to be stopped and restarted. Added the user ID to the title bar caption of the Terminal Manager to give an indication of what user is logged in.
Because X-Scale terminals do not have a Table file but instead have a Screen file, the version report was changed to reflect this by re-labeling the column header Table Version to Table/Screen Version. Modified Call Processor so when a software download for a 96XX terminal fails during the table section, it will restart at the point the connection was broken. Modified Terminal Manager to allow the broadcast of the Marketing message.
Have the ability to display the Custom Surcharge Screen (also known as User Defined Surcharge Screen) as it would appear on the ATM (9 lines of 32 characters wide). Added the ability for a user to create a custom surcharge screen for terminals that support the feature.
Mask all PANs in journal data. This would include all journal data received from the ATMs and the option to mask PANs in data already in the database and PANs in archived files. Added option to send Terminal Status via a TCP/IP feed upon successful completion of terminal communication with Triton Connect. The protocol used for this is the Gasper protocol.
1-16
CHAPTER 2 - INSTALLATION
TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL Triton Connect System Configurations

Triton Connect can be deployed in two configurations: 1. 2. Network. Standalone. Database File Server. The Database File Server will store the Triton Connect databases, making them available to the Client and Call Monitor PCs as required. Access and updates to the databases will be handled across the network. The databases will be stored on the Database File Server PC during the installation of Triton Connect on the Call Monitor PC. Main Application PC. The Main Application PC manages the processing of calls across the communications interfaces that connect the Triton Connect host installation to the remote terminals. Terminal Manager (TM) and Alarm Monitor (AM) are installed with the Call Monitor (CM). Operator Workstation (Client) PC. Each Operator Workstation will store the program code needed to perform terminal monitoring and control operations via the Triton Connect Terminal Manager and Alarm Monitor applications.
Network Configuration
To view a typical network arrangement, see the Network Configuration diagram below. For installation purposes it is important to understand the roles played by the Database File Server, Operator Workstation (or Client) PC and the Call Monitor PC. The functions of each of these components will be summarized in the following paragraphs.
2-2
Standalone Configuration
See the diagram below. In a standalone configuration, a single PC hosts all the Triton Connect applications and associated functions, to include database storage and call monitoring. *NOTE* Triton Connect 4.4 can support communications using up to 20 modem connections.
USB Modems. If you are using USB modems, you can add additional ports to your PC by using an external USB hub. A USB hub enables you to connect multiple modems to a single physical port on the PC. USB modems should only be connected to USB ports or through a USB hub. It is recommended NOT to use any USB to Serial adapters! Standard Modems. If you are using standard serial modems instead of USB modems, another way to add additional ports is to use a Multiport Adaptor module. There are many Multiport I/O devices on the market today, however, many fail to handle the demands of large scale serial communications with Triton Connect. The only Multiport I/O device that has proven to meet the performance requirements is the DigiAccelePort 8em PCI Host Adapter. Although Digi International, Inc. offers several models, some of these fail to perform with Triton Connect. If a Multiport Adapter is needed, it is recommended to use only the DigiAccelePort 8em PCI Host Adapter. Follow the manufacturers instructions for installing and configuring the multiport hardware.
A standalone configuration can handle communications with remote terminals via one modem, or optionally, as shown in the diagram, using a modem pool.
Communication
Modem Selection. In either a networked or standalone environment the type of modem to use for dial-up communications is an important consideration. See the sidebar on the next page for important information concerning modem selection. Each telephone line you use with Triton Connect will require a modem to act as the interface between the analog telephone system and the PC. Triton Connect supports the use of either Universal Serial Bus (USB) or standard modems that use the RS-232 serial interface protocol. Most modern PCs have one or two USB and/or serial ports, usually accessible from the rear panel of the main unit. If you plan to use more telephone lines than the number of available ports, additional ports must be added via a multiport interface card or device.
TCP/IP Protocol. The TCP/IP protocol must be correctly installed on the standalone PC or the Call Monitor PC, Operator Workstation and Database File Server PCs to enable the various Triton Connect applications to communicate with one another. See the section TCP/IP Configuration in this chapter for more information.
2-3

MODEM SELECTION Triton Systems can recommend the following modems, which have been extensively tested with Triton Connect: 1. 2. 3. 3COM (U.S. Robotics) Courier V.Everything 56K (RS-232 serial). MultiTech Systems MultiModem V.90 Data/Fax Modem with USB. MultiTech Systems MultiMobile 56K Data/Fax Modem (USB).
Recommended System Configurations

Triton Systems has tested and recommends the following PC hardware configurations to run Triton Connect 4.3:
Network Configuration (Used for database storage only)

1. 2. 3. 4. Microsoft Windows 2000 Server 800 MHz or higher Pentium III PC 256 MB RAM (minimum) Hard disk with a minimum of 2 GB of free space.
These modems are designed for external use, meaning they must be connected to the PC using either a RS-232 serial cable (in the case of the 3COM modem), or via a USB cable (Multitech MultiModem and MultiMobile modems). For internal use, the US Robotics Model 5699B is recommended. It is very important to use this model. IMPORTANT: For correct operation, the dip switches on the bottom of the 3COM V.Everything modem chassis must match the settings shown below: NOTE: Whichever modem you choose, insure that you have the latest drivers available for your operating system.
V.EVERYTHING MODEM CONFIGURATION SWITCHES
Operator Workstation (Used to run the Terminal Manager and Alarm Monitor applications)
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional 800 MHz or higher Pentium III PC 256 MB RAM (minimum) Dedicated Parallel or USB Port (for ComLoc device) Hard disk with a minimum of 1 GB of free space.
Main Application PC (Used to run the Call Monitor application)

1. 2.
SWITCH # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 FUNCTION DTR NORMAL VERBAL RESULT CODES DISPLAY RESULT CODES ECHO OFFLINE COMMANDS SUPPRESS AUTO ANSWER NORMAL CARRIER DETECT DISPLAY ALL RESULT CODES ENABLE AT COMMAND SET DISCONNECT WITH +++ LOAD NVRAM DEFAULTS X X X X X X X OFF X X X ON
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional 800 MHz or higher Pentium III PC 256 MB RAM (minimum) Dedicated Parallel or USB Port (for ComLoc device) Hard disk with a minimum of 1 GB of free space.
3. 4. 5.
2-4
Standalone PC Configuration
Triton Connect retains its capability to perform in a standalone configuration; however, the additional enhancements to the current release make more demands on the system hardware. The minimum system requirements for a single PC/single modem configuration are as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Microsoft Windows 2000 or Windows XP. 800 MHz or higher Pentium III PC 256 MB RAM (minimum) 1 available COM Port or USB Port (if using an external modem) 1 Dedicated Parallel or USB Port (for ComLoc device) Hard disk with a minimum of 2 GB of free space. 2. 3. TCP/IP is installed as the default network protocol if network adapter hardware was detected during the operating system setup. You only need to follow these instructions if the TCP/IP default selection was overridden during Setup. 1. Open Network and Dial-up Connections. To open Network and Dial-up Connections, click Start, point to Settings, and then click Network and Dial-up Connections. Right-click the network connection for which you want to install and enable TCP/IP, and then click Properties. Check the General tab (for a local area connection) or the Networking tab (all other connections) to view the Connection Properties dialog box:
Installing TCP/IP
** IMPORTANT **
The TCP/IP protocol must be correctly installed on the computer to enable Call Monitor communications with the Data Manager and Call Viewer applications. You must be logged on as an Administrator or a member of the Administrators group in order to complete this procedure.
** IMPORTANT ** Although Triton Connect utilizies TCP/ IP Internet Protocol, it does not and will not communicate across the Internet.
2-5

If Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) is already installed and the associated checkbox is checked, click Cancel to exit. If you have the Parallel Port COMLOC Security Module, follow the steps below: 1. Prior to starting the installation, ensure the ComLoc device is securely attached to the parallel port connector on the PC! Close all applications running on the PC. This includes disabling all virus scan software, screensavers and power management functions (See Removing Applications below). Place the Triton Connect Resource and Installation CD into the CD ROM device. The CD launch menu appears automatically. If the launch menu does not appear automatically, select Run from the Windows Start menu. Type <X>:\launch.exe (where <X> is the drive letter of the CD ROM) and press the Enter key. OR, use the Browse feature to locate and run the launch.exe file on the CD. The launch menu should appear. REMOVING APPPLICATIONS b. Click Protocol, and then click Add. The Select Network protocol dialog box appears: It may be necessary to use the CTRL-ALT-DEL sequence to start the Task Manager utility, in order to find and terminate any virus software or other utilities that may be resident in memory. Some applications must be disabled from the right side of the task bar. DO NOT disable any system applications that are required for Windows to operate! If in doubt obtain the assistance of your network administrator or other PC support personnel! POWER MANAGEMENT options, which include the system standby and hard disk shut-off functions, SHOULD BE DISABLED! These options are accessed through Control Panel/Display/ ScreenSaver/Settings/Power Schemes. Set the options as indicated here: System Standby: NEVER 4. Verify that the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) check box is selected, and then click OK to accept and exit. Turn off hard disks: NEVER IMPORTANT: These functions must remain disabled once Triton connect is installed!
2. If Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) is not in the list of installed components, then do the following: a. Click Install. The Select Network Component Type dialog box appears: 3.
c.
Click Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and then click OK.
2-6
If you have the USB Port COMLOC Security Module, follow the steps below: 1. Close all applications running on the PC. This includes disabling all virus scan software, screensavers and power management functions (See Removing Applications previous page). Place the Triton Connect Installation CD into the CD ROM device. DO NOT CONNECT THE USB COMLOC DEVICE AT THIS TIME! 1. Click the Install Triton Connect option on the launch menu main window. The setup program starts. The following dialog window appears:
2.
If the launch menu does not appear automatically, select Run from the Windows Start menu. Type <X>:\launch.exe (where <X> is the drive letter of the CD ROM) and press the Enter key. OR, use the Browse feature to locate and run the launch.exe file on the CD. The launch menu should appear. 3. Click the Install USB COMLOC Drivers option on the menu. The driver installation process begins. After the program has completed the installation, CONNECT THE USB COMLOC security module to the USB port.
Click OK to continue. 2. The following dialog appears:
4.
Install Triton Connect

This section will cover the actions you need to install Triton Connect on your network or standalone system. You must have a USB or Parallel COMLOC device.
The default installation location for the Triton Connect program and database files is displayed. Normally, this will be c:\Program Files\Tritconn. If you want to install Triton Connect to a different folder, click the Change Directory button on the dialog. Use the browse dialog to choose an existing folder or create a new folder for the installation. Click OK to accept. 3. Once youre satisfied with the program folder selection, start the installation by clicking the large button on the dialog:
4.4
The following dialog appears:
** IMPORTANT **
The Triton Connect feature of the ATM must be ENABLED and configured with the correct phone numbers or TCP/IP information to allow communications with your Triton Connect host system. See your ATM Operation Manual for instructions on enabling the Triton Connect feature and entering the appropriate information.
2-7

Use this dialog to save the Triton Connect database files to a different location than the program files. If installing on a Standalone PC, see Step 4 for instructions. If installing to a PC in a network configuration, see Step 5 for details. Multiple Call Monitors This option is only to be used on very large database installations using one (1) PC and two (2) Call Monitors. This option requires two (2) installations of Triton Connect in separate directories. Also required are unique TCP/IP port settings for each installation of the Call monitor in order to connect to the Database Manager. 4. Standalone Configuration. Make sure the Server/ Standalone option is selected. The program files will be installed to the directory you specified in Step 5, and by default the program database files will installed to the same directory. To install the database files to a different location, type the path to the directory. Click OK to accept. Network PC. Your actions depend upon the function of the PC receiving the installation.
Security
Triton Connect uses a two-level password protection scheme. The first level provides two User Passwords (User1 and User2), and is designed to grant access that does not require control of sensitive features such as software download or terminal password management. The second, higher level password is referred to as the Supervisor Level Password, and is intended to give complete control to trusted personnel whose responsibilities require full access to all Triton Connect features. DEFAULT PASSWORDS The default Supervisor password for Triton Connect is: CONNECT. The default User1 password is: TRITON. The default User2 password is: SOFTWARE. Note that if Triton Connect was installed over an existing copy of a previous version of the program, the User Level Password will remain as it was for that version (see Existing Passwords below for more information). Remember to change the default passwords as soon as possible after completing the installation!
5.
*NOTE* Performing a full (program plus database) installation of Triton Connect on the Database File Server PC is not recommended. This PC only needs to store the Triton Connect database files, which can be loaded when installing Triton Connect at the Call Monitor PC, as described below. Call Monitor PC. Make sure the Server/Standalone option is selected. Enter a path to a location on the Database File Server PC that will be used to store the database files. *NOTE* The location specified must exist on a mapped drive, so that the Call Monitor applications can access the files as if they were on a local hard drive. See your network support personnel for help in setting up a mapped drive, if necessary. Client (Operator Workstation) PC. Make sure the Client option is selected. When this option is selected, the setup program will only install the Triton Connect program files. The database files will NOT be installed. Click OK to accept. 6. The setup program begins the installation procedure. Follow any additional prompts that appear as needed to complete the installation.
EXISTING PASSWORDS An existing Triton Connect password will not be affected by the installation utility. For versions of Triton Connect prior to 3 (which used a single password), the existing password will be carried forward as the default User1/User2 Passwords. The Supervisor Level Password will of course assume its default value of CONNECT until modified.
2-8
Terminal Manager Access
When the Terminal Manager application is started for the first time, a password entry window appears:
Changing the User Passwords

Because youll want to change the default passwords immediately after installing Triton Connect, you must initially enter the Terminal Manager using the Supervisor password. By doing so, you will be able to change the User1, User2 and Supervisor passwords. Enter the appropriate Supervisor password. When the Terminal Manager main window appears, click the Security option on the menu bar and select the Change User1 Password or Change User2 Password option, as applicable. The applicable dialog appears:
At this point, you have the option of entering the Terminal Manager as a User, or as a Supervisor. The level of access youre granted depends upon the password entered here: User1, User2 or Supervisor password. USER-LEVEL PRIVILEGES Individuals with User1 or User2 access cannot perform the following actions: 1. 2. 3. Cannot change the Supervisor password. Cannot perform software downloads. Cannot alter certain terminal parameters (which ones depend upon the operating software installed in the terminal).
Enter a new password in the top text box and press the ENTER key on your keyboard. Youll be prompted to verify the new password by entering it in the bottom text box. Press the ENTER key after doing so. An OK button appears. Click this button. The following message box appears:
The above functions can only be performed by personnel with Supervisor access. The User ID is now added to the title bar of the Terminal Manager window.
Click the OK button to acknowledge the action. In a few moments, and if the password is successfully written to the Comloc device, the following message will appear:
Click OK to dismiss the message box. The User password has been changed.
2-9

Changing the Supervisor Password
Terminal Managers Security menu. The following dialog box appears:
Enter the current Supervisor password and press the ENTER key. You will be prompted to enter the new Supervisor password. Enter the new password. You will be prompted to verify the new password. Do so and press ENTER. The following message appears:
Click the OK button to write the new password to the Comloc. A confirming message box appears.
Click OK to dismiss the message box. The Supervisor password has been changed.
2-10
CHAPTER 3 - CALL MONITOR
TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL Introduction

The Call Monitor is a Triton Connect application that is used to configure and monitor Triton Connect communications.
Call Processor Startup and Shutdown

Once the Call Monitor is started, a 20-second countdown begins. At the conclusion of the countdown all enabled Call Processors are started. You may also start the Call Processors manually, either as a group or individually.
Overview of Call Monitor Functions

The Call Monitor is an application that is used to configure and monitor connections to Triton Connect remote terminals, using standard dial-up, TCP/IP, wireless, or VSAT communication connections. The Call Monitor gives Triton Connect the ability to make calls to terminals (call-out operations) and receive calls from terminals (call-in operations). The Call Monitor exercises overall control of all call activity by assigning each telephone line, TCP/IP connection or VSAT satellite link (as applicable) to an application called a Call Processor. Each Call Processor will monitor and control the calling activity of its associated connection. The Call Processor will make calls to terminals, automatically answer calls that come in from terminals, provide indications of the activity taking place during a call, and terminate the connection at the conclusion of a call. Triton Connect is designed with a great deal of data-handling capacity. A single PC, running a single Call Monitor and using 8 Call Processors, can handle in-coming and out-going calls for up to 1000 terminals. Only in extremely largescale operations would additional terminal-handling capacity be required, but in such cases Triton Connect is up to the task. A single Triton Connect installation can employ as many as 20 Call Processors, to increase the capacity of the system even further. Primary functions of the Call Monitor include: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Call Processor startup and shutdown. Management of communications between remote terminals and the Triton Connect Host Installation. Data Manager startup and shutdown. Routing of Call Processor activity data to the Call Viewer. Coordination of Call Processor and Data Manager activities. Receiving calls if other parts of the program are shut down.
Manage Communications between Remote Terminals and the Triton Connect Host Installation
Approximately every 15 seconds the Call Monitor reads the entries in the Call List database. The Call List database shows when and to which terminal an out-going call is to be made. When the scheduled time arrives for an out-going call, the Call Monitor assigns an available Call Processor to handle the call.
Database Manager Startup and Shutdown

The Data Manager processes the raw data received and stored by each running Call Processor, and saves the processed data to the appropriate Triton Connect database. The Data Manager is automatically started when the Call Monitor starts, and is shut down when the Call Monitor (and any active Call Processors) shuts down.
* NOTE *
If the Database Manager is shut down while the Call Processors are running, the flat file data will not be processed until the Data Manager is restarted! This means that until the Data Manager is restarted and has processed the data, the databases and any reports generated from this data will not be current!
3-2

Coordination of activities of the Call Processors and Data Manager.
The Call Monitor assigns one or more available Call Processors to monitor calls from terminals. As these incoming calls are completed, the Call Monitor informs the Data Manager, which processes the raw, received data and stores it in the applicable Triton Connect database. Normally, a Call Processor that is receiving data from a terminal saves that data to a raw data file called a flat file. This flat file is temporarily stored in a sub-folder of the Data folder in the Triton Connect installation directory (or other user-specified location). A sub-folder is created for each terminal for which data has been received. The name of the sub-folder is the same as the Terminal ID of the applicable terminal. Once the flat file data is saved to a database the Data Manager normally deletes the file. In some cases, however, you may wish to save this data for later review. The Save Flat Files option (on the Call Monitor Diagnostics/Data Manager Settings menu) allows you to do this.
** IMPORTANT **
The TCP/IP protocol must be correctly installed on the computer to enable Call Monitor-to-Data Manager communications! The Call Monitor PC and workstation MUST be on the same LAN or WAN to establish a connection.
Route Call Processor activity data to the Call Viewer application

The activity of each active Call Processor can be viewed at the computer running the Call Monitor. However, in locations where a network installation of Triton Connect is employed, the computer running the Call Monitor may not be readily accessible to operator personnel. In such cases, the Call Viewer application can be run at any operator workstation that is running a legally-licensed copy of Triton Connect with Comloc, allowing personnel to view the activity of the Call Processors. The Call Monitor sends Call Processor activity data to the Call Viewer. The Call Monitor communicates with the Call Viewer using a TCP/IP connection. Note: The Call Viewer function must be enabled in the Call Monitor for remote Call Viewers to access and display Call Processor activity data. See description of the Enable Call Viewer option for more information. At the Call Monitor, Call Processor activity can be viewed in several ways: 1. Summary (single-line) status. The Call Monitor dialog offers a single-line status entry for each Call Processor. Single Frame. Call Processor activity will be displayed in a frame that overlays the Call Monitor main dialog. Separate Frames. The activity of each Call Processor will be displayed in its own dialog window. This is the default view.
*** CAUTION ***

DO NOT attempt to directly access the raw data files (flat files) created by the Call Processors during normal operation! If you need to view this data, use the Save Flat Files function to safely archive files for later review.
Periodically, the Call Monitor directs the Data Manager to ingest the flat-file data and save it to the appropriate Triton Connect database.
2. 3.
**** WARNING ****

If the Data Manager is shut down during normal operation, the flat-file data will not be ingested and stored in the Triton Connect databases!
Note: The Call Monitor communicates with the Data Manager using a TCP/IP connection.
3-3
TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL Starting the Call Monitor

After Triton Connect has been installed, the Call Monitor application icon will be located in the Triton Connect application group. It can be accessed from the Start/ Programs/Triton Connect menu in the Windows Task Bar. Click on the Triton Connect Call Monitor option to start it. * NOTE * You may wish to place a shortcut to the Call Monitor application in the Windows Startup folder: This will allow the application to start automatically, once the PC running the program boots up. When the Call Monitor is started, a 20-second countdown begins: Once the Call Processors have started, or the countdown has been terminated, the Call Monitor main dialog appears:
A command button on the Call Monitor main dialog lets you Start All Call Processors or Stop all Call Processors at once.
Shutting down the Call Monitor

Click the Quit Program command button on the Call Monitor main dialog to shut down the program: At the conclusion of this countdown all enabled Call Processors will be started. The countdown can be terminated prior to completion, using the Stop command button, or the Start command button can be used to terminate the countdown and start the Call Processors immediately.
You can also select the Exit option from the File menu on the Call Monitor menu bar. * NOTE * When the Call Monitor shuts down, all associated components (Database Manager and any active Call Processors) are also shut down!
3-4
CHAPTER 3 - CALL MONITOR Enabling/Disabling the Call Viewer

The Call Viewer is a separate Triton Connect application, which can be accessed from the Windows Start/Programs/ Triton Connect menu, or from the Terminal Manager. It lets a user access Call Processor status, via a TCP/IP connection with the Call Monitor. To enable or disable the Call Viewer, open the Call Monitors Diagnostics menu. Note the Enable Call Viewer option: This option brings up a Database Utilities dialog:
**** WARNING ****

Before changing database settings, make sure all other Triton Connect programs (Terminal Manager, Alarm Monitor, Call Viewer) have been shut down! A check mark next to this option indicates the Call Viewer is enabled. When enabled, the Call Viewer application can establish a TCP/IP connection with the Call Monitor in order to receive Call Processor activity data. To disable the Call Viewer, click the option to remove the check mark. This dialog lets you specify the location of the Triton Connect databases: Main (main.mdb) Call List (callist.mdb) Error List (errlist.mdb) Reports (reports.mdb) Reports Blank (rptblk.mdb) Status (status.mdb) Status History (stathis.mdb) Terminal (termerr.mdb)
Configuring Database Settings

** IMPORTANT **
The following instructions assume you are comfortable navigating folders on a computer running Windows 2000 or Windows XP operating system. In a standalone installation and most network installations, the default settings do not need to be altered. Incorrect settings WILL prevent correct program functionality. On a network installation, these settings should only be changed by IT personnel with appropriate adjustments made on workstations. All databases MUST be in same folder. Access the Database Settings option from the Call Monitors File menu.
By default, the databases are stored in the Triton Connect default installation folder, but may be located in another folder elsewhere on the network. If the databases are located somewhere other than in the default location, use this function to record the new location so that the Triton Connect applications can locate the databases.
Note: This option is only available if there are NO Call Processors running.
3-5

Click the Browse command button to bring up a file browse dialog. Navigate to the folder where the Triton Connect databases are located and click Open. Click the Apply button to accept the selection without closing the Database Utilities dialog, or OK to accept the entry and exit. In either case, a confirmation message will appear. After accepting the location selection, test access to the databases by clicking the Test Connection button. A status of Success next to each database name means that a connection was successfully established with that database in the specified location.
Scan Function
As described in the previous section, under certain circumstances the Data Manager will become visible. In such circumstances it is possible that the Data Manager has not ingested flat-file data. Although the Data Manager will normally perform this operation several times per hour automatically, you may wish to immediately initiate the ingest function. As long as the Data Manager dialog is visible you can click the Scan button to manually initiate the ingest of any flatfile data that may have been received but not yet processed and stored in the databases.
Data Manager Operations

Starting the Data Manager
The Database Manager is automatically started when the Call Monitor starts, and shuts down when the Call Monitor shuts down. The Data Manager can also be started manually, by clicking the Data Manager option in the Windows Start/Programs/ Triton Connect menu. If you start the Data Manager manually, and the Call Monitor is NOT running, or a TCP/IP connection between the Data Manager and the Call Monitor cannot be established, the Data Manager dialog box will be visible:
Hiding the Data Manager

Shortly after the Call Monitor starts, and assuming a TCP/ IP connection is established between the Data Manager and the Call Monitor, the indicator chip will turn GREEN. At the same time, a Hide command button will appear on the dialog:
Use the Connect button to try manually starting the Data Manager application, if desired. Note the indicator chip in the lower left corner of the Data Manager dialog box. This chip will initially be RED, and will remain so until the Call Monitor is started and a TCP/ IP connection between the two components is established. Click this button to hide the Data Manager (recommended for normal operation).
3-6

* NOTE * The Data Manager is normally hid upon starting the Call Monitor. You can initiate the Data Managers flatfile scan from the button available in the Call Monitor..
Configuring Call Monitor TCP/IP Settings

Access the TCP/IP Settings option from the Call Monitors Settings menu:
Shutting Down the Data Manager

Access the Shutdown Data Manager option from the Call Monitors File menu. You can manually shut down the Data Manager using an option on the Call Monitor File menu.
The Call Monitor communicates with various Triton Connect components using the TCP/IP communications protocol. The connection with each component requires a Port Number. The Call Monitor creates a default Port Number for each connection; however, your network administrator can configure the Port Numbers manually, if required to avoid conflicts with existing network settings. Note: TCP/IP settings can be viewed now with Call Processors running. They can only be changed if all Call Processors are stopped.
Use this option to shut down the Data Manager. Once shut down, this option changes to Restart Data Manager and can be used for that purpose, as described in the next section.
**** WARNING ****

If you shut down the Database Manager, the Triton Connect databases may not be updated with the data received from terminals. Data Manager scan results are shown in a Call processor window - defaulting to CP1. Note: If the Call Monitor terminates without notifying the Data Manager, the Data manager will become visible, allowing you to use the Exit button to close the dialog.
** IMPORTANT **
In a standalone installation and most network installations, the default TCP/IP settings do not require alteration. Incorrect settings WILL prevent correct program operation. Selecting this option brings up the TCP/IP Settings dialog:
Restarting the Data Manager

If the Data Manager has been shut down, or is not currently communicating with the Call Monitor, you can restart it using the Restart Data Manager option on the Call Monitors File Menu.
3-7

The dialog lets you enter or modify TCP/IP port entries for the following connections: Call Monitor-to-Data Manager. Call Monitor-to-Call Viewer. Inbound from Terminals. This port number is required by terminals using TCP/IP communications to contact the Triton Connect host installation. The port number is entered at the terminal, and serves as the equivalent of a Triton Connect phone number. * NOTE * The TCP/IP address of the computer running the Call Monitor application is also displayed in the TCP/IP Settings dialog. This address must be entered at the Call Viewer, along with the Call Monitor-to-Call Viewer port number, to ensure correct Call Viewer operation. * NOTE * The Terminal Originated Call feature is only applicable to terminals that also support the feature. Access the Terminal Originated Call Settings option from the Call Monitors Settings menu:
Configuring Terminal Originated Call Expiration Time
First Journal Timeout

In order to enable and configure for an extended amount of time while retrieving the first journal record, the user selects this option from the Call Monitor Settings menu. This option is only available when there are NO Call Processors running. Selecting this option brings up the following dialog:
When selected, the following screen is displayed. This allows setting the amount of delay time allowed when receiving the first journal record. You must enable this option if used.
The dialog lets you specify a Time Duration for Terminal Originated Calls. This duration can be specified in intervals of hours, days, months or years. Change the settings as needed and click OK to accept. The life of each Terminal Originated Call entry in the Call List is monitored from the time of creation. When the interval determined by the Time Duration setting expires, the entry is removed from the Call List.
3-8
CHAPTER 3 - CALL MONITOR Adding and Removing a Call Processor

Access the Add a Call Processor and Remove a Call Processor options from the Call Monitors Settings menu.
Enabling/Disabling Extended Status Text Updating

Access the Update Status Text option from the Call Monitors View menu:
Add a Call Processor
A check mark next to this option indicates it is active. When active, extended status information (in addition to the summarized information that normally appears) will be displayed in the single-line status view on the Call Monitor main dialog:
Each time you select this option a Call Processor is added to the available list. The maximum allowable number of Call Processors is 20. If necessary, the Call Monitor dialog window can scroll to provide access to any additional Call Processors.
Remove a Call Processor
Viewing Call Processor Activity in a Separate Window

Access the Display each view in separate window option from the Call Monitors View menu:
Each time you select this option a Call Processor is removed from the available list. The minimum allowable number of Call Processors is one.
A check mark next to this option indicates it is active. When active, whenever the View command button for a Call Processor is clicked, the activity of that Call Processor will be displayed in a separate status window. The default is Display in separate window.
3-9
TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL Viewing Call Processor Activity in a Single Frame
Access the Display a single frame for views option from the Call Monitors View menu:
Capturing Call Processor Data to a File

*** CAUTION ***
This option can create very large files! Do not use this option unless directed by technical support personnel! Access the Capture to file option from the Call Monitors Diagnostics menu:
A check mark next to this option indicates it is active. When active, whenever the View command button for a Call Processor is clicked, the activity of that single Call Processor will be displayed in a window that replaces the normal Call Monitor dialog Note: If the separate window and single frame options are both enabled, both views will be presented when the View button is clicked. A check mark next to this option indicates it is active. When active, a data file for each Call Processor is created in the Triton Connect program folder (output1.DAT, output2.DAT, etc.). This data file is used to record a copy of the associated Call Processors activity display. The contents of the data file can be viewed with a text editor or word processor program.
Displaying Hex Data on Screen

*** CAUTION ***
DO NOT use this option unless directed to do so by technical support personnel! This option should only be used for diagnostic purposes! Access the Display data on screen option from the Call Monitors Diagnostics menu:
Redirecting the Call Processor Data Location

* NOTE * This option should not be used without a thorough understanding of the program. There is no further information available.
A check mark next to this option indicates it is active. When active, this function enables the display of all the transmitted and received data handled by each Call Processor port, in hex code. This data will appear in the applicable Call Processors activity window.
3-10
CHAPTER 3 - CALL MONITOR Reserving a Call Processor for Incoming Calls

Access the Reserve a CP for incoming calls option from the Call Monitors Settings menu: In most cases the default value of 20 seconds is sufficient; however, in some international locations dial-up connections may take longer to complete, requiring a longer timeout delay setting to prevent excessive failed call reports.
Saving Flat Files

Access the Data Manager Settings option from the Call Monitors Diagnostics menu. A sub-menu provides access to the Save Flat File option:
Select this option to reserve one of the available (and enabled) Call Processors for exclusive use for in-coming calls. This option may be useful in very busy installations, when it seems that some terminals are having problems reaching an available Call Processor.
Configuring the Communications Timeout Duration

Access the Communications timeout option from the Call Monitors Settings menu:
A check mark next to this option indicates it is active. When active, the Data Manager will save the flat file data saved by each Call Processor instead of deleting it after ingesting the data. Each file will be saved in a separate folder, and will be given a name that consists of the year, month and day on which the terminal data was received, as in 20041101. The data can be viewed with a text editor or word processor program. However, it is stored in Hex, not readable Text format.
Logging Data Manager Activity to a File

Access the Data Manager Settings option from the Call Monitors Diagnostics menu. A sub-menu provides access to the Enable Logging to File option:
Use this option to select the time (in seconds) the Call Processor will wait before reporting a failed callback attempt from a remote terminal. The available delay values are 10, 20, 40 and 80 seconds. A checkmark shows the value that is the currently selected. The default value is 20 seconds.
A check mark next to this option indicates it is active. When active, the Data Manager will log its activity to the file DM.log in the Triton Connect application folder. This log can be opened and viewed using a text editor such as Notepad or other word processing program.
3-11
TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL Output to CSV Files

Access the Data Manager Settings option from the Call Monitors Diagnostics menu. A sub-menu provides access to the Output to CSV Files option:
Export Journals
Access the Data Manager Settings option from the Call Monitors Diagnostics menu. A sub-menu provides access to the Export Journals option:
A check mark next to this option indicates it is active. When active, the Data Manager will save incoming journal data to a folder named CSV. A file will be created in the CSV folder for each terminal that sends journal data. The data will be saved in Comma Separated Value (CSV) format. This is a comma-delimited format that is designed to be easily imported into applications such as spreadsheet and database programs. Note: The CSV folder will be created in the same folder location as the Data folder.
A check mark next to this option indicates it is active. When active, the Data Manager will export journals into another database named ExpJrnls.mdb in an expanded format.
Selecting a Call Processor Settings Dialog

Access the Call Processors option from the Call Monitors Settings menu:
Output to Tape Format Files

Access the Data Manager Settings option from the Call Monitors Diagnostics menu. A sub-menu provides access to the Output to Tape Format Files option:
A check mark next to this option indicates it is active. When active, the Data Manager will save incoming journal data to a folder named Tape. A file will be created in the Tape folder for each terminal that sends journal data. The data will be saved in the same report-style format used by the terminal to print journal reports. Note: The Tape folder will be created in the same folder location as the Data folder.
Selecting this option calls up a Call Processor Settings dialog. From this dialog you can select an available Call Processor to configure. Only Call Processors that are currently stopped can be selected using this option. You can also access the Call Processors by selecting Settings for individual Call Processors. See the section, Configuring Call Processor Settings, for information on viewing and changing Call Processor settings.
3-12
CHAPTER 3 - CALL MONITOR Starting a Call Processor

Each Call Processor entry on the Call Monitor main dialog has a Start button: If the Display a single frame for views option has been selected on the Call Monitors View menu, the activity of the Call Processor will be displayed in a window that replaces the normal Call Monitor dialog:
If the Call Processor has been enabled and properly configured you can start that Call Processor by clicking the Start button for that Call Processor.
Viewing Call Processor Activity

In addition to single-line status (available from the Call Monitor main dialog), you can click the View button to display activity data for any Call Processor:
Either type of viewing window provides two command buttons:
Close. Close the viewer window. If a Single Frame, return to the default Call Monitor dialog window. Pause/Resume. Pause or Resume the operation of the Call Processor.
Configuring Call Processor Settings

The Call Processor Settings dialog allows you to enable and configure any available Call Processor. For dial-up communications, you must have one available analog modem and phone line for each Call Processor you wish to configure. For TCP/IP communications, up to twenty (20) TCP/IP connections can be used on one (1) connection
When clicked, the activity of the Call Processor will be displayed according to the current viewer settings: separate window, single frame, or both. If the Display each view in separate window option has been selected on the Call Monitors View menu, the activity of that Call Processor will be displayed in a separate status window:
** IMPORTANT **
Only Call Processors that are currently NOT running can be selected! You can use either of the following methods to bring up a Call Processor Settings dialog:
On the Call Monitor main dialog, click the Settings command button for the Call Processor you want to configure. Select the Call Processor option from the Settings menu on the Call Monitor menu bar bar. When the dialog appears, a drop-down list lets you select the specific Call Processor you want to configure.
3-13

The Call Processor Settings dialog appears:
Allow Timer Change
Place a check in this checkbox to enable the current Timer Change value to be edited. The Timer value comes into play once a connection has been established with a terminal. If the connection is interrupted for some reason (phone line problem, terminal malfunction, etc.), the Timer value ensures the Call Processor wont remain tied up indefinitely, waiting for a response or return call from a terminal. Instead, after the Timer interval expires, the Call Processor will drop the connection and become available for other calls. * NOTE * For maximum performance, DO NOT change this setting.
Use the dialog to enable and configure the settings for any available Call Processor. The various configuration settings are covered in the following sections.
Call Processor (1 to 20)
When the Timer Change function is enabled, you can edit the value in this field. Values can range from 1 to 120 seconds. This is a drop-down list of the available Call Processors. The currently selected Call Processor is shown in the list, but you can select another Call Processor if you wish. Note that only Call Processors that are currently NOT running will be displayed in the drop-down list. * NOTE * A value of less than 50 seconds is not recommended and may cause loss of return calls.
Enable Call Processor
Place a check in this checkbox to enable the Call Processor currently selected in the drop-down list. Once enabled (and after any additional required configuration settings have been made), the Call Processor can be started.
3-14

Connection Type Communication Direction
A series of option buttons lets you choose the directiontype of calls this Call Processor will handle: 1. In. If this option is chosen the Call Processor will handle in-bound calls ONLY.
This is a drop-down list that lets you pick the type of connection this Call Processor will use for terminal communications: 1. Phone Line. When this option is selected you must select an available modem in the Modems Available drop-down list. The selected mode name will appear in the Modem Selected text box. The Call Processor cannot be started unless a modem selection has been made! VSAT X.121. When this option is selected you must select an available COMM port in the Comm Port Selected drop-down list. This Comm port is connected to the VSAT communication device. TCP/IP. When this option is selected the Call Processor will use the IP Address and Port settings in the Call List when contacting a terminal with a TCP/IP connection. Radio Pad. When this option is selected, you select the Comm port the modem is connected to for the radio Pad device. CONNECTION TYPES The Dial-up phone line connection type is used with all Triton ATMs except FT7000/RL/FT5000 XP/PCbased units. The TCP/IP connection type is used with ATMs that are either TCP/IP capable (RL/FT5000/RL/RT2000) or have the (optional) External Ethernet assembly installed (91XX/97XX/96XX). The VSAT connection type is used with ATMs that support Very Small Aperture Terminal (VSAT) satellite-based communications. VSAT supports a wide range of communications protocols. Note: XP/PC-based units (FT7000/RL/FT5000XP) are not Triton Connect monitored. 3. Both (In and Out). If this option is chosen the Call Processor will handle both in-bound and out-bound calls. Note: This option is the default and for normal operation does not need to be changed.
2.
Out. If this option is chosen the Call Processor will handle out-bound calls ONLY.
2.
3.
4.
4.
Alarms Only. If this option is chosen, the Call Processor will handle only in-bound calls that carry terminal alarm status ONLY.
3-15

Dial Modifier Modem Settings
This button allows access to select modem settings. This text box is available when the Phone Line Connection Type is selected. Use this box to enter any special dialing codes that may be required when dialing out from your system, such as a dial-out prefix of 9. General: Allows user to select Call and Data Connection preferences. Advanced: Allows user to Terminal Window options and modem hardware settings. Note: The default settings are normally correct.
Modem Selected
This text box is available when the Phone Line Connection Type is selected. Shows the currently selected modem this Call processor will use when placing Phone Line calls.
Modems Available
This drop-down list is available when the Phone Line Connection Type is selected. Provides a list of available modems.
** IMPORTANT **
DO NOT configure more than ONE Call Processor for each available modem!
3-16

Comm Port Selected Retry Calls with wrong TID
This text box is available when the VSAT connection type is selected. Shows the currently selected PC COM port connected to the VSAT communications hardware.
Prev
Click this command button to access the settings for the previous available Call Processor.
Next
There is no error correction during the challenge/response portion of the communications between the terminal and Triton Connect. Sometimes data is changed during transmission by interference. In some of these cases the TID is corrupted. So instead of deleting the call, this option has Triton Connect assume there are comms problems and will keep the call list entry.
Click this command button to access the settings for the next available Call Processor.
Short Challenge/Response Timeout
Save
Click to save the settings changes for the currently selected Call Processor and remain in the Settings dialog.
OK
Click to save the settings changes for the currently selected Call Processor and exit the settings dialog.
Cancel
Exit without making any changes to the Call Processor settings.
During the beginning of the communications, sometimes the first packet is sent from Triton Connect before the terminal is ready to receive it. There is a default timeout of 20 seconds between packets. This option sets the timeout to 5 seconds for the first beginning packet attempt. It then increments to 10 seconds for the second attempt, then 15 for the third, and so on.
3-17

Short Modem Initial Timeout Cycle Call Processors (new)
When starting Triton Connect Call Monitor and Call Processors, the Call Processors are put into the Waiting for call state. The time elapse for this has a default of 80 seconds. This is to prevent collisions with inbound calls when starting/restarting the call processors and there are outbound calls to be made. This option (basically for testing) reduces this delay time to 10 seconds.
This new option allows you to schedule Cycling of all call processors (stopping and restarting) at a specific interval. This may be applicable for larger system users that may be having communication issues.
Force old ISO Format (Z-180s)
This option forces Triton Connect to send the ISO numbers in the old format (100-10 digit ISO #s) even though the terminal indicated it supported the X-scale format.
3-18

RSP - Remote Status Feed
This feature allows 3rd party interface. It sends status information to 3rd party users via TCP/IP. Select RSP on the Call Monitor main menu bar to access the settings. This will bring up the following screen:
Enable/Disable Remote Status Feed
IP Address of Remote Status Monitor when connected
IP Port TC listens for connection with Remote Status Monitor
Protocol limits the use of only 10 characters of the Terminal ID
3-19
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
3-20
CHAPTER 4 - TERMINAL SETUP

In this chapter we will cover the functions that enable you to create, modify, delete, and view terminal records in the Triton Connect main database. This is accomplished through the Terminal Manager application. In addition, other options related to terminal setup, database management, and automatic alarm message transmision are also managed through the Terminal Manager.
** IMPORTANT **
Never attempt to access the Triton Connect database directly or alter the information other than through the Terminal Manager. You may cause the program to become inoperable! Well begin with the basic terminal record management functions for adding, deleting, modifying, and viewing terminal records. As you can see, the Add New Terminal function is essentially a data entry form for the Triton Connect database. The screen consists of all those fields that make up a database record. Lets briefly cover the fields and other input areas on this form. ABOUT DATA-ENTRY FIELDS 1. The Terminal ID and Terminal Phone Number/ IP Address fields must be filled in before the new terminal record can be saved. All Terminal ID field entries are automatically converted to uppercase when the entry is saved to the database.
Adding a New Terminal

Purpose
Each terminal you wish to manage using Triton Connect must first be loaded into the terminal database. This will provide Triton Connect with the information it needs to contact the terminal, and to identify the terminal and its associated data in the database. * NOTE * If a terminal is not in the database, the Call Processor will receive parameters, error information, and journals. However, the data will not be put into the database. Terminals must be added to the database before you can call them. The Data Manager will display a message when there is data for a terminal not in the database.
2.
Terminal ID
Enter the TERMINAL NUMBER that has been assigned to the terminal. This number is assigned and entered into the terminal during physical installation by your processor or service provider.
** IMPORTANT ** Accessing the Add New Terminal Function

1. 2. Start the Terminal Manager application. From the Setup menu, select the Add New Terminal option. The Add New Terminal window appears: Make sure the Terminal ID you enter exactly matches the value assigned to the Terminal Number parameter at the terminal! You may use numbers, letters, and most special characters to form the ID. You may enter up to 16 characters. If a terminal at a location is replaced with a terminal of a different type using the same Terminal ID (for instance, replacing a Model 9600 with a Model RL5000), before contacting the terminal for the first time to retrieve parameter and journal data, the current information MUST be archived. Otherwise, information for the new terminal or the former terminal may not display correctly.
4-2

Location Name
This is the name of the establishment where the terminal is setup and operating.
User 1-4
These four fields can be used to add additional identifying information to the database record for the terminal. Used in conjunction with the Filters capability of Triton Connect, User Fields can be a powerful means of organizing and grouping terminals, especially if a many terminals are being managed. Their use, however, is optional. If you wish to change the default labels for the user fields, use the Configure User Fields function (see the Configure User Fields topic later in the chapter).
Address
This will normally be the address of the establishment identified under Location Name.
Contact 1/2
There are two fields available to enter the names of individuals or organizations that can act as a point of contact at the address specified above. The use of these fields is optional.
Notes
This is a text-entry box that allows you to enter any additional information you may wish to about the terminal, such as special requirements, additional contact information, etc.
City, State, Zip Code

Enter the requested information to complete the address data.
Journal Clearing
Terminal Phone # / IP Address

If the terminal is connected to the standard telephone system, enter the complete number of the telephone line that services the terminal at the operating location. If the terminal is connected to a VSAT earth station, enter the VSAT contact number for the terminal, which will be provided by your VSAT service provider or processor organization. The IP ADDRESS will be used to communicate with terminals connected to the TCP/IP or CDMA (wireless) network. It is provided by your host processor organization or service provider. The address is a two-part entry. The first part of the address consists of a sequence of four groups of numbers in typical IP Address format. Each number group can be up to three digits long, and each group is separated by a period (dot character), as in this example: 123.321.01.99. The second part of the IP ADDRESS consists of a fourdigit Port Number, which is described next. Select Manual if the terminal operator at the operating location will be manually clearing the terminals Electronic Journal. If Automatic is chosen, then Triton Connect will initiate journal clearing whenever the journal has been successfully downloaded by the Get Journal Data function (covered in a later chapter).
JOURNAL CLEARING CAUTION: If Journal Clearing is set to Manual, and the Electronic Journal in the terminal has not been cleared before the next Get Journal Data command is issued, the old journal entries will still be present in the journal. These entries will be received during the download and stored in the journal database, duplicating the entries already stored there! IMPORTANT: The Electronic Journal cannot hold an unlimited number of entries. The 8-bit machines (9100/96XX/97XX/Mako/SS) can hold at most 2045 journal entries. The 32-bit machines (FT/RL/RT/9800) can hold 32,768 entries. If the journal size limit is reached, the terminal will enter an OUT OF SERVICE condition and will remain in that state until the journal is cleared!
Port Number
The Port Number is a sequence of one or more numbers, provided by your host processor organization or service provider, which provides additional data-routing information to enable Triton Connect to communicate with the selected terminal on the TCP/IP or wireless network
4-3

ATM Connection Type
Select the speed of the modem in use by the terminal or the correct connection type.
Time Zone
If you wish to enter the EPROM Access Code at this time, enter the code and click the Enter button. For security reasons the code characters you enter will be displayed as asterisks, so you will be prompted to enter the code a second time, to verify it was entered correctly. If you choose to leave the EPROM Access Code entry blank for now, click the Skip Step button. * NOTE * For RL/FT5000, RL/ RT2000 model ATMs, the Triton Connect access code should be assigned at the terminal and entered as the EPROM Access Code.
Enter the time zone in use at the terminals operating location.
Use Daylight Savings Time
Once youve accomplished either of the above actions, the Enter EPROM Access Code dialog box will disappear and all entries on the Add New Terminal screen will be cleared, indicating that the form is ready to accept entries for the next terminal record. EPROM FUNCTIONS The term EPROM is an acronym for Eraseable Programmable Read-only Memory. The terminal uses an EPROM chip to store firmware (data and programs required for terminal operation). The EPROM chip provides a number of important capabilities, such as:
If Daylight Savings Time is used at the terminals operating location, make sure the box is checked.
Save
When all the required data has been entered, click the Save button. The program will check to make sure the terminal ID does not duplicate any existing ID in the database. If it does, you will be prompted to change the Terminal ID to a unique identifier. If no duplicate ID exists, the operation will continue. Next, you will be given an opportunity to enter the EPROM Access Code for the terminal. The following dialog box will be displayed:
1. 2.
Ability to perform certain terminal hardware tests. Bootstrap code which assists in loading the main terminal operating software during the Software Download procedure (8-bit units). Routines that provide low-level access to to the terminal hardware.
3.
The EPROM operates in a fashion similar to the BIOS in a Personal Computer.
4-4
CHAPTER 4 - TERMINAL SETUP Deleting a Terminal

Purpose
Use this function to remove terminal records from the database. Another method is to use the search facility. To do this, click the Search button:
** IMPORTANT **
Once a terminal is deleted all information concerning that terminal is removed from the database, including any Journal related to the terminal.
A prompt appears (in red), instructing you to select a field to search:
Accessing the Delete Terminal Function

1. 2. Start the Terminal Manager application. From the Setup menu, select the Delete Terminal option. The Delete Terminal window appears: When you click the mouse cursor on the field you want to search, the following dialog box appears:
What you enter here depends on your knowledge of the kinds of entries contained in the field. For example, assume you have clicked on the Terminal ID field. You want to locate the record that contains a terminal ID of Test1. Enter the text Test1 in the search box and click OK:
Selecting a Terminal for Deletion

In order to delete a terminal you must first locate the terminals record in the database. There are a number of ways to do this. If you know the ID of the terminal, the easiest method is to select it directly from the Terminal ID drop-down list: The record data for Test1 will appear in the applicable fields. If the search function cannot locate a record that contains the exact text you entered in the selected field, the following message will be displayed:
4-5

A third method for selecting terminals involves the use of filters, which enable you to display only terminal records that fit a defined specification. The use of filters will be covered in detail in a later chapter. SELECTING TERMINAL IDs Pressing the first letter of a Terminal ID will automatically select the first ID in the listing that starts with the chosen letter. Typing additional letters further refines this selection process, enabling you in many cases to quickly select a Terminal ID by entering only a few characters.
Modifying a Terminal Record

Purpose
Use the Modify Terminal function to make changes to a terminal record that has already been created and stored in the database.
Accessing the Modify Terminal Function

1. 2. Start the Terminal Manager application. From the Setup menu, select the Modify Terminal option. The Modify Terminal window appears:
Deleting a Terminal
Once the data for the selected terminal is displayed, check it to make sure this is the terminal you really want to delete. If it is, simply click the Delete button: A confirmation message appears:
Selecting a Terminal Record to Modify

Refer to the previous section (Deleting a Terminal) for descriptions of the various methods for selecting a terminal. Click Yes to continue with the delete action. Deletion is confirmed by this message:
Modifying a Terminal Record

Once youve selected the record you want to modify and the terminal data is displayed, it is a simple matter to alter the information in a given field. Because these fields were described in the section on Adding Terminal Records, we wont go into them again here. However, there are a number of other features specific to this function that we do need to cover: Reset, Update, Options, and Change EPROM Password.
Reset
If you change your mind about a modification to the record, and the Update button has not been pressed, you may click the Reset button to clear any changes and restore the fields to their original contents.
4-6

Update
Viewing Terminal Setup

Purpose
Once youre satisfied with any changes youve made to the contents of the data entry fields, click the Update button to save the changes to the underlying database.
Use this function to view the data for a selected terminal in the database.
Accessing the Terminal Setup Function Change EPROM Password

1. 2. Start the Terminal Manager application. From the View menu, select the Terminal Setup option. The Terminal Setup window appears:
Clicking the Change command button brings up the following dialog box:
Use this data entry box to initially enter or modify the copy of an existing EPROM Access Code in the database. Note that the entry you make here is stored in the database and does not alter the Access Code at the terminal. It will be used to gain access to the terminal for remote software download purposes.
Selecting a Terminal
Select a terminal to view using the procedures given in the section on Deleting a Terminal, earlier in this Chapter. You will notice that the data in the various fields of this form are read-only: you cannot change the data from this function. To do that, use the Modify Terminal function, covered earlier in the Chapter.
Options
Setting the PC Time Zone

Click this command button to access the Modify Status Message Settings for the currently selected terminal. See the Modify Status Message Settings topic later in the chapter.
Purpose
This function enables Triton Connect to take into account time zone differences that may exist between the local PC and the remote terminal when scheduling calls. This function includes all international time zones and a Daylight Saving Time option.
4-7

TERMINAL TIME ZONE The PC Time Zone function affects the time zone of the Triton Connect PC itself. You may wonder how Triton Connect can know the time zone at the terminals location. The answer is that you will enter the terminal time zone (and daylight savings time option) for each terminal you add to the database. Refer to Adding a New Terminal earlier in this chapter.
Configuring User Fields

Purpose
User fields are terminal data record fields that accept freeform entriesthe contents of a User Field are at the users discretion. There are four User Fields assigned to each terminal record in the database. When a terminal record is created or modified, one or more of these fields can be used to differentiate the terminal from others in the database. This can be extended to include the grouping of terminals, using a common User Field name and contents. For example, one of the User Fields can be named Promotion, and the contents of the field (in the terminal record) can include a reference to a specific advertising campaign, perhaps a phrase like Summer Madness Sale. Although the Promotion field would be common to all terminal records, only certain terminal records would be created or modified to include the text Summer Madness Sale in the Promotions field, in essence creating a group of terminals associated with that particular sale. This feature can be useful when combined with the Filters capability of Triton Connect. We can extend the previous example by assuming that a filter is created that selects only those terminal records that include the Promotion field AND the contents Summer Madness Sale in the field. Activating such a filter would allow only those terminal records that matched this criteria to be visible in the various terminal management functions. The default name of each User Field is User 1, User 2, User 3, and User 4. This default name can be changed using the Configure User Fields function.
Accessing the PC Time Zone Function

To view the PC Timezone window, perform the following steps: 1. 2. Start the Terminal Manager application. From the Setup menu, select the Options item. When the sub-menu appears, choose the PC Timezone option. The PC Parameters window appears:
Selecting a Time Zone
Accessing the Configure User Fields Function

Open the Local Time Zone list. Select the time zone being used at the PC location. To view the configurable user fields, perform the following steps: 1. Start the Terminal Manager application. From the Setup menu, select the Options item. When the sub-menu appears select the Configure User Fields option. The following window appears:
The Daylight Savings Time Option
2.
If Daylight Savings Time is used at the PC location, make sure to check the checkbox:
4-8

Use this function to restore the contents of a user field to its previous value. It must be used before the Save command is selected. This can be helpful when you make a mistake while editing a User Field. After the Save command has been used the previous entries cannot be restored in this way (use the procedures under Changing a User Field Name instead).
Sort Terminals by
Purpose Changing a User Field Name
To change the default name assigned to a User Field, perform the following steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click in the field with the mouse. The flashing text entry cursor will appear. Type the new name for the field. Delete any characters from the old name that may be present in the field. Click the Save command button. Use this function to establish a default listing order for Terminal IDs in the following Terminal Manager functions: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Add New Terminal Modify Terminal Terminal Setup Terminal Status Get Terminal Data Set Terminal Parameters View Terminal Parameters View Journal Data
The initial default state of this function is to sort by Terminal IDs.
Accessing/Changing the Sort Terminals by Setting

To access and change the default terminal sort order, perform the following steps: 1. 2. Start the Terminal Manager application. From the Setup menu, select the Options item. When the sub-menu appears select the Sort Terminal by option. Another sub-menu appears, with two options displayed: 3. Date They Were Added Terminal ID
A confirmation prompt appears:
5. 6.
Answer Yes to the prompt. The User Field name has been changed. Repeat steps 1-5 for any other User Fields, as needed.
A check mark appears on the current default sort order choice. To change the sort order, click on the applicable option.
Resetting the User Field Names
4-9
TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL User Permissions

Purpose
This function gives personnel with User1 or User2 password access the ability to change terminal parameters, or removes this ability as needed. You must be signed in to the Terminal Manager using the Supervisor password in order to gain access to the User Permissions function. The initial default state of this function is to allow both User1 and User2 personnel the ability to set terminal parameters. The status messages are saved to a log file. The messages will remain in the database even after the error is cleared. The only way messages will be deleted from the database is if the number of messages saved becomes greater than the user selected or if a terminal is deleted. You can set the number of status messages to save from 0 to 999999. By default, the number of messages to save is set to 500000. Keep in mind that this may cause the database to grow more quickly since entries are rarely deleted.
Accessing the User Permissions Function

To access the User Permissions function, perform the following steps: 1. 2. Start the Terminal Manager application. From the Setup menu, select the Options item. When the sub-menu appears select the User Permissions option. The following dialog appears: 1. 2.
Accessing the Configure Status History Function

Start the Terminal Manager application. From the Setup menu, select the Options item. When the sub-menu appears select the Configure Status History option. The following dialog appears:
3. 4. 3. To give personnel with User1 or User2 access the ability to set terminal parameters, click on the applicable check box to place a check mark in the indicated checkbox. To remove this ability, click the checkbox to remove the check mark. Click the Save command button to save the current choices. 5.
To enable the status function, ensure the Enable Status History checkbox is checked. Enter the maximum number of total status messages you want to save. The maximum value is 999999. Click the Done button to save the changes, or Cancel to discard.
The status message database allows Triton Connect to generate three reports: Most Common Status Messages, Terminal Status Messages and Terminal Downtime.
4.
Configure Status History

Purpose
The purpose of this function is to enable the status message logging function and to establish the maximum number of status messages to store in the Status Message Log. The Status Message Log holds a record of the attempts by Triton Connect to report terminal status conditions to personnel using email message or pager calls.
4-10
Modify Status Message Settings

Purpose
This feature enables terminal status messages to be reported to two service providers via alphanumeric pager or email. For each service provider, up to two pager and two email addresses may be entered to receive status message notifications. Triton Connect will send a message to the service provider immediately after it receives the status message from the terminal. The message will include the terminal ID, terminal model, terminal location, time, the Status Code and Status Description. Triton Connect will make five attempts to send this message. The Alarm Monitor and the View Terminal Status screen of the Terminal Manager also display status messages.
The following areas of the Modify Status Message Settings window are covered in this section: 1. Terminal(s) 2. 3. 4. 5. Mail Server Settings Routing Error Control Status
Terminal(s)
This area is used to view the IDs of the terminals that will be affected by the settings you specify, and to configure the email server name for routing email-type status messages. If this version of the Modify Status Message Screen was accessed via the Modify Terminal function, the Mail Server Settings configuration function is not. 1. View Settings for Terminal. This is a drop-down list that shows the IDs of the terminals that will be affected by the message settings you make. This list will consist of all Terminal IDs currently loaded in the database unless an active filter specification is being used to restrict the number of entries. Route Error Messages to Email / Pager. Checking this check box enables notification messages to be routed to the applicable pager numbers or email addresses. If the check box is not checked, the notification function is disabled (the messages will be still be logged if the Status History feature is enabled). Mail Server Settings. Use this function to set and/or view the Mail Server setup parameters, such as type of connection (network or dial-up), SMTP Mail Server name, and email address for reporting unsuccessful attempts to deliver email-type status messages. See the section on Mail Server Settings (following) for more details.
Accessing the Modify Status Message Settings Function

Perform the following steps to access the Modify Status Message Settings: 1. 2. Start the Terminal Manager application. From the Setup menu, select the Options item. When the sub-menu appears select the Modify Status Message Settings option. The following dialog appears:
2.
3.
ALTERNATE ACCESS METHOD You can also access the Modify Status Message Settings function from the Modify Terminal screen, by clicking on the Options command button. Using this will save the selected options ONLY for that terminal.
4-11

Mail Server Settings
Clicking the Mail Server Settings command button on the Modify Status Messages main window brings up the following screen: Network option. If the connection to the mail server requires a dial-up call, select the Dial-up Connection option. 5. Dial-up Connection. If the Dial-up Connection type was selected under the Mail Server Connection Type heading, enter the complete telephone number required to call the Mail Server.
Use the Save button to accept the current Mail Server Settings, the Reset button to clear any changes that have been made (if a save has not been performed) or the Cancel button to return to the Modify Status Messages main window.
Routing
This is where you will enter the applicable pager ID and telephone numbers for pager calls, and email addresses for email-based notification. You may enter up to two entries for either type of notification. You may enter a pager phone number/ID or email address for each of two service providers. 1. Phone Number or Email Address #1. The entry here applies to Service Provider #1. If using pager calls, enter the pager phone number here. Or, if using email messaging, enter the applicable email address. Unique Pager ID #1. The entry applies to Service Provider #1. If using pager calls, enter the pager ID number here. If using email messaging, leave this field blank. Phone Number or Email Address #2. The entry here applies to Service provider #2. If using pager calls, enter the pager phone number here. Or, if using email messaging, enter the applicable email address. Unique Pager ID #2. The entry applies to Service Provider #2. If using pager calls, enter the pager ID number here. If using email messaging, leave this field blank.
The Mail Server Settings screen allows you to configure the email settings required to enable the email-based message notification function. The settings include: 1. SMTP Mail Server. Enter the name of the SMTP Mail Server on your network. It is typically listed in the email configuration settings of the existing email client software installed on the PC. Contact your network administrator for assistance in obtaining the server name. Note: Must be an SMTP Mail Server that does NOT require authentication. The SMTP Mail Server is responsible for managing incoming and outgoing email traffic. The Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is designed for reliable and efficient email transfer. It is widely used in government and education facilities and is also the email standard used by the Internet. 2. Email Address for Undeliverable Mail. In most cases, if an outgoing email message cannot be successfully delivered to the target email address a failure message is returned to the sending email address. Enter the email address to use for receipt of these undelivered mail notifications. Note: Some e-mail systems require the undeliverable address to be a valid e-mail address. Mail Server Port. Enter the port number to use for email communications. In most cases the default value of 25 should work. In case of a conflict, obtain a valid port number from your network administrator. Mail Server Connection Type. Select the type of connection between the Triton Connect PC and Mail Server. On LAN-based systems select the Local Area
2.
3.
4.
Note: If you wish, you can enter pager and email data that apply to a single service provider .
3.
Error Control
This is where you will select the status messages that will be reported to a service provider. You can select any or all of the available Terminal Status Codes to be reported to Service Provider #1, Service Provider #2, or both.
4.
4-12

1. Apply To. This is a drop-down list that allows you to select the service provider that will receive notification of the status messages visible in the Active list. Active. This is the list of terminal status codes that will be reported to the service provider selected in Apply To. Inactive. This is the list of terminal status codes that have not been chosen for monitoring. Any status codes listed here will not be reported to a service provider, or recorded in the Status History log. 3. Click the Select a Backup Filename command button. A file navigation dialog box appears:
2.
3.
To move a status code from the Inactive list to the Active list, click on it with the mouse to highlight it, then click the Add button. To move all status codes in the Inactive list to the Active list, click the Add All button. To remove a status code from the Active list, click on it with the mouse to highlight it, then click the Clear button. To remove all status codes from the Active list, returning them to the Inactive list, click the Clear All button.
Status
The buttons here enable you to Save the current settings, Reset or clear any changes that have been made (if a save has not been performed) or Cancel (exit) the Modify Status Message Settings screen.
Schedule Database Backup

Purpose
The purpose of this function is to create a terminal database backup file and to establish a database backup schedule. 4.
Note that a default filename is automatically entered. You may change the file name if you wish. You may save the file to the default location (the Triton Connect installation directory) or navigate to a location of your choice. Click the Save button to save the file. Determine the the number of days between backups and enter this number in the Number of Days Between Backups field. Check the Backup Database at Scheduled Time checkbox to enable backups (to disable backups, leave the box unchecked). After configuring the database backup settings, click the Done command button to save the information and schedule the next backup (Date of Next Backup). Otherwise, click the Cancel command button to cancel any changes.
** IMPORTANT **
All other Triton Connect applications MUST be closed for the backup to occur.
5.
Accessing the Schedule Database Backup Function

Perform the following steps to access the Schedule Database Backup function: 1. 2. Start the Terminal Manager application. From the Setup menu, select the Options item. When the sub-menu appears select the Schedule Database Backup option. The following dialog appears:
6.
Once the Date of Next Backup arrives, whenever the Terminal Manager is exited, the user will be presented with a prompt related to database backup. If the user responds to the prompt with a Yes, the database will be backed up and the date of the next backup will be scheduled.
4-13

If the response is No, the Terminal Manager will exit, but will continue to prompt the user upon subsequent exits with the same message until the prompt is answered with a Yes or the Schedule Database Backup function is disabled. Once a database has been backed up, the Date of Last Backup will be updated to show the date the backup occurred. This date may be later than the originally scheduled date if the user chooses to respond with a No to the backup prompt for a number of days. The actual Date of Last Backup will depend upon when the user allows the backup to occur. The next backup date will be calculated based on the Number of Days Between Backups.
Repair/Compact Database
This function enables you to correct errors that may occur in the Triton Connect main database. After the repair operation is completed, the database is compacted (if possible). This can often speed up access to the database.
** IMPORTANT **
All other Triton Connect applications MUST be closed for the repair/compact to occur. Follow these steps to use the Repair/Compact Database function: 1. 2. Click the Repair/Compact Database command button. The database compacting operation will start. No further input is required. At the conclusion of the operation you will be returned to the Terminal Manager main screen.
Repair/Compact/Replace Database
Purpose
The purpose of this function is to repair/compact the terminal database or replace the terminal database with a previously created backup file.
Accessing the Repair/Compact/Replace Database Function

Follow these steps to access the Repair/Compact/Replace Database functions: 1. 2. 3. Start the Terminal Manager application. From the File menu, select the Repair/Compact/ Replace Database option. The Repair/Compact or Replace Database screen appears:
Replace Database With Backup

If your database is not working properly and the Repair/ Compact Database function does not fix the problem, you can replace the existing database with a backup. Note: You will lose any database information received since the last backup was performed! Follow these steps to replace the existing main database with a backup copy: 1. 2. Click the Replace Original Database With Backup command button. A warning message will appear. Proceed only if there is a problem with the existing database which requires reverting to an earlier version of the database. To proceed, click the OK button. A file navigation dialog box appears. Use it to locate the backup file you want to use. Highlight the file and click the Open button. The database replace process will begin. Message boxes will report the progress and successful conclusion of the process. Click OK to return to the Terminal Manager main screen.
3.
Click the command button associated with the database management function you want to use. The next two sections cover the two functions available from this screen: Repair/ Compact Database and Replace Original Database With Backup.
4.
4-14
CHAPTER 5 - GETTING TERMINAL DATA

Once youve installed Triton Connect, configured the Call Monitor application and added terminals to the database, you can begin scheduling calls to those terminals. Initially, you will probably want to get data from your terminals, especially to obtain a reference or baseline for any changes you may want to make later.
Selecting a Terminal
Many of the fields on the Get Terminal Data screen should be familiar to you from the chapter on terminal setup. In that chapter you were introduced to these fields, and saw that each helps to identify a particular terminal, and provides criteria that can be valuable when using the search or filtering capabilities of Triton Connect to locate, identify and group terminals. Use the data to help identify and select the terminal(s) you want to work with. The Terminal ID selection list is particularly important: it provides a quick way to pick the terminal you want from a list of available terminals. If the list is very long, it may be more efficient to use the Search feature to select a terminal. The Filters function is also very useful when you need to group terminals in smaller groups, according to some criteria previously specified. If you know the ID of the terminal, the easiest method is to select it directly from the Terminal ID drop-down list:
Get Terminal Data Function

The Get Terminal Data function provides a number of options that allow you to specify the kinds of data you want to retrieve from your terminals. These options fall into the following categories: Get Terminal Data Get All Journal Data Get Last-X Journal Data Synchronize Date and Time Get Error Status Get Coupon Data Get Selected Parameters
In this chapter you will learn how to use the Get Terminal Data function to select the terminals you want to contact and specify the data retrieval options you want to use.
Accessing the Get Terminal Data Function

1. 2. Start the Terminal Manager application. From the Terminal Data menu, select the Get Terminal Data option. The Get Terminal Data screen appears:
This works great if youre dealing with a single terminal. If you want to broadcast your data retrieval request to multiple terminals, you can use the Broadcast feature. Click the Broadcast button:
The Build Broadcast List appears:
5-2

Highlight the terminals you want to select in the Available list: If you want to remove a selected terminal from the Broadcast List, select it:
Then click the Remove -> button to return the selected terminal to the Available List. TECHNIQUES FOR SELECTING MULTIPLE TERMINALS To highlight a group of terminals, click once on the first terminal, then hold down the SHIFT key while clicking on the last terminal in the group. This will highlight the first terminal, the last terminal and any terminals in between. To highlight multiple terminals that do not fall neatly into a group, hold down the CTRL key while you click on any terminal anywhere in the list. Click the <-Add button to add the highlighted terminal to the Broadcast list:
Notice that when you select a terminal, in either the Broadcast or Available Lists, a portion of the address data for that terminal appears in the fields at the lower part of the screen:
Repeat the last two steps for each terminal you want to include in the broadcast. If you want to broadcast to all terminals in the Available List, you can use the <-Select All button to move all terminals to the Broadcast list in a single step:
Click the Done button to return to the Get Terminal Data main screen.
Use the Clear All -> button to move all terminals in the Broadcast list back to the Available List.
The Terminal ID list will change to show only the terminals selected by the Broadcast feature:
5-3
TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL Selecting a Data Option

Once youve selected the terminal(s) you want to work with, use Select Options to choose an action to perform. There are seven options available, as shown here: JOURNAL CLEARING CAUTION: If Journal Clearing is set to Manual, and the Electronic Journal in the terminal has not been cleared before the next Get Journal Data command is issued, the old journal entries will still be present in the journal. These entries will be received during the download and stored in the journal database, duplicating the entries already stored there! IMPORTANT: The Electronic Journal cannot hold an unlimited number of entries. The 8-bit machines (9100/ 96XX/97XX/Mako/SS) can hold at most 2045 journal entries. The 32-bit machines (FT/RL/RT/9800) hold 32,768 entries. Based on size of available RAM in unit, graphics can also reduce the number of available journal storage. If the journal size limit is reached the terminal will enter an OUT OF SERVICE condition and will remain in that state until the journal is cleared!
You can use the check boxes to choose one or several options to take place when you initiate the data retrieval action. NOTE: Some options may not be available on the screen. This means the terminal model does not support that function.
Get Last-X Journal Data
Get Terminal Parameters

If you only want to obtain a subset of the set of records, you can select this function. The records are retrieved beginning with the most current record and working backward from that point. For example, entering 1000 in the data entry box will cause the retrieve function to obtain the most recent 1000 journal records from the terminal. If the number of entries you enter is greater than the total number of entries actually stored in the journal, all records will be retrieved.
Triton Connect will obtain all terminal parameter data for the selected terminal(s).
Get All Journal Data
This function will obtain all journal data for the selected terminal(s). Once selected, initiate the data retrieval by clicking the Get Data button:
The following window appears:
Synchronize Date & Time
Enter the Date/Time interval for optaining journal data.
The selected terminal(s) date and time are set to the same date and time as the Triton Connect PC (accounting for time zone and daylight savings differences, if any).
5-4

Get Error Status Get Selected Parameters
This option allows the user to retrieve selected parameters instead of the entire parameter list. * NOTE * In order to select this option, the Get Terminal Parameters option must be unchecked. Select the parameters you want to retrieve by highlighting the available options. You can select more than one option by holding the Control key (CTRL) down when you select.
Triton Connect will obtain all terminal error status information for the selected terminal(s). When you choose Get Terminal Parameters, the Select Options function automatically checks the Get Error Status option. If you dont want to obtain error status, you can simply uncheck it. * NOTE * Get Error Status is automatically selected as part of Get Terminal Parameters. To get ONLY the error status, uncheck Get Terminal Paramaters.
Get Coupon Data
When you click the checkbox for this option a message box will appear:
Once youve selected the parameters you want to retrieve, click the Add button to enter in the Parameters to Receive and click OK. The message asks if you want to Clear Coupon Data? Answer Yes if you want the terminal to clear out any stored coupon totals after the coupon data is retrieved. Answer No if you want to retain any previous totals after the coupon data is retrieved. NUMBER OF COUPON DISPENSES The terminal can track up to 99,999 coupon dispenses. The current total is retrieved by the Get Coupon function, and is available for analysis using the Coupon Report function of the Reports Manager.
5-5
TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL Call Scheduling

Once youve selected the terminal(s) you want to work with, and specified the data options you want, its time to initiate the data retrieval action. You will do this by clicking the Get Data button: PERSISTENT CALLS When you select an Interval Count and Interval, you are specifying that you want the terminal to be called automatically, on a repeating basis. An Interval Count and Interval of 2,d, for example, tells Triton Connect to make calls every two days, until you change the contact schedule. As additional examples, 3,h would specify calls every three hours, 2,w would be every two weeks, 6,m would be every 6 months, and 1,y would be once a year. Calls that repeat on a continuing basis are generally referred to as persistent calls. * NOTE * When entering Persistent Calls values, ensure there are no spaces between the AM/PM, commas, and values.
When you do so, a scheduling window appears:
The scheduling window provides a means for you to choose a date, time, and contact interval to use when calling the terminal(s) you selected earlier. Notice that the scheduler appears with the current data and time already loaded and ready to use. It is provided as a quick way to schedule an immediate, one-time only call to the selected terminal(s). If you want to use it, simply click OK, and the call will be scheduled to take place immediately. If the default contact time is not acceptable, you can change it to whatever you wish. The scheduler window offers all the information you need to create a customized contact time, including a breakdown of the scheduling format and an example entry. As an additional aid in understanding and composing call times, a table has been included on the next page, which provides an additional example, as well as a breakdown of each part of the contact time. The table also provides space to allow you to write in the values for contact times you compose yourself, if you desire. Once a suitable contact time has been composed, simply click OK to accept it. You can view the status of the call in various ways, which will be covered in the next chapter, Status Monitoring.
5-6
TABLE 5-1 - CALL SCHEDULING EXAMPLE:

Call the terminal on December 5, 1996, at eight thirty in the morning, then two days later, at the same time. Continue making calls every two days.
12/5/96 8: 30 AM,2,d
Month
D ay
Year
Hour: Minute : : : : : VALUES
AM/PM
Interval C ount
Interval
Month D ay Year H: M AM/PM Interval C ount
Use 1-12, corresponding to the months January through December. Use 1-31, as appropriate for the month in question. Valid for years 1980 through 2080 Hours in standard 12-hour time format. Minutes can be 0-59. Use 'AM' or 'PM', as appropriate for the time of day specified. Select an Interval Count appropriate to the Interval type chosen. The Interval Count represents the number of Intervals between calls, beginning at the start day and time you specified. For one-time-only calls, do not include an Interval Count. Valid intervals are: H=Hours, D=Days, W=Week, M=Month. For one-timeonly calls, do not include an Interval.
Interval
5-7
5-8
CHAPTER 6 - STATUS MONITORING

There are a number of ways to monitor Triton Connects activity as it performs call operations. These methods exist throughout the suite of Triton Connect applications. The Call Monitor, for example, provides two methods of monitoring Call Processor operation (these were covered in Chapter 3, Call Monitor Setup). In addition to those methods, others can be found in the Terminal Manager, Call Viewer, and Alarm Monitor applications. These methods enable you to monitor not only call activity, but also to see the results of status queries to the terminal, including errors detected during attempted calls and terminal error conditions. In this chapter, we will cover these methods.
Error Code
This column will hold the last status code received from the terminal. Normally, unless an error has occurred, this code will be 0.
Error Description
Viewing Terminal Status

This function enables you to see the last error code received from a terminal, along with a description of that error code. In this section you will learn how to access and view the status information provided by this function. This column will hold a description of the last status code received from the terminal. Normally, unless an error has occurred, this code will be 0 - No Errors.
Message Sent To
Accessing the Terminal Status Function

1. 2. Start the Terminal Manager application. From the View menu, select the Terminal Status option. The Terminal Status window appears: This column indicates that a paging message was sent to the e-mail ddress or the pager as configured in that status message setting and whether this message was successful.
Refresh / Auto Refresh
Auto Refresh - When Enabled, this screen will automatically update each time the Data Manager has new information for this function. Refresh (Auto Refresh Disabled) - This screen must be manually updated for new information.
The Terminal Status window provides information in a tabular format. Note the column headings.
Viewing Terminal Status Information

The Terminal Status Codes Cross-Reference tables are located in APPENDIX B. These tables show the status/error codes that can be received from various Triton ATM terminals.
Terminal ID
This column will list the IDs of every terminal that has been contacted by Triton Connect and that has returned status information.
6-2
CHAPTER 6 - STATUS MONITORING Viewing the Call List

Once youve scheduled a terminal for contact, the call is placed in the Call List, which holds a record of the request, waiting until the scheduled call time occurs. At that time, Triton Connect attempts to place the call to the terminal, using an available Call Processor to handle the communication details involved. CALL DELAY There is a fifteen (15) second delay between consecutive outgoing calls. This cannot be changed. This delay provides a window of opportunity for incoming calls from terminals to be received. NOTE: If Triton Connect is waiting on an incoming call from an ATM that has not or will not call back, then it can wait up to an hour before picking up the next call in the call list. If while monitoring the call list you observe an unusually long delay in receiving a return call from a terminal, you may wish to delete the call from the list, to allow other calls to be processed on the affected telephone line. In such cases troubleshooting of the affected terminal may be required to correct the problem. The Call List provides quite a lot of information concerning each call. Its tabular layout makes it easy to check the call status of a particular terminal. In this section, you will learn how to access and interpret the information provided by the Call List. Time to Call. This is the time of the next scheduled call to this terminal.
Viewing Call List Information

The Call List uses a table approach to present information. It provides a single-line entry for each terminal ID that is scheduled for contact. On each line, column headings identify the types of information available in the entry. To see all of the column headings you will need to scroll the display horizontally, as in the following examples:
These headings are briefly discussed in the following paragraphs. Terminal ID. The name Triton Connect uses to identify this terminal in the database.
Accessing the Call List Function

1. 2. Start the Terminal Manager application. From the View menu, select the Terminal Call List option. The Call List window appears:
Attempt. This is the number of attempts Triton Connect has made to contact this terminal. Triton Connect will make up to five attempts to reach the terminal before reporting a call error.
Time Contacted. This is the time a successful call to the terminal was achieved.
* NOTE * The Call List can be sorted ascending and descending by clicking on the field headings.
6-3

Called. This is a flag that indicates whether this terminal has been successfully contacted. A value of 0 indicates that the terminal has not been contacted. A value of -1 indicates the terminal has been contacted. CMD1 - CMD2. The Command fields contain codes representing the commands that were included in the message to the terminal. Up to eight commands can be included in each contact message.
Terminal Phone. This is the telephone number used to contact the terminal. This number was stored in the database when the terminal record was initially created.
The character that appears in each field represents a specific command to the terminal. These can be P (Get Parameters), C (Change Parameters), E (Get Error Status), J (Get Journal Data), and T (Synchronize Date and Time).
Deleting Individual Call List Entries

You can delete a call from the Call List by clearing it. To do this, follow these steps Call Interval Count. This is the Interval Count you chose when you scheduled this terminal for contact. 1. Highlight the entry you want to delete, by clicking on the arrow symbol next to the Terminal ID field:
Call Interval. This is the Interval you chose when you scheduled this terminal for contact. 2. Place the mouse cursor in the Terminal ID field and click once:
Record Busy. If the database record associated with this Call List entry is being accessed (the entry could be being updated to reflect changes to the terminals call status), a 1 will appear in this entry. If not, the value will be 0.
3.
Press the DELETE key on the keyboard to remove the entry from the Call List.
Clearing the Call List

Auto/Manual. This entry shows whether the Journal Clearing option for this terminal is set for Automatic (indicated by a value of -1), or Manual (indicated by a value of 0). If you need to remove all entries from the Call List, use the Clear function. Follow these steps: 1. Click the Clear button:
6-4

A confirmation message appears: These headings are briefly discussed below: Terminal ID. The name Triton Connect uses to identify this terminal in the database.
2.
Click the Yes button to clear all items from the Call List.
Time to Call. This is the time of the next scheduled call to this terminal.
Viewing the Call Error List

The Terminal Error List stores entries for failed terminal contacts. These failed contacts fall into the following two categories: Five attempts were made to contact a terminal, but the terminal did not answer. A terminal was called successfully, but did not return the call. Attempt. This is the number of attempts Triton Connect has made to contact this terminal. Triton Connect will make up to five attempts to reach the terminal before reporting a call error.
Accessing the Call Error List Function

1. 2. Start the Terminal Manager application. From the View menu, select the Terminal Call Error List option. The Call Error List window appears:
Time Contacted. This is the time a successful call to the terminal was achieved.
Called. This is a flag that indicates whether this terminal has been successfully contacted. A value of 0 indicates that the terminal has not been contacted. A value of -1 indicates the terminal has been contacted.
Viewing Call Error List Information

The error list information is presented in a grid arrangement. Each line entry represents a single terminal contact. The columns are the various data fields that contain the data associated with that terminal contact attempt. To see all of the column headings you will need to scroll the display horizontally.
Terminal Phone. This is the telephone number used to contact the terminal. This number was stored in the database when the terminal record was initially created.
6-5

Call Interval Count. This is the Interval Count you chose when you scheduled this terminal for contact.
Rescheduling Calls
If you wish, you can place a failed call back in the Call List, using the rescheduling function. To do so, follow these steps: 1. Click the Reschedule button:
Call Interval. This is the Interval you chose when you scheduled this terminal for contact. The following confirmation message appears:
Auto/Manual. This entry shows whether the Journal Clearing option for this terminal is set for Automatic (indicated by a value of -1), or Manual (indicated by a value of 0). 2. Answer Yes to the message. A call scheduling dialog box appears:
CMD1 - CMD2. The Command fields contain codes representing the commands that were included in the message to the terminal. Up to eight commands can be included in each contact message.
Schedule a time for the next attempt and click OK. The entry will be removed from the Call Error List and placed back in the Call List. The character that appears in each field represents a specific command to the terminal. These can be P (Get Parameters), C (Change Parameters), E (Get Error Status), J (Get Journal Data), and T (Synchronize Date and Time).
Clearing the Call Error List

The Terminal Error List may contain only entries that will not need to be rescheduled, or serve no other useful purpose. To remove these entries from the list, follow these steps: 1. Click the Clear command button:
2.
A series of confirmation messages will appear:
6-6

Respond Yes to these message to clear ALL entries from the Terminal Error List. The Call Viewer dialog box appears:
Refreshing the Error List

When the Call Error List is first displayed, it shows a snapshot of the current status of terminal contact errors. This frozen picture of events may not reflect the most recent entries, especially if the list has been displayed for some time. To refresh the display, click the Refresh button:
Connecting to the Call Monitor

When the Call Viewer window appears the utility will attempt to contact the Call Monitor, using a TCP/IP connection.
** IMPORTANT **
The TCP/IP protocol must be installed on the computer to enable Call Viewer-to-Call Monitor communications! See Chapter 2, Installation, for instructions on installing the TCP/IP protocol. The Call Processors that are currently running will be listed:
The display will be updated with the most current Error List status.
Using the Call Viewer

Call Processors handle the details of placing calls to terminals and answering calls from terminals. They communicate directly with your communications hardware to manage the transfer of data between your Triton Connect PC or network and one or more remote terminals. Because the Call Processors will usually be running on the Modem Server PC in a network environment, other PCs on the network may not have convenient access to the Call Processors. Triton Connect provides a solution: the Call Viewer application allows any legally licensed PC on the network to remotely view the activity of each Call Processor. In this section of the chapter, youll learn how to access and use the Call Viewer. If there are no Call Processors listed check the following: Are any Call Processors running? Check the Call Monitor and start the Call Processor(s), if necessary. Is the Call Viewer enabled at the Call Monitor? Make sure the Enable Call Viewer option in the Call Monitors Diagnostic menu is checked. Are the TCP/IP address and/or Port Number settings correct? Click the TCP/IP Settings option in the Call Monitors Settings menu. This will open the TCP/IP Settings dialog. Make a note of the TCP/IP Address and TCP/IP Port number for the Call Monitorto-Call Viewer entry. Click the TCP/IP Settings option in the Call Viewers Settings menu. This will open the Settings dialog. Check the IP Address and Call Monitor Port Number settings. The settings should match those noted for the Call Monitor. If necesary, change the values to match the Call Monitor settings.
Accessing the Call Viewer

1a. Start the Terminal Manager application. From the View menu, select the Call Processors option. - OR 1b. Select the Call Viewer option from the Triton Connect applications group, which can be reached via the Windows Start/Programs menu.
6-7

Managing Viewer Windows
To see the activity of an individual Call Processor, select it in the list and click the Show button: Or use the Hide All button to temporarily make ALL displayed viewers invisible.
A viewer window will open, showing the activity of that Call Processor, as in this example:
Use the Make All Same Size button to force all open viewer dialogs to match the size of the currently selected call viewer dialog.
You can pause and resume the activity of all displayed viewer windows by clicking the Screens Paused option in the Settings menu:
Note that the Show button changes to a Hide button if the viewer window for the currently selected Call Processor is visible:
A checkmark indicates that all viewer windows are paused. You can check the title bar of a viewer window to see if the status is "Screen Paused."
You can click the Hide button to make the currently selected viewer window invisible (the button will change to Show, allowing you to display the viewer again, as needed). To quickly display the viewer windows for ALL running Call Processors click the Show All button:
You can also pause the activity of a selected viewer by clicking the Pause button on that viewer's dialog.
6-8

Displaying Status Boxes
If you want to view a summary of each Call Processors activity, click the Display Status Boxes command button:
Alarm Monitor
The Alarm Monitor application provides a log of terminal error conditions. When it is running, it automatically receives error status as needed as calls from terminals are received. In this section you will learn how to access and view the status information provided by the Alarm Monitor.
Accessing the Alarm Monitor Function

Start the Triton Connect Alarm Monitor application by selecting its option from the Windows Start/Programs/Triton Connect menu. The Alarm Monitor application window appears:
The Call Viewer dialog changes to display a single-line activity summary for each active Call Processor:
You can use this display if you want to see a summary of each call Processors activity, but dont want to fill the screen with individual viewer windows. This display is comparable to the single-line summary display available at the Call Monitor main dialog. To hide this display, click the Remove Status Boxes command button:
Viewing Alarm Monitor Information

The Alarm Monitor status window provides information in a tabular format. It provides a single-line entry for each terminal ID that reported an error condition. On each line, column headings identify the types of information available in the entry. To see all of the column headings you will need to scroll the display horizontally. Most of the information presented for each terminal ID is extracted from the database, and serves to provide additional identifying information for each terminal, such as terminal address, points of contact, etc. This information was initially entered into the database when the terminal was added (see Chapter 4, terminal Setup, for procedures). Of particular concern to you will, of course, be the Error Condition column. It is here that the most recent error indication for the terminal will be provided. A complete listing of the error descriptions is provided in Terminal Status Codes Cross-Reference Tables on pages 6-3 through 6-16. Refer to your ATM manual for further information on error codes.
6-9

Pop-Up Feature
Normally, the Alarm Monitor will run in a minimized state in the Windows Task Bar. Every 30 seconds, the Alarm Monitor will check the terminal status table in the database for changes. If a change is detected, the Alarm Monitor will pop to the front of any application windows. The most recent error status will appear at the bottom of the Alarm Monitor status listing. You may disable this feature by going into Settings and checking Disable Pop-up. 4. When you're finished reviewing the log, click the OK button in the lower right corner of the screen to return to the Terminal Manager main screen.
* NOTE * If the Status Message log is too large to view in the interactive viewer in Triton Connect, you will be prompted to use a text editor (such as Word Pad) to view the log. Word Pad can be used to edit the file and reduce the size by deleting old entries that are no longer needed. This can be accomplished by starting Wordpad in Windows - Start, All Programs, Accessories, and select Wordpad at the bottom. In Word Pad, select File, Open and browse to the Triton Connect Installation directory, i.e. c:\Program Files\Tritconn\ and look for the fiile statmsg.log. Once the file is opened for editing, you can highlight the unnecessary portions and then delete them. The file should be ready for normal viewing in Triton Connect. If the file remains too large for Triton Connect to open, repeat the deletion process with Word Pad to delete more text.
Viewing the Status Message Log

The Status Message Log holds a record of the attempts by Triton Connect to report terminal status conditions to personnel using email message or pager calls.
Accessing the Status Message Log

Follow these steps to access the Status Message Log: 1. 2. 3. Start the Terminal Manager application. From the View menu, select the Status Message Log option. The Terminal Manager screen area is replaced by the Status Message Log window, shown here:
6-10
CHAPTER 7 - USING FILTERS

The filters function enables the creation of special filtering statements that act as database filters, limiting the number of records visible at any one time to only those records that match a particular set of conditions that you specify in the statement. This feature can be quite useful when working with a large number of terminal records, (or for operators in a network environment who handle only small groups of the entire terminal database), and only certain records are of immediate interest. For example, only those terminal records for a particular city can be visible, or only those terminals that belong to a particular organization. There are many possibilities. In general, activating a filter allows only those terminal records that match the filter criteria to be visible in the various terminal management functions (this includes all Terminal Data menu functions as well as the Delete and Modify Terminal, View and Set Terminal Parameters, View Terminal, Journal Data, Terminal Setup and Report Manager functions). When working in the terminal management functions, a small icon can be seen in the lower right corner of the function window. This icon shows the status of the filter function. If a filter is currently active, the icon appears as shown here:
The Filters Menu

The Filters menu contains the options shown here:
The Create/Edit/Delete option starts the Create/Edit/Delete function, which is used to create and manage filters. The Set Active Filter option is a cascading menu; highlighting it with the mouse opens another menu that lists the available filters by name, as shown in this example:
To enable a filter in the list, simply click on it with the mouse. When you do so, the selected filter becomes the active filter, and also appears in a list at the bottom of the Filters drop-down menu box, as the Current Filter:
Placing the mouse cursor over the icon will cause a balloon help pop-up to display the name of the filter:
To turn off all filters, select the No Filter option from the Set Active Filter sub-menu:
If no filters are currently active, the icon will be crossed out, as shown here: 1. 2.
Accessing the Filters Function

To view the Filters window perform the following steps: Start the Terminal Manager application. From the Filters menu, select the Create/Edit/Delete Filters option. The Create/Edit/Delete Filters function window appears:
7-2

Enter the name of the filter you are creating in the Filter Name text entry box:
Building the Filter Statement

Three drop-down list boxes and a text entry box provide the tools needed to build the filter statement:
Filter Creation and Management

As stated earlier, the purpose of the Create/Edit/Delete Filters function is the creation and management of filter statements. These statements act as database filters, making only those terminal data records that match a particular descriptive criteria available at any given time. The functions that enable you to create and manage these statements are described under the following headings: Creating A Filter Viewing A Filter Saving A Filter Editing A Filter Deleting A Filter The first list contains the fields that are common to each terminal data record. These are the fields that were filled in with data when the record was initially created, and consequently represent important searchable parameters. The filter statement is based on one or more fields from this listing. Perform the following steps to create a new filter statement: 1. Begin the construction of the filter statement by selecting the initial field of interest from the first dropdown list box. By selecting a field from this list you begin to limit the range of records that will pass through the filter. If necessary, additional fields from this list will be selected as you build a filter statement that is as specific as necessary:
Creating a Filter
Creating a filter involves constructing a filter statement by joining together a combination of drop-down list selections and user-defined entries. Together, these components make up a statement that describes the filtering operation you want.
The New Command
2.
Continue by choosing a comparison parameter from the second list. These values represent various ways that the field selected in the first box can be compared to the user-specified value that is entered in the third box.
Click on this command button to clear the File Name text entry box and prepare the controls to accept the entries that make up a new filter statement.
7-3

3. Enter a value for comparison in the third box. This is a real value that can be compared to the field specified in the first box. Select a value that helps to zero in on a smaller span of records within the range already limited by the selection of the first field: Basically, this statement can be interpreted to read, Select all records from the CONFIGURE table where the entry in the TID (Terminal ID) field of the table contains SAMPLE. When this filter is active, only those terminal data records where the Terminal ID includes the word SAMPLE will be available.
Saving a Filter
4. Finish the filter statement with the <END> command, or if necessary further refine the statement by linking it to one or more additional statements using the And/ Or commands. Selecting either And or Or begins a new statement line, which you build using the previous steps. Up to five additional lines may be added to the first statement. When satisfied with the final line, use the <END> command to complete the statement.
Click on the Save command button to save the filter statement with the name you specified earlier. All fields will clear, allowing for the creation of another filter and the newly saved filter will appear in the drop-down portion of the box:
MORE EXAMPLES Here are some additional examples of filter commands:
On a standalone (non-networked) system the procedure to use a filter after it has been saved is straightforward: simply click on the filter entry in the Set Active Filter menu to activate it (see the discussion concerning the Filters menu earlier in this section). In a networked environment, however, some additional considerations are involved. To see and access filters created at other workstations on the network, you must first update the Filters database by selecting any available filter, or by existing and re-entering the Terminal Manager Application. This operation will update or refresh the list in the Set Active Filters menu, displaying any additional entries for filters that have been created by other operators.
By combining the available filter criteria commands with words or phrases that describe specific terminals or groups of terminals in your database you can create filter statements to meet a wide range of needs.
Modifying a Filter
Viewing a Filter
The Generated SQL Statement window lets you see the actual commands that are joined together as you build the filter statement. This is how the final statement looks, using the entries from our example: An existing filter can be easily modified. The following steps summarize the procedure to follow: 1. 2. Select an Existing Filter. Click on the Load command button.
3.
Change the Filter Name, if desired.
7-4

4. Change the filter statement components as necessary. If the statement has multiple lines, select and edit the additional lines as needed. If you wish to delete a line, select the <END> statement on the previous line. Click the Save command button.
5.
Deleting a Filter
When a filter is no longer needed, delete it by performing the following steps: 1. 2. Select a Filter from the Filter Name list box. Click the Load command button to load the filter statement.
3.
Click the Delete command button.
Answer Yes to the confirmation message to remove the filter:
7-5
7-6
CHAPTER 8 - TERMINAL PARAMETERS

In this chapter we will introduce you to terminal parameters. These are the values that affect terminal operation or report the status of various terminal operations. Many terminal parameters are configurable, allowing you to make changes in the operation of a selected terminal by altering the value or state of the applicable parameter. Other parameters are read-only, meaning that you can view the parameters, but not change their values. * NOTE * You must be logged in the Terminal Manager with Supervisor permissions in order to change or set parameters. The Select Terminal window provides a Select Terminal ID list, which is populated with the names of all terminals currently loaded in the terminal database, or a subset of those terminals, as determined by the currently active Filter value, if the Filter feature is enabled. (See Chapter 7, Using Filters, for more information.) Next, youll need to select one or more terminals to view or configure. The next two sections describe how to do this.
Selecting a Terminal - General Procedure

1. Select the ID of the terminal you want to work with, using the Select Terminal ID drop-down list:
**** WARNING ****

The ability to make changes in terminal operation is a powerful feature provided by Triton Connect! You must exercise caution when making any changes; only make a change when you understand exactly the effect it will have on the terminal!
Accessing Terminal Parameters

1. 2. 3. Start the Terminal Manager application. If you want only to view parameters: at the Terminal Data menu, select the View Terminal Parameters option. If you want to change parameters: at the Terminal Data menu, select the Set Terminal Parameters option. Alternatively, you can use the Next and Previous buttons to move forward or backward through the list of available terminals:
The Terminal Parameters screen appears. By default, the Select Terminal screen is shown first:
Notice that when you select a terminal, a portion of the address data for that terminal appears in the fields at the left of the main window:
Selecting Terminals
8-2
CHAPTER 8 -TERMINAL PARAMETERS

2. After selecting a terminal, click the View Parameters button:
** IMPORTANT **
A terminal must have been previously contacted and parameters downloaded to be available for viewing! If you select a terminal for which no data has been previously downloaded, a warning message will appear on the Terminal Parameters main window:
The Select Terminal window is replaced with selection tabs for the various terminal parameter categories:
Also, the View Parameters button will be disabled. 4. You can select a different terminal by clicking the Next or Previous buttons to more forward or backward through the list of available terminals.
The following terminal parameter categories are available: 3. Ad Graphics/File Manager Advanced Settings Amounts Cassette Stat Comm Control Format ISO No./Owner Info Triton Connect Settings Messages/Coupons Version Numbers Passwords
When you click the Next or Previous button, the Select Terminal window will appear and the chosen terminal ID will be highlighted in the Select Terminal ID list. If you wish, you can choose a different terminal from the list. Once youve selected a terminal, click the View Parameters button to return to the parameter tabs view for that terminal.
Receipt Graphics Status Surcharge 1.
Selecting Multiple Terminals (Broadcast Feature)

Click the Broadcast button:
Terminal Totals Text Ad Screens LED Sign Message The Build Broadcast List appears:
Select the tab for the parameter area you wish to view. The selected tab will present the state of the parameters as of the last time the parameters were retrieved from the currently terminal (See Chapter 5, Getting Terminal Data, for more information). The last contacted date and time is shown in the upper-right corner.
8-3

2. Highlight the terminals you want to select in the Available list: 6. If you want to move all the terminals in the Broadcast list back to the Available List, click the Clear All -> button. Select a terminal in the Broadcast List to enable the View Parameters button:
7.
Click the View Parameters button. The Select Terminal window is replaced with tabs for the various categories of terminal parameters, as shown here: TECHNIQUES FOR SELECTING MULTIPLE TERMINALS To highlight a group of terminals, click once on the first terminal, then hold down the SHIFT key while clicking on the last terminal in the group. This will highlight the first terminal, the last terminal and any terminals in between. To highlight multiple terminals that do not fall neatly into a group, hold down the CTRL key while you click on any terminal anywhere in the list.
3.
Click the <-Add button to add the highlighted terminal(s) to the Broadcast list:
8.
Once the parameter tabs appear, the broadcast list is no longer visible. To see which terminals are in the broadcast list, use the list box in the upper left corner of the Terminal Parameters main dialog:
4.
Repeat the last two steps for any other terminal(s) you want to add to the Broadcast List. If you want to broadcast to all terminals in the Available List, use the <-Select All button to highlight all of the terminals and click the <-Add button to move them to the Broadcast list in a single step.
This list box appears when at least one terminal has been added to the broadcast list. To scroll through the list, use the up and down arrows.
5.
If you want to remove one or more terminals from the Broadcast List, use the procedures described in Step 2 to highlight the terminal(s) and then click the Remove -> button to return the terminal(s) to the Available List.
8-4
CHAPTER 8 -TERMINAL PARAMETERS Setting Terminal Parameters

Select the parameter areas you want to work with by clicking on the applicable tab(s). Make the necessary parameter changes. Note the following: 1. When you make a change to a parameter the entry will appear RED to indicate the value has been changed. If a data entry field or control is not applicable to the currently selected terminal, the field or control will be grayed out or disabled. NOTE: If all choices are grayed out, be sure you have chosen Set parameters rather than View. 2. 3. If a single terminal is selected, each parameter change you made will be applied to that terminal only. If a broadcast list was used, each parameter change you made will be applied to all terminals in the list. * NOTE * When broadcasting parameters, all ATMs should be of similiar type. For instance, graphics for a Model 97XX ATM can not be sent to a Model RL5000 ATM unit.. After all parameter changes have been made, click the Send Parameters button to schedule the terminal(s) for contact. If you want to use it, simply click OK, and the call will be scheduled to take place immediately. If the default contact time is not acceptable, you can change it to whatever you wish. The scheduler window offers all the information you need to create a customized contact time, including a breakdown of the scheduling format and an example entry. Schedule a contact time for the terminal and accept it. The changes you made will be sent to the selected terminal (or multiple terminals, if the Broadcast feature was chosen) at the scheduled time. Once a suitable contact time has been composed and entered in the scheduling window, click OK to accept it.
This will bring up a call scheduling window:
The scheduling window provides a means for you to choose a date, time, and contact interval to use when calling the terminal(s) you selected earlier. Notice that the scheduler appears with a contact time already loaded and ready to use. By default, this contact time is the current time. It is provided as a quick way to schedule an immediate, one-time only call to the selected terminal(s).
8-5
TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL Messages/Coupons
About Messages and Coupons

Messages use the terminal display screen to convey information to the customer. Messages are used to greet the customer, make promotional offers, encourage repeat use, etc. NOTE: The Store and Marketing Messages also print on the customers receipt. Coupons are typically used as a promotional incentive, awarding a product, service, or discount as an incentive for making withdrawals from the terminal. Such awards or incentives are typically referred to as prizes. Coupons are triggered by the occurrence of either a withdrawal above a certain level (Level Coupon), or as a random percentage of all withdrawals (Random Percentage). When triggered as either a level-based or random event, the coupon is printed by the terminal at the conclusion of the transaction. A notification screen appears on the terminal display to inform the customer that a prize award coupon is printing. This tab lets you change message text, configure coupon parameters and select the language used by the terminal to present customer screens. 2.
Changing Messages
Follow these steps to change a message: 1. Click the option button for the message you want to change, as in this example:
Edit the existing message or type a new message in the text window:
Use the provided keystroke sequences when editing text:
8-6

Enabling Coupons
Follow these steps to enable/disable Printed and Dispensed coupons: 1. Printed Coupons. Select the Yes option from the Coupon Enabled control to enable printed coupons. Select No to disable printed coupons. 2. Random-Based Award. Click inside the Random Percentage text box and enter a percentage value.
Language Selection
The language selection features allow you to select the default language to use when presenting messages to the customer and to enable the presentation of messages in a bilingual format. Follow these steps to configure the language selection options: 1. Default Language. Click the Default Language list to view the options. Language 1 corresponds to the default (usually English) language. Language 2 corresponds to a second language, as determined by the terminal software version.
2.
Dispensed Coupons. Place a check in the Coupon Dispensing enabled checkbox to enable dispensed coupons. Remove the check to disable dispensed coupons. Note: Coupons are dispensed from a cassette other than currency.
Setting Level and Random Coupon Thresholds

If you want each customer to receive a prize coupon upon making a withdrawal of 20 dollars or more, for example, then set a Coupon Level of 20 dollars. Set the Random Percentage field to zero. If you want a percentage of all customers to receive a coupon, no matter what the level of their withdrawal, establish a Random Percentage, such as 50 percent and set the Coupon Level to a value GREATER than the Maximum Withdrawal Amount. By using both a level and percentage award, using the previous example values (Coupon Level of 20 and Random Percentage of 50) you can award coupons to ALL customers making withdrawals of 20 dollars or more and 50 percent of customers making withdrawals less than 20 dollars. Follow these steps to set the award thresholds for Level and Random Coupons: 1. Level-Based Award. Click inside the Coupon Level text box and enter a coupon level amount. This set of controls is READ ONLY; its purpose is to allow you to view the current state of the coupon cassette configuration in the terminal whose data is being viewed.
2.
Multi-Lingual. Select the Yes option from the Mult Lingual control to enable presentation of customer screens in a bilingual format. Select No to disable the bilingual presentation.
Coupon Cassette Selection
8-7
TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL Status
About Status
This tab provides a read-only display of the status of various aspects of the terminals operating configuration, such as the current operating mode, current terminal status, and security settings. It also allows you to clear error conditions and reset the terminal. Sequence No. This number is incremented each time a transaction is performed by the terminal. The Sequence Number is printed on the customers transaction receipt and is also recorded in the terminals electronic journal entry for the transaction. Last Authorization No. The Authorization Number is generated by the host processor and authorizes the terminal to perform a transaction. The most recent authorization number is reported here. DES Chip Loaded. DES (Data Encryption Standard) is an encryption system used to protect customer data. The word YES indicates that a DES system is installed on the terminal. Security Module Present. The Security Module protects communications between the terminals control electronics and the dispenser mechanism. The word YES indicates that a Security Module is installed in the terminal. Demo Mode. In Demonstration Mode the terminal will operate in a simulated customer transaction mode. The word NO indicates the terminal is processing customer transactions normally. Last Dispensed Status. After each dispense operation (usually the result of a customer withdrawal transaction) the status of the dispenser mechanism in the terminal is reported. The status value can be used to evaluate problems with the dispenser.
Read-Only Values
Master Key Check Digits. These digits are generated by the terminal after the PIN Master Key has been loaded. It is used to confirm that the PIN Master Key was loaded correctly, by comparing it to a reference set of Check Digits, which it should match. Check Digits. This screen shows the PIN Master, PIN Working, and MAC Master/Working (if used) check digits. The Left/Right check digits information is displayed if the terminals software reuires inputting the key information in that format. Comms Key Check Digits. These digits are generated by the terminal after the PIN Working Key has been loaded. It is used to confirm that the PIN Working Key was loaded correctly, by comparing it to a reference set of Check Digits, which it should match. * NOTE * The parameters referred to as Master Key and Comms Key are referred to as PIN Master Key and PIN Working Key.
8-8

Clearing Errors and Resetting the ATM
The Error Code line displays the most recent terminal status condition:
Terminal Service Status

This button shows the terminal service status that will take effect once parameters are sent to the terminal. By default, the service status is set to Terminal In Service. Clicking the button changes the status to Terminal Out of Service.
If an error status is shown, follow these steps to clear the error status: 1. Click the Clear Error and Reset ATM button. The <Cleared> label is added to the error status and the entire entry is marked in RED. Red color indicates a changed parameter not yet sent to the terminal. After making any other required parameter changes, click the Send Parameters button to schedule the terminal for contact.
TERMINAL STATUS FEATURE The ability to place the Terminal In Service or Out of Service must be supported by the ATM software running on the selected terminal(s). Otherwise, selecting this function will have no effect on terminal operation!
2.
View VendMate Status

The View Vend Mate Status function has not been activated in this version of Triton Connect.
When parameters are sent to the terminal the error status will be reset. If the condition that caused the error status is corrected the updated status will be displayed. If the error was not cleared contact your service organization. If no errors exist a status of 0 - No Errors will be displayed.
8-9
TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL ISO No./Owner Info

About ISO Numbers:
The ISO Number identifies an Independent Sales Organization (ISO) or other organization that provides ATM transaction processing services. The ISO Number is stored on the magnetic strip on a bank card. When the card is used to perform a transaction, the ATM reads the ISO Number to determine if certain actions (such as blocking the surcharge) should be performed. There are two (2) methods for configuring ISO actions: Traditional and Grid.
Owner Identification
Terminal Owner. This message will appear to the customer on the surcharge warning screen. It is used to provide the name of the owner of the terminal. Surcharge Owner. This message will appear on the Configuration Summary Report in the X-Scale series ATMs or the Printer Test report on all other model terminals. It is used to provide the name of the individual or organization that receives the surcharge. Follow these steps to change the Terminal or Surcharge Owner entries: 1. 2. Click inside the Terminal Owner or Surcharge Owner entry, as applicable. Type the new message.
View / Modify ISO Numbers

Select either Traditional for entering individual ISO numbers or Grid for bulk entry of ISO numbers.
Allow only Accept ISOs

Setting on ATM to allow only ISO numbers with action Accept.
Send ISO regardless of Changes

This option has Triton Connect send this terminals ISO numbers without having to modify any entries.
Click for ISO Numbers

Select this option to bring up ISO number entry screen (either Traditional or Grid).
8-10

ISO Entry Screen (Grid Method)
" !
# $
Select the Click for ISO Numbers option. The ISO Grid Entry screen appears.
Modify Action Parameter

Select the cell to modify then click the Modify ISO Action Parameter button. The following screen appears:
" !
This bar lists the different action items (Block Surcharge, Decline Card, etc). BIN number entry cells. Allows cutting/copying/
pasting.
ISO Packet size: 65,000 (limit) Max ISO Entries: 10,000 (limit) Used ISO Entries: Current number of entries Max ISO Length: Length of numbers Reset: Resets grid to status before any changes Modify ISO Action parameter: Brings up ISO Action Parameter window. OK: Submits changes to be sent to terminal Cancel: Cancels all changes
The selected ISO number and ISO action is displayed. A text box for entering ISO Actions parameter. Press OK to submit changes to be sent to the terminal or Cancel all changes.
8-11

ISO Entry Screen (Traditional Method)
Select the Click for ISO Numbers option. The Original ISO Entry Method screen appears. 1. Entry the ISO numbers that are applicable to the current terminasl in the text box. Up to one hundred (100) numbers can be entered. To see the complete listing of ISO numbers that are currently loaded, click the ISO Numbers list.
Block Surcharge. Selecting this action will cause the terminal to allow surcharge - free transactions when a customer uses a card with the currently displayed ISO number. Decline Card. Selecting this action will cause the terminal to refuse to process transactions when a customer uses a card with the currently displayed ISO number. User Defined Surcharge Amount. Selecting this option will cause the terminal to apply the applicable surcharge to transactions performed with a card that uses the currently displayed ISO number. The surcharge to be applied must be entered in the ISO Action Parameter box. Accept. This action supports the Bingo feature applicable to UK versions of ATM software. The action will be applied to transactions performed with cards that use the currently displayed ISO number. Award Coupon. This action will cause a coupon to be awarded if the currently displayed ISO number is detected when the customers ATM card is scanned. Block Mobile Top-Up. For UK, this will turn off the Mobile Top-Up transaction selection for the specified ISO number. Other (6).
2.
Depending on the terminal model, press ENTER to add the new ISO Number.
ISO Action
This option appears for X-Scale and some UK 97XX terminals. The available actions are:
8-12

EMV Settings
If the terminal supports EMV, this button will appear on the ISO tab for parameters. When selected, the following EMV parameters are displayed:
Enable EMV. Allow terminal to process magnetic stripe based transaction. Allow terminal to process magnetic stripe data as a fallback. ICC will be latched and remain latched until user is prompted to remove card. Terminal will add the tag data that is stored on the terminal to journal entries.
You can enable/disable EMV-specific parameters and applications.
8-13
TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL COMM
About Communications Parameters

Use this screen to make changes to the communications configuration of the selected terminal. The settings shown apply to communications with the Host Processor servicing the selected terminal.
Dial Rate
Use this function to set the speed at which dialing tones are transmitted by the modem in the terminal. Follow these steps to change the Dial Mode: 1. Click in the Dial Rate list box to view the options: 70, 150 and 255 milliseconds.
Dial Mode
* NOTE * These options are not available for all units. Do Not adjust these settings unless instructed by your Host Processor. Select the mode to be used by the modem in the terminal when dialing out: touch-tone, or pulse (rotary dial system).
2. Follow these steps to change the Dial Mode: 1. Click in the Dial Mode list box to view the options: Tone and Pulse.
Select the dialing rate appropriate for the terminal. Note: At the terminal the dialing rates are designated as FAST (70 milliseconds), MEDIUM (150 milliseconds), or SLOW (255 milliseconds).
Baud Rate
Baud rate is a measure of the speed of communications between two devices. The higher the baud rate, the faster the rate at which communication can take place. In terms of terminal communication, any given baud rate represents the highest speed at which the terminal and the host processor can communicate.
2.
In most cases you will select Tone, to take advantage of Touch-Tone dialing services; however, if the telephone switching system servicing the terminal uses the older, rotary dialing system, select Pulse.
8-14

Follow these steps to change the Baud Rate: 1. Click in the Baud Rate list box to view the options: typical values are 300, 1200 and 2400, but even higher values may be listed, depending upon the capabilities of the modem in the terminal.
2.
Enter the MKey Index value.
Routing I.D.
Also referred to as the Compuserve ID, this setting is used by some processors to route transactions. Obtain the routing ID from your processor. 2. Select the baud rate at which the modem in the terminal communicates with the processor during customer transactions. If necessary, consult with your processor to obtain this value. Follow these steps to enter a Routing ID: 1. Click inside the Routing ID text box.
Predial
The Predial functions enables the terminal to dial out to the processor as soon as the customers ATM or credit card has been scanned, reducing the overall transaction processing time. If Predial is disabled, the terminal waits until the customer confirms a specific transaction before dialing out. Note: Predial must be supported by the processor! Follow these steps to configure the Predial setting: 1. Click in the Predial list box to view the options: Yes and No.
2.
Enter the Routing ID value.
Modem Init String

If the modem in the terminal requires a non-standard configuration, a Hayes-compatible setup string can be sent to the modem when it is initialized. Follow these steps to enter a Modem Init String: 1. Click inside the Modem Init String.
2.
Select Yes to turn Predial on, or No to turn Predial off, as applicable. 2. Enter the Modem Init String.
Mkey Index
This is a special communications parameter required by some processors. Obtain the MKey index from your processor. Follow these steps to enter an MKey Index: 1. Click inside the MKey Index text box.
Phone Numbers
The terminal communicates with the host processor over a dial-up phone line. The phone number of the processor must be entered before live transactions can be performed. The Host Phone Number is entered at the terminal during the initial setup. An Alternate Host Phone Number may also be used to provide a backup in case the primary host phone number is unavailable.
8-15

The Host and Alternate Phone Numbers are displayed in read-only mode.
Parity Selection
In some cases the host processor may require communications using 8 bits per character and no parity, instead of the more commonly used configuration of 7 bits per character and even parity. The Parity Selection function allows you to switch between the two types of parity. Follow these steps to change the parity type: 1. Place a checkmark in the parity selection checkbox to disable the use of parity.
228-555-1212
228-555-1212
2.
Remove the checkmark to enable even parity.
8-16
CHAPTER 8 -TERMINAL PARAMETERS Terminal Totals
About Terminal Totals

This tab lists significant terminal transaction totals. The values shown are read-only.
Total Debit Amount

This is the total monetary value of all Debit transactions that have taken place.
Total Debit Transactions

This is the total number of checking and savings account withdrawal transactions that have taken place since the last Day Close.
Total Credit Amount

This is the total monetary value of all Credit transactions that have taken place. * NOTE * Terminal Totals are calculated from Day Close to Day Close. If Day Closes are not being performed, the totals are cumulative.
Total Credit Transactions

This is the total number of credit card withdrawal transactions since the last Day Close.
Total Balance Inquiries

This is the total number of balance inquiry transactions since the last Day Close.
Total Transfers Done

This is the total number of account transfer transactions since the last Day Close.
8-17
TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL Text AD Screens
About Text Ad Screens

Triton Connect allows text-based Ad Screens to be downloaded to a terminal. The Ad screens will appear with the Transaction Processing Please Wait message that is displayed while the customer is waiting for a transaction to be completed. Four Ad Screens can be created, each consisting of up to eight lines of text. The on-screen duration of (in seconds) can be set for each Ad. 2. DISPLAY OF TEXT AD SCREENS Graphics Ad Screens will take priority over textbased screens. If the terminal is running Graphics Ad Screens, no Text Ad Screens will be displayed. If no Graphics Ad Screens are loaded AND the Ad Screen function is turned ON (via Triton Connect or by local terminal control), Text Ad Screens will be displayed. 3. Move the mouse cursor into the message window area and click the left mouse button to establish the starting point of the message. Type the text as you want it to appear on the display. Use the Alt-key sequences to help format the text as you type. Assign a duration for the Ad (typically 5 to 10 seconds): Follow these steps to create a text-based Ad Screen: 1. Select the AD Screen (1, 2, 3 or 4).
4.
To disable a specific Text Ad Screen, simply change the Display Duration to zero.
8-18
CHAPTER 8 -TERMINAL PARAMETERS Amounts
Changing Amounts
Use this screen to make changes to the cash amounts applicable to the listed parameters, by typing the values directly into the applicable text entry boxes. Follow these steps to change the maximum amount: 1. 2. Click inside the Max Withdrawal Amount text box. Enter the maximum withdrawal amount.
Max. Withdrawal Amount

This is the maximum amount allowed per customer withdrawal transaction. It can be set from 1 to 999999 in increments of 1 and it must be an even multiple of the denomination that is in the cassette. The value is dollar amount only; no cents are allowed. Whenever a withdrawal amount is entered, either through a Fast Cash selection or by user-defined entry, the amount is compared to the maximum withdrawal limit. If the amount is larger than the limit, an error message warns the user and displays the maximum allowable amount. * NOTE * The maximum withdrawal amount DOES NOT override any maximum set by a network. The transaction will be sent to the network if the amount entered or selected is less than or equal to the maximum. The network must still approve the amount.
Fastcash Amounts
These are common cash values offered to the customer as quick withdrawal amounts. Up to five fast cash amounts can be entered. Follow these steps to change the Fast Cash amounts: 1. 2. Click inside a Fastcash text box. Enter the fast cash amount. * NOTE * Fastcash amounts MUST be values that are multiples of the denomination. Other amounts will cause an error condition at the terminal.
Denomination
This field varies depending upon the terminal type (single or multiple-cassette), and is normally a read-only field that indicates the denomination of the currency in the cassette(s).
8-19
TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL Cassette Stat
About Cassette Stat

This tab provides read-only status information for each cassette in the terminal. A Cassette Data area is provided for each cassette.
Reject Events
Number of rejects that occurred during dispensing of cash from this cassette.
Document Value
Indicates the denomination of notes for multi-cassette terminals only. This field is not visible if the curently selected terminal is a single cassette unit.
Dispensed Amount
Amount of cash dispensed from this cassette so far.
Cash Remaining
Cash remaining in the cassette. Equals Cash Loaded minus Dispensed Amount.
Total Transactions
Displayed for single-cassette terminals only. Total number of cash withdrawal transactions involving this cassette.
Cash Loaded
Amount of cash initially loaded into this cassette. This value would be entered at the terminal by personnel responsible for loading the cassette with cash. * NOTE * The Cash loaded amount must be entered correctly at the terminal for these amounts to be correct.
8-20
CHAPTER 8 -TERMINAL PARAMETERS Version Numbers
About Version Numbers

This tab allows you to view the version numbers for key components of the operating software loaded on the terminal. The information provided is read-only.
Program Version #
The Program is the terminal operating software, which is downloaded to the terminal either locally or remotely via Triton Connect. This entry is the version number of the software currently loaded in the terminal.
Model #
This is the model number of the indicated terminal.
Table Version #
The term Table refers to the software component that provides the ATM user interface and associated terminal control functionality. This entry is the version number for the table component of the currently loaded version of terminal operating software.
Eprom Version #
The Eprom holds software downloading, initialization, testing and low-level interface routines. This is the version number of the Eprom chip currently installed in the terminal.
8-21
TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL AD Graphics/File Manager
* NOTE * To access AD Graphics for 32-bit terminals (RL/FT5000, RL/RT2000, 98XX), the message to the right will appear on this screen.
About Ad Graphics/File Manager

This tab helps you control the display of Ad Graphics on a selected terminal. You will use it to: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Create ad graphics using the Ad Designer utility. Enable or disable the display of ad graphics at the terminal. Configure the memory used by the terminal to store graphics. View graphics files currently loaded on the terminal. Add, remove and overwrite graphics files. Schedule graphic display times.
The graphic creation functions will not be addressed in this chapter. Complete coverage can be found in Chapter 13, Ad Designer.
Enabling Ad Graphics
You can enable or disable the display of ad screen graphics at the terminal using this control:
Check the box to enable the display of ad screens at the terminal. Uncheck it to disable.
Configuring Memory
Follow these steps to select and format the terminals memory: 1. Select the memory card in the terminal you want to work with (Memory 1 or Memory 2) by clicking on the appropriate option button.
Creating Ad Graphics
The actual creation of Ad Graphics is handled by the Ad Designer function, which you can access form the Ad Graphics/File Manager screen by clicking the View/Edit Ad button:
8-22

2. If the Available Memory window does not show a value, then the selected memory card has not been formatted. If this is the case, select the option to re-format the memory card. 2. Select the Show files currently loaded option. The current contents of the memory card are displayed in the text window:
* NOTE * Some Triton System products, such as the SuperScrip terminal, must have its memory storage formatted via Triton Connect before use, using the Reformat Memory Card 1 option. 3. 3. If you want to reformat the selected memory card, make sure the corresponding check box is checked: To see the files that will remain on the terminal after the file download operation has taken place, select the Show files to be remaining after send operation option:
4.
A warning message will appear asking you to confirm the re-format action:
Select Yes to confirm the re-format action. Once the reformatting operation has been completed successfully, the appropriate value should show in Available Memory window. Ad Screen graphics can now be downloaded to the selected terminal.
You will add and remove files from this list as necessary to make it reflect the contents you want for the selected memory card.
Adding Files
Follow these steps to add a new graphics file to the selected memory card: 1. Select the memory card you want to add the file to:
Viewing Files
Follow these steps to see the files currently loaded on the terminal: 1. Select the memory card whose contents you want to view:
2.
Click the Add File button:
8-23

A file browser will appear. Use it to locate and select the file you want to add: 1a. If the file is currently loaded on the terminal, select the file in the Files to remain after Send Parameters list:
1b. If the file is scheduled to be added and you want to remove it, select the file in the Files to be added list:
* NOTE * Only .TCG files can be selected to send to terminals other than RL/FT5000 and RT2000 models. See Chapter 13 Ad Designer for information on creating these files. Click OK to accept the selection. The file will be added to the list of files to remain:
2.
Click the Remove File button:
When you remove files that are currently loaded on the terminal, the files are listed in the Files to be removed list:
If you change your mind about any file in this list, simply highlight it and click the Remove File button again. The file will be returned to the Files to remain after Send Parameters list.
Overwriting Files
3. Repeat the previous steps to add any additional files to the list. The files you choose will also be listed to the Files to be added list: If you want to overwrite the files currently stored in the selected memory card with the ones in the Files to remain after Send Parameters list, check the box for the Overwrite existing files on terminal action:
Removing Files
To remove a file that is currently loaded on the terminal, follow these steps:
If you choose not to overwrite files, the files you send will be added to those already stored in the affected memory card.
8-24

Scheduling Ad Graphic Display Times
Perform the following steps to schedule the display time for an add graphic: 1. 2. Select file name in the Files To Remain After Send Parameters list to highlight the file. Click on the Schedule button. Select the time(s) that the ad screen will be scheduled for display on the terminal. (The Scheduling options are described next.)
Selecting a Specific Time

Right or left clicking on a specific time will change the hour selected from green to red or red to green. The Ad Screen displays during the selected hour(s) highlighted in green. The Ad Screen will not displayed during the selected hour(s) that are highlighted in red.
Finalizing the Schedule

Click the Apply button to set the scheduled time for the selected Ad Screen graphic. Click the OK button to return to Ad Graphics/File Manager main screen.
Always. Selecting the Always option changes the color of the grid to green to indicate that the Ad Graphic is displayed at all times except when a transaction is taking place. Never. Choosing the Never option changes the color of the grid to red to indicate the Ad Screen is never displayed.
8-25
TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL Receipt Graphics
* NOTE * To access Receipt Graphics for 32-bit terminals (RL/FT5000, RL/RT2000, 98XX), the message to the right will appear on this screen.
About Receipt Graphics

This tab allows graphics created with any graphics application that supports BMP files to be formatted and downloaded to the terminal. The graphics can be printed on various receipt types produced by the terminal. Receipt printer graphics are limited to monochrome (black/ white) BMP files that have a maximum resolution of 384 dots wide by 384 dots high. The settings of the Receipt Graphics controls will determine how the printed graphic appears on the receipt. The setup parameters are described below:
Receipt Graphic Configuration

Follow these steps to configure the terminals memory: 1. Select a memory card (Memory 1 or Memory 2) to view the current graphic(s) stored in the terminals memory.
2.
Select a receipt from the Receipt Type list.
Enabling Receipt Graphics

You can enable or disable the printing of graphics on receipts using this control: The name of the receipt graphic that is currently loaded (if any) at the terminal is displayed in the Graphic Filename box, as in this example:
Click on the box to enable (check) or disable (unchecked) receipt graphic printing.
8-26

If there is no graphic currently loaded for the selected receipt type, the Graphic Filename will be blank. 3. To load a graphic for the selected receipt, click the Select File button and use the file dialog box to locate and select the file you want to use. An image of the file will appear in the Preview window: 4. 5. If you change your mind and want to remove the file, click the Remove File button. Select a justification setting for the receipt graphic. 7. 8. Repeat Steps 2-6 for another receipt type, as necessary. Overwrite the existing graphic on the selected memory card with the new graphic by checking Overwrite Existing Files on Terminal. 6. Choose the location for the graphic on the receipt.
8-27
TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL Advanced Settings
About Advanced Settings

This screen provides access to additional terminal parameters. The parameters are extremely sensitive functions that should not be altered unless you understand the affect on terminal operation or are instructed to enable a feature by your Host Processor or Technical Support personnel! Check the box next to the parameter you want to change. * NOTE * Each parameter description is written to describe the checked state of the parameter. For example, the parameter Balance inquiries enabled is enabled when the checkbox is checked:
Credit Card Transactions Enabled
Check this option to enable the terminal to present a credit card withdrawal transaction option to the customer.
Transfers Enabled
Check this option to enable the terminal to present a funds transfer transaction option to the customer.
Include Comms Header in Processor Request Message
Balance Inquiries Enabled

Check this option to enable the terminal to include the Communication Header in all request messages to the Host Processor. An example would be a request to process a customer withdrawal transaction. The actual Comms Header (if one is required by the Host Processor), is entered at the terminal during its setup and configuration.
Check this option to enable the terminal to present an account balance transaction option to the customer.
Savings Account Transactions Enabled
Check this option to enable the terminal to present a savings account withdrawal transaction option to the customer.
8-28

Include Terminal Status in Processor Request Message
This is a READ-ONLY display of the current state of this feature on the terminal. It echoes the value set in the Management Functions of the terminal. The checkbox should only be checked if the affected terminal is a reardispensing model.
Lock Cassettes
Some host processors may wish to have status information included in each request message received from a terminal. Monitoring this status can provide important information about the operational readiness of the terminal. Check this option to provide this information to the host processor.
Check this option to lock the note cassettes in the chassis of the terminals dispensing mechanism.
Return Terminal Total to Processor
Allow any Bill Denominations
Check this option to enable the terminal to send the terminal totals to the host processor during a close operation.
This option is provided primarily for international currency value support. It enables the terminal to accept non-U.S. standard note denomination values.
Ignore EOT Character from Processor at End of Transaction
Cassette (A-D) is In-Service
If this option is checked the terminal will not look for the End-of-Transaction (EOT) character at the conclusion of a transaction. Use of this option is processor-specific.
Allow Extended Transaction Amounts
Use the checkboxes in this section to control the servicestatus of each note cassette installed in the terminal. Note that there are four checkboxes, supporting the maximum number of cassettes that may be installed in a terminal. To place a cassette In-Service, make sure the corresponding checkbox is checked before initiating the Send Parameters command. Note: Cassettes can only be enabled if the proper cassette loading procedure has been followed at the terminal. If the terminal has fewer than four cassettes installed, the remaining options will have no affect on its operation; however, you may observe that the state of these unused options changes to match that of the active options. For example, un-checking both Cassette A and Cassette B on a two-cassette terminal will automatically uncheck the Cassette C and Cassette D options. * NOTE * The Cassette Service checkboxes will only be visible on the Advanced Settings tab when the selected terminal is a multi-cassette unit.
This is a READ-ONLY display of the current state of this feature on the terminal. It echoes the value set in the Management Functions of the terminal.
Dispense Opposite Cassette Side
8-29

E-Flags
About E-Flags E-Flags are Advanced features for future use. DO NOT make any adjustments to these settings!
8-30
CHAPTER 8 -TERMINAL PARAMETERS Passwords
You can remotely change the terminal Master and Administrative passwords from this screen.
Changing Passwords
Clicking the Change Terminal Master Password button brings up the following:
Enter the current password in either case. If this entry is accepted, youll be allowed to enter a new password, which will take effect after the next scheduled parameter download to the terminal. You can not change/reset the password if you do not know the current password.
* NOTE * This function applies to Z-180 processor units (Models 8100/9100/9600/9700 etc). To change passwords for 32-bit units (Models RL/FT/RT), you must use the CONTROL function, EXTENDED PARAMETERS > MISC option.
8-31
TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL Surcharge
About Surcharge Configuration

Use the controls on this tab to enable or disable surcharging, enter a surcharge amount or percentage, determine where the surcharge message will be displayed during the transaction (beginning or end of transaction), and select and configure the surcharge message itself. The specific surcharging requirements are determined by your processor or other appropriate regulatory agency.
2.
Set surcharge amount. If a fixed surcharge amount will be applied to transactions, click inside the Surcharge Amount textbox and enter the amount.
Surcharge Configuration
Follow these steps to configure the surcharge settings: 1. Enable surcharging. Click the Surcharge Enabled listbox and select the Enabled option to turn surcharging ON. Select Disabled to turn surcharging OFF.
** IMPORTANT **
If a fixed surcharge amount is used and the surcharge percent WILL NOT be used, you must ensure the surcharge comparison option is set to GREATER and the surcharge percent is set to zero (0). This will ensure that only the fixed surcharge amount value will be displayed to the customer. Failure to do so can cause an incorrect surcharge value to be reported.
3.
Modify surcharge message text using the Will/May selection. This lets the customer know if they may or will be charged a fee for processing a transaction.
8-32

4. Set surcharge percentage. If the surcharge will be calculated as a percentage of the transaction amount, click the Surcharge Percent list and select the required percentage (0 to 99 percent) 7. Select the surcharge screen that will be displayed on the terminal. Click the Surcharge Screen listbox and select a screen. The message text for this screen will appear in the preview window.
* NOTE * Text on the Surcharge screen is read-only and can not be edited. 5. Choose surcharge screen location. The SURCHARGE LOCATION option lets you determine when the customer is presented with the surcharge message. Place a check in the checkbox to display the surcharge message AFTER the customer has selected a Fast Cash value or entered a custom withdrawal amount. Remove the check to display the surcharge message BEFORE the customer enters a withdrawal amount (the message will appear as soon as the customer removes their card from the card reader).
8.
Click Here for Surcharge Screen Details. This screen summarizes the surcharge settings and screen selected.
6.
Modify surcharge message text using the Lesser/ Greater selection. This is used for surcharging systems that calculate a surcharge based on a comparison between a fixed surcharge and a percentage-based surcharge.
** IMPORTANT **
If the processor or other authority requires that the surcharge be the lesser of either the surcharge amount or surcharge percentage, select the LESSER option. If the surcharge must be the greater of either the surcharge amount or surcharge percentage, select the GREATER option.
8-33

Create Custom Surcharge Screen
This new feature option allows user to create a Custom Surcharge Screen. This option (Surcharge Screen #12) is only available if the terminal supports UDS (User Defined Surcharge) screens. * NOTE * Currently this option is only available on 8-bit terminals (91XX,.97XX, etc) AND only available with Mexico software.
To modify the Customer Surcharge Screen / User Defined Surcharge Screen, click the button for Surcharge Screen Details. The following screen details appear.
Load .CSS Save .CSS
Text is limited to nine (9) lines of thirty-two (32) characters across. Select the alignment for the text.
This screen is used for creating the Custom Surcharge screen / User Defined Surcharge screen. The user can import and export screens to file so that the same text may be used on multiple ATMs.
8-34

Right-click in one of the Text screens brings up a menu with an option to view. Selecting this option will display a window showiing what the screen will look like on the ATM. Below is an example of the screen:
8-35
TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL Triton Connect Settings
Use this screen to enable or disable Call Back and configure the parameters the terminal will use when placing calls to the Triton Connect host PC. * NOTE * If Call Back is disabled, the EPROM access code must be entered in the terminal setup.
During each block, the terminal will place a call to the primary number; if there is no answer in 60 seconds, the call will be attempted using the backup number (if one is available). If there is no answer using the backup number within 60 seconds, or there is no backup number available, the terminal will repeat the cycle, returning to the primary number, then the backup. If there is still no answer after two calls to the primary number and two calls to the backup number, the terminal will pause for a period of time established by the Triton Connect Redial Delay parameter (described next), then will begin the communications attempt again with the next call block. The cycle of call blocks will be repeated for the number of times established in the Triton Connect Max Retries setting before attempts to reach the host computer are abandoned.
Triton Connect Call Back
This function determines whether or not the terminal will return a call after first receiving an initiating call from a Triton Connect host computer.
TC Max Retries
Calls from the terminal to the Triton Connect host computer are made in blocks. Each block actually consists of multiple attempts to reach the host computer, using the Triton Connect primary and backup phone numbers.
8-36

TC Redial Delay Alarm Monitor Phone Numbers
In some applications the terminal may be monitored for alarm conditions. In these cases, a separate set of phone numbers (primary and backup) can be provided, which the terminal will use when attempting to report error or other alarm conditions to a Triton Connect host computer. Use this function to determine the waiting period (in seconds) the terminal will observe between attempts to call back to the Triton Connect host computer.
Triton Connect Phone Numbers ** IMPORTANT **

(Phone #s) These values should be entered at the terminal when Triton Connect is enabled. A Primary # MUST be entered. The others are optional. Here you will enter the numbers to be used by the terminal when calling back the Triton Connect host computer. Enter a primary number, and if a secondary number is available, enter it in the Backup Phone Number entry box.
8-37
TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL Control
This screen enables you to control various parameters associated with close scheduling, alarm threshold conditions, and terminal monitoring and status reporting. The following sections provide descriptions of the various parameters.
DAY CLOSE The Day Close report shows the cumulative value of all transactions (withdrawals, transfers, balance inquiries) performed by the ATM since the previous Day Close. The report also shows the corresponding Host totals, allowing you to compare the ATM totals against the Host processor records. Perform a Day Close once each business day. Because the Host Processor also performs a business Day Close for the ATM, you should perform the close at the same time each day at the time specified by your Host Processor. This will help ensure the Day Close reports reflects the Hosts current business day totals for your ATM.
Extended Parameters
* This option appears for 32-bit terminals (RL/FT5000, RL/RT2000, 98XX) to configure specific parameters. See pages 8-42 through 8-54 for description of options
Enable Scheduled Close
Check this option to enable the terminal Day Close function.
Low Currency Check
Close Report Time
Once youve enabled the terminal to automatically generate a Day Close, specify the time of day at which the close is to take place. Use the controls to choose an hour, minute and AM or PM value.
Use this function to enable or disable (as appropriate) the low currency checking feature of the terminal. If unchecked, the terminal will go Out of Service when the level of currency in the cassette drops below a certain threshold (see the applicable operations manual for the terminal for more information). If the function is checked, the terminal will not go out of service until the cassette is empty.
8-38

Enable Scheduled Journal Calls Set # Records Threshold
Check this option to direct the terminal to automatically send the unaudited electronic journal records to the Triton Connect host computer at a specified time.
Set Journal Call Time
Enter the number of journal records that will establish an activating threshold for the Journal Records function. If this function has been enabled (see previous paragraph), when the number of journal records equals the value youve entered here, the terminal will automatically call and transfer the journal to the Triton Connect host computer.
Enable Call at Low Cash Threshold

Enter the time (hours only, in 24-hour format) at which the terminal will automatically send the contents of its electronic journal to the Triton Connect host computer. Check this option to direct the terminal to place a call to the Triton Connect host computer whenever the level of cash in the terminals cash cassette reaches a specified value.
RANDOM CALLING WINDOW Only the desired call hour is specified in the Journal Call Time entry. The terminal will initiate the call at some random time that is within one hour of the specified time. The purpose of this behavior is to avoid a situation in which multiple terminals attempt to call the Triton Connect Host Computer at the same time.
Set Low Cash Threshold
Enable Call at Number of Journal Records Threshold
Enter the level of cash in the cassette that will establish a threshold for the Cash Threshold function. If this function has been enabled (see previous paragraph), when the number of notes in the cassette drops to the value youve entered here, the terminal will automatically send an alarm notification call to the Triton Connect host computer. * NOTE *
Check this option to direct the terminal to place a call to the Triton Connect host computer whenever the number of records in the terminals electronic journal reaches a specified value.
The Low Currency Check setting is not related to the Low Cash Threshold parameter. The Low Currency Check is accomplished by a hardware sensor that determines the physical level of currency remaining in the cassette. The Low Cash Threshold is determined by a software calculation of the number of bills cash left in the cash cassette; it is determined by subtracting the number of bills involved in each withdrawal transaction from the starting quantity (which must be entered manually at the terminal when the cash cassette is filled).
8-39

Lines Per Receipt Allow Heartbeat to be Enabled
This function sets the minimum print length (in lines) of the receipt provided to the customer after each transaction. NOTE: Changing the print length to less than 35 lines will prevent the receipt from exiting the front of the terminal. This could cause paper jams that could result in printer damage!
Check this option to make the Heartbeat option visible to the operator of the terminal. The Heartbeat option will appear in the applicable Management Functions menu area of the terminal. Use the Enable Heartbeat function (described next) to enable or disable the function.
Enable Heartbeat/Delay Period
Receipt Option Enabled
When this option is checked the customer will be given the option of receiving or not receiving a printed receipt at the conclusion of the transaction.
Stay in Service When Receipt Paper is Low
If the Allow Heartbeat to be Enabled option has been checked (thus making the feature accessible at the terminal), you can enable this option. Enter the number of minutes that must expire before a Heartbeat message will be sent by the terminal. NOTE: The Delay Period MUST be greater than Zero (0) or a software download will be required to clear the machines Out of Service condition.
Enable Heartbeat at Specific Time
Check this option to force the terminal to remain in operation despite a low receipt paper condition. If the Enable Heartbeat at Specific Time has been checked, you can enter a specific time when a heartbeat message will be sent by the terminal. HEARTBEAT MESSAGE The HEARTBEAT MESSAGE feature is designed to provide a means of reporting communications system status to the host processor. Status reporting by dial-up ATMs is now the norm, but the single most important feature that cannot be monitored is the communications status. The absence of transactions from a particular terminal can means one of two things. Usually the lack of calls indicates nothing more than a slow period. Sometimes, though, a piece of the communications system will fail and inhibit any calls from being made. The host has no way of determining which scenario is occurring in any kind of real-time mode. The Heartbeat Message overcomes this limitation. When this feature is ENABLED, the terminal will call the host after a period of inactivity. During this call, the terminal will request a COMMS KEY DOWNLOAD (the normal configuration download request), and will report status (if the STATUS MONITORING function is ENABLED). This allows the host to determine if a particular terminal is still in operation, even though it may not be performing any transactions at the time. Once the Heartbeat Message call feature is enabled at the terminal, an internal timer will be initialized to the number of minutes set in the DELAY PERIOD parameter at system power-up and after a reset. This timer is restarted each time a call is made to the host. A call to the host is defined as any transaction, including financial, balancing and configuration that actually communicates with the host to the point that the Terminal ID is recognized. A customer transaction that is declined will reset the timer, while a call that fails because the host phone number was busy would not.
8-40
CHAPTER 8 -TERMINAL PARAMETERS Format
This screen enables you to configure miscellaneous formatting options.
Chequing vs. Checking

Terminals installed in certain international locales may require the variant of the word checking.
Currency Symbol
Transaction Receipt Format

Check this option to alter the format of the customer transaction receipt to fit the requirements of the Latin American marketplace.
Date Format
This function enables you to select the symbol that is appropriate for the currency type being used in the terminal. Use this option to select the date format that is most appropriate for the terminals location.
8-41
TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL Extended Parameters
When the currently selected terminal is a Model RL5000, FT5000, RL2000, RT2000, or 98XX-series ATM, the Control tab provides the Extended Parameters and Out of Service Settings options.
The dialogs are organized into the following parameter areas: Ad Data Couponing Misc. News Ticker (N/A at this time) Optional Screens
Out of Service Settings
Clicking this button provides access to enable the terminal to go Out of Service for a Printer error.
The following sections provide descriptions of the various parameter areas.
** IMPORTANT **
After completing the required parameter changes, click the Save Changes button to save the current settings and return to the Terminal Parameters main dialog. Use the Send Parameters function to send the new settings to the selected terminal(s).
Extended Parameters
Clicking this button provides access to a sub-system of dialogs that enable you to configure specific parameters.
8-42
CHAPTER 8 -TERMINAL PARAMETERS Extended Parameters - Ad Data
The Extended Parameters - Ad Data tab enables you to perform the following ad configuration actions: 1. 2. 3. 4. Add and Remove Ads. Configure Ad Display Times, Duration and Location. Configure Ad Sequence. Select a Screen File.
Add and Remove Ads

Follow these steps to add an ad to the Active Ads list: 1. Check the Terminal Data Directory list. If the ad you want is located in the list, click the entry to highlight it and then click the Activate Ad button to add the ad to the Active Ads list. To highlight a group of ads, click once on the first ad, then hold down the SHIFT key while clicking on the last ad in the group. This will highlight the first ad, the last ad and any ads in between. To highlight multiple ads that do not fall neatly into a group, hold down the CTRL key while you click on any ad anywhere in the list. 2. If the ad you want is not located in the list, click the Add Ad button to bring up a browse dialog:
8-43

2. If you want a particular ad to be shown after other ads in the list, click on the ad in the Active Ads list to highlight it, then click the Move Down button to move the ad below the other items.
Configure Ad Display Times, Duration, and Location

Performing either of the following actions will show the ad display times, duration and location controls: Browse to the location of the ad you want and click on the filename to highlight it. Click Open to accept the selection and return to the Ad Data window. The entry is added to the terminal data directory and automatically added to the Active Ads list. 3. When you add an ad to the Active Ads list the scheduling, duration and ad location controls appear. Configure the ad display times, duration and location. (See the section Configure Ad Display Times, Duration and Location for instructions.) 1. 2. Add an ad to the Active Ads list. Highlight an entry in the Active Ads list and click the View Schedule/Field button:
Follow these steps to remove an ad from the Active Ads list: 1. 2. Locate the ad you want to remove in the Active Ads list and click on the entry to highlight it. Click the Remove Ad button to remove the ad from the Active Ads list.
Follow these steps to configure ad display times, duration and location for the currently selected ad in the Active Ads list: 1. Active Hours. The Active Hours schedule shows a checkbox for each hour of the day. By default, newly added ads are scheduled for 24-hour display, therefore the checkbox for each hour is checked. To change the display times for the current ad, remove the checkmarks for those hours in which you don't want the ad to be displayed, and place a checkmark in those checkboxes for hours in which you want the ad to be displayed. Click the Apply button to accept the changes. 2. Duration. This is the length of time (in seconds) the ad will be displayed. By default, a value of zero (0) is displayed in the Duration textbox. To set the time, click inside the Duration textbox and enter a duration in seconds, between 0 and 120. If the ad is a video and 0 is selected, the ad will be displayed for the entire playing time of the video. Click the Apply button to accept the changes.
Configure Ad Sequence
The order in which multiple ads are displayed on the terminal's screen is determined by their arrangement in the Active Ads list. You can control this order by moving ads up and down in the list. Follow these steps to configure ad sequence: 1. If you want a particular ad to be shown before other ads in the list, click on the ad in the Active Ads list to highlight it, then click the Move Up button to place the ad above the other items:
8-44

3. Active Field. This setting specifies where the ad graphic will be displayed and/or printed. To configure the location for the current ad, click inside the Active Field to view the location options: None Advertisement Logo Receipt Graphic 2. If the Screen File you want is not located in the list, click the Add Screen File button to bring up a browse dialog.
Click the required option, then click the Apply button to accept the choice. 4. When clicked, the Apply button becomes the Done button. Click the Done button to return to the main Ad Data window.
Select a Screen File

The Screen File specifies the appearance and functionality of the screens that are displayed to the customer at the terminal. * NOTE * Screen files must be a properly formatted *.TSM file. Follow these steps to select a Screen File: 1. Check the Terminal Data Directory list. If the Screen File you want is located in the list, click the entry to highlight it and then click the Activate Screen File button. The selected Screen File name is shown next to the button.
Browse to the location of the Screen File you want and click on the filename to highlight it. Click Open to accept the selection and return to the Ad Data window. The selected Screen File name is shown next to the button.
RAM Memory-Disk/Flash Space
Graphics are stored in Flash memory - RAM is same as on a personal computer.
8-45
TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL GRAPHIC SIZES

Graphics are displayed in designated fields in the display. Optimize display graphics by creating them in sizes that fit their intended use. Graphic dimensions are in pixels.
X-SCALE UNITS (RL/FT5000/RT2000)

FULL SCREEN - 636 X 476 LOGO - 310 X 85 TRANSACTION AD - 636 X 260 BANNER - 205 X 56 WELCOME AD - 310 X 385 COUPON GRAPHIC (TOP OR BOTTOM ONLY) - 450 X 225 (.BMP only) COUPON GRAPHIC (TOP AND BOTTOM) - 320 X 160 (.BMP ONLY) RECEIPT GRAPHIC - 480 X 120 (.BMP only)
X2 UNITS (RL2000 or X2-MIGRATED RL/FT5000/RT2000 (W/10.4" DISPLAY) 5.7" DISPLAY (RL2000)

FULL SCREEN - 636 X 476 WELCOME AD - 322 X 475 TRANSACTION AD - 636 X 475 RECEIPT GRAPHIC - 480 X 120 (.BMP only)
8.0"D ISPLAY (RL2000) /10.4" DISPLAY

HEADER - 636 X 90 WELCOME AD - 310 X 385 FULL SCREEN AD - 636 X 476 TRANSACTION AD - 636 X 260 RECEIPT GRAPHIC - 480 X 120 (.BMP only)
* COUPON GRAPHIC (TOP
OR
BOTTOM -
ONLY)
- 450 X 225 (.BMP ONLY)
* COUPON GRAPHIC (TOP AND BOTTOM) - 320 X 160 (.BMP ONLY) * Applies for any X2 display size.
8-46
CHAPTER 8 -TERMINAL PARAMETERS GRAPHIC EXAMPLES

LOGO 310 x 85
BANNER 205 x 56
RECEIPT 480 x 120
WELCOME AD 310 x 385
HEADER (X2) 636 X 90
FULL SCREEN 636 x 476
TRANSACTION AD 636 x 260
8-47
TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL Extended Parameters - Couponing
Coupons are used to notify customers of awards, prizes, sales, or other promotional opportunities. The Extended Parameters - Couponing tab enables you to perform the following coupon configuration actions: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Select Coupon Type. Set Minimum and Maximum Levels. Enter a Random Percentage. Enter a Coupon Prompt. Enable Award Based on ISO Properties. Configure Printed Coupon Message, Graphic and Layout. Configure Dispensed Coupon Cassette and Number of Dispenses.
Follow these steps to select the coupon type: 1. Click the coupon type drop-down list.
Printed0. This is the first of four available printed coupon types. Printed coupons are delivered to the customer via the receipt printer. Printed(1-3). Additional printed coupon selections. Dispensed0. This is the first of two available dispensed coupon types. Dispensed coupons are dispensed from one or more of the note cassettes. Dispensed1. Additional dispensed coupon. 2. Select a coupon type. Set the coupon parameters as required.
Select Coupon Type

There are two types of coupons that can be delivered to the customer: Printed or Dispensed. To configure the settings for a coupon you must first select the coupon type. You can choose to configure settings for as many as four Printed and two Dispensed coupon types per terminal.
8-48

Set Minimum and Maximum Levels
Follow these steps to enter a random award percentage value: 1. Click inside the Random Percentage textbox.
The Minimum Level parameter represents the minimum withdrawal amount that will trigger the printing or dispensing of a coupon. The Maximum Level parameter represents the maximum amount that will trigger the printing or dispensing of a coupon. Follow these steps to set the minimum withdrawal amount for the currently selected coupon type: 1. 2. Click inside the Minimum Level textbox. Enter a value. The value must be at least as large as the Multiple Amount parameter, and no greater than the Maximum Cash parameter.
2.
Enter the random winning percentage, from 0 to 100%.
Enter a Coupon Prompt

The prompt is a brief message that appears on screen when a customer is given a coupon. Its primary purpose is to inform the customer of the presence of the coupon, so that it may be retrieved. Follow these steps to enter the coupon prompt message: 1. 2. Click inside the Prompt textbox. Enter a brief message to serve as a prompt to the customer to retrieve the coupon.
If the customer performs a successful withdrawal transaction for an amount equal to or greater than this amount, and less than or equal to the Maximum Withdrawal Amount parameter, a coupon will be printed or dispensed (as determined by the Coupon Type selected). Follow these steps to set the maximum withdrawal amount for the currently selected coupon type: 1. 2. Click inside the Maximum Level textbox. Enter a value. The value must be at least as large as the Multiple Amount parameter, and no greater than the Maximum Cash parameter.
Enable Award Based on ISO Properties

Use this function to enable the award of coupons to customers based on the detection of a particular ISO Number when the customer's ATM card is scanned. Note: the ISO Number must have the Award Coupon action selected. Follow these steps to enable coupon award based on ISO Properties: To enable the function, click the Award Based on ISO Properties checkbox to place a checkmark in the box.
If the customer performs a successful withdrawal transaction for an amount equal to or greater than the Minimum Amount parameter and less than or equal to the Maximum Withdrawal Amount parameter, a coupon will be printed or dispensed (as determined by the Coupon Type selected).
Enter a Random Percentage

This function sets the frequency at which random prize coupons will be awarded (printed or dispensed, as applicable). The random coupon is won by a random number of transactions of any type. The winning percentage can be set from 0 to 100%. For example, if the winning percentage is set to 10%, then 1 out of every 10 transactions will be awarded a prize.
8-49

Configure Printed Coupon Message, Graphic and Layout
The settings in this area apply to printed coupons only. The Coupon Message is a descriptive statement that appears on printed coupons only. The message should describe the purpose of the coupon, such as a discount coupon, prize claim slip, etc. The Coupon Graphic will appear on printed coupons. The Layout parameter establishes the orientation of text and graphics on printed coupons. Follow these steps to configure the coupon message, graphic and layout for printed coupons: 1. Click inside the Printed Message textbox. Enter a brief coupon message. 3. Click the Layout listbox to view the available orientation types.
The orientation can be set to three types: Top & Bottom Graphic. Graphics are oriented along the top and bottom of the receipt. Top Graphic: Graphics arer orientated along the top of the receipt. Bottom Graphic: Graphics are oriented along the bottom of the receipt paper. 4. Click the layout type you want to use.
2.
Click the Graphic FileName listbox to view the available graphics.
Configure Dispensed Coupon Cassette and Number of Dispenses

The settings in this area apply to dispensed coupons only. The Cassette selection determines the cassette that will be used to dispense coupons. The Count parameter determines how many coupons will be dispensed for each qualifying transaction. Follow these steps to configure the coupon cassette selection and number of dispenses:
If the graphic you want is located in the list, click the entry to select it. If the graphic you want is not located in the list, click the Send Coupon button to bring up a browse dialog. Browse to the location of the graphic you want and click on the filename to highlight it. Click Open to accept the selection and return to the Couponing window.
1.
Click the Cassette listbox to view the available cassettes. Select the cassette that will be used to dispense coupons. Click inside the Number to Dispense textbox. Enter the number of coupons to dispense for the currently selected cassette.
2.
8-50
CHAPTER 8 -TERMINAL PARAMETERS Extended Parameters - Misc
The Extended Parameters - Misc tab allows you to perform the following configuration actions: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Change Default Language. Change Default Transaction. Change Default Account. Change Protocol Type. Change Message Type. View User List. Schedule Reboot. Delete users and/or modify user name (32-bit terminals only)
In other cases you may want to give customers the option of selecting a different language than the default language. You can give customers this option by providing a language selection screen, which lets them select their language of choice. When an optional language is selected, the ATM uses the language in all transaction screens for the current customers session only, returning to the default language for subsequent customers. Follow these steps to change the Default Language: 1. Click the Default Language listbox to view the available languages.
Change Default Language

The Default Language will be used to display/print customer and management reports and receipts. The default language is the language that is initially displayed on customer transaction screens. This language will be used for all screens unless changed by the customer. In most cases you will select a default language based on the terminals location and customer language considerations. Usually, the default language will suffice for the majority of your intended customers.
Available languages include: English, French and Spanish, but may include other languages, depending upon the terminal software in use. 2. Click the language you want to use.
8-51

Change Default Transaction
The Default Transaction Type enables a default transaction to be presented to the customer: WITHDRAWALS, TRANSFERS or BALANCE INQUIRIES. In most cases you will offer the customer a number of transaction options, such as transfers and balance inquiries, in addition to withdrawals. In some instances, however, additional transaction options may not be available, or if available they may not be enabled for display to the customer. The default transaction type (such as withdrawals) is the transaction type that you want to be presented to the customer if no other transaction options are available or enabled. Follow these steps to change the Default Transaction: 1. Click the Default Transaction listbox to view the available transactions. Follow these steps to change the Default Account: 1. Click the Default Account listbox to view the available account types.
Typical account types include: Checking, Savings and Credit. 2. Click the account type you want to use.
Change Protocol Type

The communications protocol setting will depend upon the type of communications environment the terminal is operating in and your processors requirements. The Triton Standard communications protocol, for example, suffices for many locations, particularly in the continental United States. Other locations, especially in international markets, may require a different protocol, such as Datapak, Radiopad, or other specialized protocols. Follow these steps to change the Protocol Type: 1. Click the Protocol Type listbox to view the available protocols.
Available transactions include: Withdrawal, Balance, Transfer, Purchase, and Other depending upon the version of terminal software in use. 2. Click the transaction type want to use.
Change Default Account

The Default Account Type enables a default account to be used for customer transactions: CHECKING, SAVINGS, CREDIT CARD, or OTHER. In most cases you will offer the customer a number of account options, such as savings or credit card accounts, in addition to checking accounts. In some instances, however, additional account options may not be available, or if available they may not be enabled for display to the customer. The default account type is the account type (such as checking) that you want to be presented to the customer if no other account options are available or enabled.
2.
Click the protocol type you want to use.
Change Message Type

The communications message setting specifies the content and structure of messages that pass between the terminal and the processor during transactions, status updates, etc. The Triton Standard communications message specification, for example, suffices for many locations, particularly in the continental United States. Other locations, especially in international markets, may require a different message specification.
8-52

The communications message setting will depend upon your processors communications requirements. Follow these steps to change the Message Type: 1. Click the Message Type listbox to view the available message formats.
Delete / Modify User

(32-bit terminals only)
2.
Click the message type you want to use.
Schedule Reboot
To Delete a User (NOT MASTER) - Highlight a User and then click on the Delete User. The user will be removed from the ATM. To Modify a Users name or change a Users password Highlight a User and click on the Modify User. The following screen will appear:
A periodic scheduled reboot of PC-based units is recommended at least once a week. Use these fields to Enable the Scheduled reboot and set the time for the reboot of the terminal.
View User List

Passwords restrict management functions access to designated personnel. Each authorized user will be assigned a password, a 2-digit ID code, and a Username. The ID code and password are entered together to gain access to the terminal management functions, while the Username provides a "friendly" name that refers to the currently logged in user. The Username can be up to 40-characters long. The User List shows the ID code and corresponding Username for each User on the terminal.
Change the Users name and/or pasword and select Apply. The changes will be applied to the ATM. * NOTE * Master and User passwords may be modified IF the terminal is running software version 1.8.2 or newer!
8-53
TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL Extended Parameters - Optional Screens
Use this function to enable/disable optional screens and screen buttons at the terminal. Follow these steps to configure Optional Screens and Screen Buttons: 1. Click inside the screens listbox. Select a screen type.
4.
After completing any required parameter changes, click the Save Changes button to return to the Terminal Parameters main dialog.
The types of screens and screen button choices can vary depending upon the Screen File that is currently in use; however, the available screen options will generally fall into the following categories:
Account/Transaction
Screens in this category are used to offer additional keypadbased and audio-transaction based account and transactiontype selections to the customer, such as for balance inquiries, transfers and cash withdrawals. * NOTE * Main transaction/account selections may necessitate the configuration of other options. See the terminals Operation/Configuration manual for more details.
2.
To enable the screen, click the Screen Enabled checkbox to enable (check) or disable (uncheck) the currently selected screen.
Language Selection
3. The button choices applicable to the selected screen will appear. Click the checkboxes to enable (check) or disable (uncheck) the buttons, as applicable. Screens in this category offer the customer the opportunity to select a favored language in which to perform the transaction, such as Spanish or French. Both displayed and audio-based language selections are supported.
8-54

Surcharge Message
Processor requirements may dictate that a particular type of wording be used in the surcharge notification message presented to customers. Screens in this category can offer a choice of surcharge message types, from which you can choose the most appropriate for your location. The location of the surcharge message in the transaction flow (Beginning or Ending) can also be selected.
Fast Cash Amounts

Screen buttons in this category offer the customer the convenience of choosing from a number of predefined withdrawal amounts, rather than having to enter a value.
Purchase Selections
For applications in which a non-cash item can be purchased from the unit, such as phone cards or theater tickets, screen buttons can be chosen to provide the appropriate quantity/ price options to the customer.
Receipt Option
Screens in this category offer the customer the opportunity to choose whether to receive a printed receipt of their transaction, or not.
Select VAS Transaction

Screens in this category offer the customer the options to choose: (WAVES features) Get Cash Now (normal cash transactions) Money Transfers (Western Union) Cash Check (CashWorks) Prepaid Phone (PaySpot) If any of these options is checked (enabled), the customer screen will offer these services. If enabled, you MUST configure that services particular options and ensure that the service is supported by a processor.
8-55
8-56
CHAPTER 9 - JOURNAL DATA

In Chapter 5, Getting Terminal Parameters, we showed you how to retrieve terminal data. This data primarily consists of terminal parameter data and journal data. Once the data has been received and stored in the database, it can be accessed and viewed. In the previous chapter, Terminal Parameters, you saw how to access and view parameter data. In this chapter we show you how to view stored journal data and how to extract and archive selected journal information from the journal database
Accessing the Journal Data Function

Follow these steps to access the View Journal Data function: 1. 2. Start the Terminal Manager application. At the Terminal Parameters menu, select the View Journal Data option. The View Journal Data screen appears:
3.
By default, the first journal data record is displayed. To see the next journal entry, click the Next button:
Navigation
You can navigate through the journal data for the selected terminal by using the navigation buttons:
* NOTE *
Viewing Journal Data

Follow these steps to view journal data for the selected terminal: 1. Select the ID of the terminal you want to work with, using the Terminal ID drop-down list. Click the View button. The journal data window appears, as shown here:
You can also use ALT-(key) combinations to quickly scroll through the journal entries. To do so, hold down the ALT key on the keyboard then press one of the following keys: F - Moves to the First record. P - Moves to the Previous record. N - Moves to the Next record. L - Moves to the Last record.
2.
9-2
CHAPTER 9 -JOURNAL DATA

First
Moves to the first journal data record in the database for the selected terminal and displays the data. Scroll through the list for more options. For each option the search window will automatically provide additional controls to help refine the criteria you selected. When youve defined the search criteria to your liking, click the Apply button to conduct the search. The first record that matches the search criteria will be displayed.
Previous
Moves to the previous journal data record in the database for the selected terminal and displays the data.
Printing Journal Data

You can print the journal, or selected portions of the journal, using the print function. To activate it, click the Print button:
Next
Moves to the next journal data record in the database for the selected terminal and displays the data.
The Print window appears:
Last
Moves to the last journal data record in the database for the selected terminal and displays the data.
Searching
You can search the journal record using criteria you define with the help of the search definition function. To activate it, click the Search button:
The search definition window appears:
Choose the print options you want and click OK to print the selected journal data to your default printer. A brief description of the print options is provided on the following pages.
Entry Range
You can choose the criteria you want to use to define a search by selecting it from the drop-down list:
Use the options in this area to choose the number of journal entries you want to print. The Current Journal Entry option will print the information for the entry currently displayed in the View Journal main window.
9-3

The All Journal Entries option will print the information for ALL journal entries in the database. Note that the number of entries currently stored in the database is conveniently displayed in the option label (8 entries in this example). The number of entries in the database could be quite numerous, so exercise caution when choosing this option. ABOUT THE PRINT RANGE The default behavior of the print function is to select all journal entries in the specified range to be printed, even if they have been previously printed. This behavior is controlled by the Print All Entries option. By default, this option is selected when you enter the print function. If you wish to print only those entries in the print range that have not been previously printed, make sure the Print All Entries option is not selected. This type of output is application friendly, storing journal data in a structured way that enables easy retrieval and formatting by spreadsheet, database or word processor programs. The Journal Tape option produces a report that is formatted to appear as it would on the terminals receipt paper output, as in this example: COMMA DELIMITED REPORTS It is recommended that the Comma Delimited option be used when compatibility with external applications such as spreadsheet and database programs is required. The comma-delimited format is designed to be easily imported into such applications. NOTE: The Comma Delimited option is only enabled when the Print to File option is checked.
The data associated with each entry are enclosed in quotes and separated by commas, as shown in this example:
Report Format
Use the options in this area to control the format of the journal printout. The Expanded option will print all information associated with each journal in an extended format that is more user friendly than the relatively more terse and abbreviated Comma Delimited and Journal Tape options.
Other Print Options
The Print to File option is used to print Expanded, Comma Delimited and Journal Tape reports to disk instead of to the printer. The Comma Delimited report format is unavailable when printing to hardcopy; it is reserved for use with the Print to File option. When selected, the print function will send the report output to a file (which you specify) instead of to the printer. Select the Print Transactions Only option when you wish to exclude non-transaction-specific entries from a report, such as terminal status, resets, etc. Note that this option is only available when the Print to File and Comma Delimited options are selected.
9-4
CHAPTER 9 -JOURNAL DATA

Any journal entries printed while the Mark Entries as Printed option is selected will be marked as Previously Printed in the database. For future printings, you may exclude these marked entries from a report by unchecking the Print All Entries option. Select the Print All Entries option to include all entries in the specified range in the printout. If you wish to exclude entries that have been marked as Previously Printed, do not select this option.
Archiving Journal Data

This function enables you to remove selected journal records from the database and save these journal records in a separate database file. The archived journal records can be accessed using the View Archived Journal Data function. Follow these steps to archive journal data: 1. 2. 3. Start the Terminal Manager application. From the File menu, select the Archive Journal Data option. The Archive Journal Records screen appears:
Transaction Response Codes

These codes are passed to the terminal by the transactionprocessing organization, stored in the journal records and downloaded to Triton Connect upon command. The codes can appear in the Journal Text Entry field of the View Journal window, as shown in this example:
Response Code
The example above indicates a transaction was declined because of an INVALID PIN (Response Code 0050). The definition of the code depends upon the particular processor organization handling the transaction. As you can see in the table, some code numbers appear multiple time (e.g. 005), yet have different descriptions. 4. The Database Date Format and Computer Date Format settings will not normally need to be changed. If a change in the settings is required, make those changes now.
TAB LE 9-1 TR AN SAC TION R ESPON SE C OD ES

R ESPON SE C OD E D ESC R IPTION AC S
21 41 51 61 97 99 Transacti on response Reversal response Undefi ned Error Undefi ned Error Invali d sequence number PTD F read error 005 040 050 051 056 076 100 101 105 201
R ESPON SE C OD E
011 012 013 111
D ESC R IPTION
C annot proceed transacti on Amount too large Amount closed Reversal decli ned
R ESPON SE C OD E
0014 0015 0021 0022 0024 0030 0031 0032 0041 0042 0043 0044 0050 0070 0072 0080 0082
D ESC R IPTION
Invali d PIN Bank unavai lable Unauthori zed usage Expi red card Invali d PIN Ineli gi ble transacti on Ineli gi ble account C annot process Insuffi ci ent funds No further wi thdrawals Try smaller amount Try smaller amount Invali d PIN Ineli gi ble card C losed account Ineli gi ble account C annot process
C OMMLIN K
Transacti on approved Ineli gi ble account Li mi t exceeded Expi red card Ineli gi ble transacti on Insuffi ci ent funds Transacti on decli ned Start of response and request do not match Ineli gi ble card Invali d PIN
TR ITON STAN D AR D /EPS

000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 Transacti on approved Expi red card Unauthori zed usage PIN error Invali d PIN Bank unavai lable C ard not supported Insuffi ci ent funds Ineli gi ble transacti on Ineli gi ble account Number of dai ly wi thdrawals exceeded
LYN K
0000 0011 0012 Transacti on approved Unauthori zed usage Expi red card
9-5

7. DATE FORMAT OF JOURNAL ENTRIES Keep the following points in mind: 1. Triton Connect assigns a date value to each journal record when that record is first stored in the database. The format of this date value (mm/dd/yy or dd/mm/yy) is determined by the PCs Regional Settings. If you enter a date in the Archive Journal Records Downloaded Before this Date field that matches the format of date values assigned to the records you want to archive, the specified records will be correctly identified and copied to the archive file. If the format of the date you enter does not match the date format of the journal entries, there is no guarantee that the correct entries will be identified by the archive function. Its possible the archive operation will find no records to archive at all! If there are journal records in the database that have a different date format than the current PC date style setting (as determined by the Windows Regional Settings function), you can temporarily force the archive function to use the other setting, to allow those records to be archived. 8. A series of messages will show the status of the archival process. A final message will appear at the conclusion of the process, indicating successful completion of the archival operation. Click the Cancel button to exit the Archive Journal Data function.
* Note *
If no journal data entries currently exist in the database (perhaps because none were added since the last archive operation was performed), a message will appear informing you of this fact. No archive file will be created.
2.
3.
Viewing Archived Journal Data

Follow these steps to access the View Archived Journal Data option. 1. 2. 3. Start the Terminal Manager application. At the Terminal Data menu, select the View Archived Journal Data option. A file search dialog box appears. Use the dialog box to locate and select the archive file you want to work with and the .ach (archive) extension. Note: Archived journal files have file names that include the day, date and year the file was created. This system enables you to select the archive file you want to work with based on its creation date. Click the Open button to open the archive file. The View Archived Journal Data screen appears. Because this screen is identical to the View Journal Data screen, refer to that topic for additional information on selecting, viewing and printing the archived journal entries. Select the ID of the terminal you want to work with, using the Terminal ID drop-down list. Click the View button. The journal data window appears. By default, the first journal data record is displayed. To see the next journal entry, click the Next button.
4.
To do this, set the Database Date Format and the Computer Date Format settings to match the date format of the records you want to archive. Both settings must be set to the same date format type! 5. By default, the current date is displayed in the date entry field. All journal records stored in the Triton Connect database before this date will be transferred to the archive file. If you wish to specify an earlier date, enter it in the field. Click the Archive button. If this is the first archive file to be generated, the archival process will start immediately. If an archive file already exists, a dialog box will appear, giving you the option of creating another archive file or canceling the operation. If you click Yes, the operation will start. The applicable records will be copied to the archive file (the original records will remain in the database). Click No to cancel the operation.
4.
5. 6. 7.
6.
The controls in this window are identical to those in the View Journal Data window. Refer to the coverage of that function earlier in this chapter for details on navigating the associated screens and viewing the journal data.
9-6
CHAPTER 9 -JOURNAL DATA Mask Journal Data PAN Data
Added utility to mask PAN (Personal Account Numbers) data in journal records for Triton Connect databases and journal archived files. These records show the first six (6) digits and the last four (4) digits of the account numbers. The middle digits are replaced with masking characters -- equal (=) signs. (Ex: 123456======7890) Follow these steps to access the Mask Journal Data (PAN data) function: 1. 2. Start the Terminal Manager application. At the Terminal Parameters menu, select the File option. Select the Mask Journal Data option. The following screen appears:
Displays location and name of current file selected
Used to select a file for processing
Will add to batch list below
Will process current info
Files selected for batch operation
Log file
Will process files in batch list
Will close/open Log window
Will end program
Log window. Lists actions of program
9-7
9-8
CHAPTER 10 - LED SIGN MESSAGES

Triton Connect provides support for an optional feature of Triton Systems ATMs. This option is called the LED SIGN, and enables a terminal equipped with a special marqueestyle light panel to display messages using a variety of attention-getting scrolling modes and animation effects. In this chapter we will show you how to compose and manage these messages, using the LED Sign Messages function.
Accessing the LED Sign Messages Function

1. 2. Start the Terminal Manager application. From the Terminal Parameters menu, select the Set Terminal Parameters option. The Terminal Parameters screen appears: 5. Locate and click the LED Sign Messages tab with your mouse. The LED Sign Messages window appears, as shown here:
3.
Select the ID of the terminal you want to work with, using the Select Terminal ID drop-down list. If you want to download the same set of messages to more than one terminal, you can use the Broadcast feature to select multiple IDs. Click the View Parameters button. The Select Terminal window is replaced with selection tabs for the various categories of terminal parameters, as shown:
This is the LED Sign Messages main window. From here you can access all of the functions needed to create and manage your LED Sign messages. The next section provides an overview of these functions.
4.
Overview of the LED Sign Messages Function

This section will provide a general overview of the functions of the LED Sign Messages window. Using the functions available to you in this window you can: Create new messages. Save your newly created messages.
10-2
CHAPTER 10 -LED SIGN MESSAGES

Send the messages you create to the LED Sign on your Triton Systems ATM. Open messages that youve created and saved previously. Change the text and/or special display effects associated with a message. Review the messages that are currently being displayed by the LED Sign. The first two entries are formatting commands, which tell the LED Sign to place the message in the Top line of the display, using the Automode display effect to present the message Have A Nice Day!
Lets briefly look at the various components of the LED Sign Messages window. These features will be covered more fully in the remaining sections of this chapter. We can organize the various controls into these areas:
Message Definition Window Display Controls
Command Buttons
Comand Buttons
These buttons provide quick access to the functions you need to open, save, select and view messages: New. Clicking this command button clears the current message definition display and prepares the window to display a new message.
Message Definition Window

The information associated with the message you are currently working on will appear in the Message Definition Window. This information will consist of various display formatting commands and the text of the message itself. Here is an example message: Open. Clicking this command button brings up the Open dialog box, which enables you to locate and open a previously saved message file. The message, once opened, will display in the Message Definition window. Save. Clicking this command button brings up the Save dialog box, which enables you to name and save a newly created message.
10-3

View Current Sign Data. Clicking this command button will display the Current Sign Data window, which shows the content of the messages that are currently being presented by the LED Sign. Select Messages. Clicking this command button brings up the Message Selection window, which displays a list of all saved messages. You can choose one or more messages from a list of available messages to be placed in the Selected Messages list. The messages you select will be sent to the LED Sign on a selected terminal when the Send Parameters button is clicked.
Creating a Message
An LED Sign contains eight kilobytes (KB) of RAM, which it uses to store up to 21 messages youve composed and sent to it. Each of these messages can have up to 150 individual characters (not including formatting commands) in the actual message text. You can include more than one line of message text in a single message definition file, as long as you dont exceed the 150 character limit. The following procedure will show you how to create a message. The procedure begins at the LED Sign Messages window, so make sure its displayed before beginning (if youre unsure how to display the LED Sign Messages window, refer to the section, Accessing the LED Sign Messages Function, earlier in the chapter). To create a new message, perform the following steps: STEP 1: SELECT POSITION. STEP 2: SELECT MODE OR SPECIAL. STEP 3: TYPE THE MESSAGE TEXT. STEP 4: SAVE THE MESSAGE.
Display Controls
STEP 1: Select Position

There are three drop-down style list boxes in the Controls area of the LED Sign Messages window: Position. The LED Sign is a two-line display, and can present your message in the top line, bottom line, or fill both display lines, depending upon the selection you make here. Mode. This list allows you to choose from the standard display modes. The options represent special display effects with names like Automode, Hold, Flash and Roll-Up. Special. This list box contains optional display modes you can use instead of the standard modes. The options include additional display effects like Twinkle, Sparkle and Snow, as well as pre-formatted messages that are ready to use, such as No Smoking, Dont Drink and Drive and Thank You. Choose just ONE position for your message from the list. The meaning of each option is as follows: Fill. If the message text is longer than the LED Sign can display on a single line, the LED Sign will attempt to fill both lines of its two-line display. The text will appear centered on each display line. If necessary, any additional text will be scrolled onto the display lines after a short pause, until the full text of the message has been displayed. If the text is less than a full line, it will appear on the top line. Click on the Position list box in the Controls area. The following list of display position options is presented:
10-4

Top. The text will be displayed on the top line of the twoline LED Sign display. If the text is longer than the LED Sign can display at one time, after a short pause additional text will be scrolled onto the display, replacing the previous text until the full text of the message has been displayed. Bottom. The text will be displayed on the bottom line of the two-line LED Sign display. If the text is longer than the LED Sign can display at one time, after a short pause additional text will be scrolled onto the display, replacing the previous text until the full text of the message has been displayed.
TAB LE 10-1 STAN D AR D D ISPLAY MOD ES
N o. 1 2 3 4 5 MOD E AUTOMOD E HOLD F LA S H ROLL UP ROLL D OWN ROLL LEFT ROLL RIGHT D ESC R IPTION Vari ous di splay modes from thi s li st wi ll be chosen randomly. The message remai ns stati onary. The message remai ns stati onary, but flashes. The previ ous message i s pushed up by the new message. The previ ous message i s pushed down by the new message. The previ ous message i s pushed left by the new message. The previ ous message i s pushed ri ght by the new message. The previ ous message i s wi ped over by the new message, from bottom to top. The previ ous message i s wi ped over by the new message, from top to bottom. The previ ous message i s wi ped over by the new message, from ri ght to left. The previ ous message i s wi ped over by the new message, from left to ri ght. The message travels from ri ght to left. The previ ous message i s pushed toward the center of the di splay by the new message. The previ ous message i s pushed outward from the center of the di splay by the new message. The previ ous message i s wi ped over by the new message usi ng an i nward moti on. The previ ous message i s wi ped over by the new message usi ng an outward moti on. The new message wi ll push the bottom li ne of the previ ous message up i nto the top li ne of the di splay.
STEP 2: Select Display Mode (Standard or Special)

Standard Display Modes. Click on the Mode list box. The following list is presented (scroll the list box window to view and select from the available options):
6 7
WIPE UP
WIPE D OWN
10 11 12 13
WIPE LEFT WIPE RIGHT ROTATE ROLL IN
The list represents all of the standard display modes you can apply to your message. Choose just ONE mode from the list to apply to your message, by clicking on it with the mouse. The selected formatting mode command will appear in the Message Definition window. The following table lists all of the standard modes and describes their associated display effects.
14
ROLL OUT
15
WIPE IN
16
WIPE OUT
** IMPORTANT **
If you neglect to choose a formatting mode, the LED Sign will display your message using AUTOMODE by default!
17
SC ROLL
10-5

Special Display Modes. Instead of a standard display mode, you can choose a display mode for your message from the Special list. Click on the Special list box. The following list is presented (scroll the list box window to view and select from the available options):
TABLE 10-2 LED SIGN SPECIAL DISPLAY MODES
N o. MODE DESCRIPTION
These modes are preformatted messages or animated themes. They are not applied to your messages. 9 SCRIPT "WELCOME" SLOT MACHINE The word "Welcome" is written in script across the display. Slot machine symbols appear in an animated sequence on the display. A cigarette image appears, and is then extinguished, to be replaced with the universal no smoking symbol. A car runs into a cocktail glass and is replaced with the message, "Please Don't Drink and Drive." Fireworks explode randomly on the display. A car drives across the display. A bomb fuse burns down, followed by an explosion. The words "Thank You" are written in script across the display.
10
11
NO SMOKING
The first eight options in the list are display effects that can be applied to your message text. The last remaining eight items are preformatted messages or special animated themes that can be displayed in addition to any other messages that may be displayed. The following table lists all of the special modes and describes their associated display effects.
TABLE 10-2 LED SIGN SPECIAL DISPLAY MODES
N o. MODE DESCRIPTION
12
DON'T DRINK AND DRIVE FIREWORKS TURBO CAR CHERRY BOMB SCRIPT "THANK YOU"
13 14 15 16
These modes are display effects that can be applied to your messages. 1 TWINKLE The message will twinkle on the display. The new message will sparkle over the current message, replacing it. The message will "snow" onto the display. The new message will interlock over the previous message in alternating rows of dots, from each end. Alternating characters of the current message will switch off the display in an up and down manner. The new message will switch on in a similar manner. The new message slides onto the display one character at a time, from right to left. The new message sprays across and onto the display, from right to left. Starbursts will explode your message onto the display.
STEP 3: Type Message Text

Type a message of your own directly into the Message Definition window. Remember the 150 character limit of each message (this count DOES NOT include the format characters). Your message definition can actually hold more than one line of text. Repeat steps1 through 3 to compose these additional lines. Remember that the entire message can hold a maximum of 150 characters! Here is an example of a message definition that actually consists of two lines of text:
SPARKLE
SNOW
INTERLOCK
SWITCH
SLIDE
SPRAY
STARBURST
10-6

STEP 4: Save the Message
Use the Save function to give your message a name and save it to your PCs hard drive. Refer to the next section, Saving a Message, for step-by-step procedures. FILE LOCATIONS A point to remember concerns the location of your message files. By default, the save function places your message files in a sub-folder named LED, located in the Triton Connect program folder (TRITCONN) on your hard drive.
Saving a Message
Once youve created a message, it must be given a name and saved as a data file before it can be sent to the LED Sign. The LED Sign Messages window contains a feature that enables you to do this. The procedure begins at the LED Sign Messages window, so make sure its displayed before beginning (if youre unsure how to display the LED Sign Messages window, refer to the section, Accessing the LED Sign Messages Function, earlier in the chapter). The procedures assume that you have created or modified a message file, and now wish to save it on your PCs hard drive. The message contents (display formatting commands and message text) should be visible in the LED Sign Messages window. To save the message, perform the following steps: STEP 1: CLICK THE SAVE BUTTON. STEP 2: CHOOSE A NAME FOR THE MESSAGE FILE. STEP 3: CLICK THE OK BUTTON.
** IMPORTANT **
The message files must remain in the LED folder in order to be accessible to Triton Connect!
STEP 2: Choose a Name for the Message

When you are performing this step remember that the Save dialog box will only accept file names with a maximum length of eight characters (not including the .LED extension). For example, the file names Welcome! Bye! and Yummy! are valid file names, while SpendMoney, GoodFood! and See You Soon! are not. Here is an example of a typical message definition, which includes formatting commands and message text:
STEP 1: Click the Save Button

The Save dialog box will be displayed:
And here is an example of a message file name entry that could be made for this message in the Save dialog box:
STEP 3: Click the Save Button

When you are satisfied with the name youve chosen for the message, simply click the SAVE command button. The file will be saved and you will be returned to the LED Sign Messages main window.
10-7
TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL Opening a Message

The message files youve created and saved may need to be revised at some point in the future. To do this youll need to open the previously saved file, make your changes, then save the modified file once again. In this section of the Addendum you will learn how to open a previously saved message file. For procedures on making changes to a file after youve opened it, see Section 6, Changing Messages. The procedures begin at the LED Sign Messages window, so make sure its displayed before beginning. To open a message, perform the following steps: STEP 1: CLICK THE OPEN BUTTON. STEP 2: SELECT THE MESSAGE FILE. STEP 3: CLICK THE OK BUTTON.
STEP 3: Click the Open Button

You will be returned to the LED Sign Messages main window. The Message Definition window now shows the contents of the file:
Modifying a Message
This Section will show you how to make changes to the content of a message youve just created, or one youve previously created and saved. The procedures begin at the LED Sign Messages window, so make sure its displayed before beginning. To change a message, perform the following steps: STEP 1: OPEN A MESSAGE FILE. STEP 2: CHANGE POSITION. STEP 3: CHANGE MODE OR SPECIAL. STEP 4: CHANGE MESSAGE TEXT. STEP 5: SAVE THE MESSAGE.
STEP 1: Click the Open Button

The Open dialog box will appear:
For this example we will select and open the Junkfood message file. The files shown are for discussion purposes only and do not exist on your system!
You may not need to perform all of the above steps in all cases; select only the procedures that apply to the changes you need to make!
STEP 1: Open a Message File STEP 2: Select a Message File

Click on the Junkfood message file name to select it. Follow the step-by-step instructions in Section 5 to open a message file. If youve just created the message, the contents should already be displayed in the Message Definition window. Once the display formatting modes and text of the selected message file are displayed in the Message Definition window, you can begin making changes. The following steps should be used to change the applicable part of the message, as necessary.
10-8

STEP 2: Change Position
Click the mouse cursor in the Message Definition window, anywhere on the same line as the current position command. A flashing text cursor should be visible at this location. Press the DELETE key on the keyboard. The position command will be erased. Now choose a new position command from the Position list in the Controls area. The new position code will be inserted.
Sending a Message
The following procedure will show you how to select the messages you want to send to the LED Sign. Before beginning, make sure the LED Sign Messages window is displayed. * NOTE * The Call Monitor application must be running (with one or more active Call Processors) in order to send messages to the selected terminal(s).
STEP 3: Change Display Mode

Click the mouse cursor in the Message Definition window, anywhere on the same line as the current mode command. A flashing text cursor should be visible at this location. Press the DELETE key on the keyboard. The mode command will be erased. Now choose a new mode the Mode list in the Controls area. The new mode command will be inserted. * NOTE * If no standard mode is selected, the LED Sign will default to Automode.
The following procedures assume that one or more terminals have been previously selected for individual or broadcast contact. To send your message(s) to the LED Sign, perform the following steps: STEP 1: CLICK THE SELECT MESSAGES BUTTON. STEP 2: HIGHLIGHT A MESSAGE FILE NAME. STEP 3: CLICK THE ADD BUTTON.
STEP 4: Change Message Text

Some or all of the text portion of a message can be erased a character at a time using the DELETE and BACKSPACE keys on your PC keyboard. Alternatively, you can use the mouse to select the text to delete using a Click and Drag approach to highlight some or all of the text before pressing the DELETE or BACKSPACE keys. Click the mouse in the text to select a starting point and type your text into the message.
STEP 4: CLICK THE SEND PARAMETERS BUTTON.
STEP 1: Click the Select Messages Button

The Message Selection window will be displayed:
STEP 5: Save the Message

Click the SAVE button to bring up the Save dialog box. Type a name for your message in the file name entry box and click the SAVE button the save the message. If you have made changes to the contents of a previously saved file, but wish to save the changes using a new message name, you may do so by simply typing a new name for the message. This will save the message with the new name, leaving the original file intact. See the section, Saving a Message, for additional information on these procedures.
10-9

STEP 2: Highlight a Message File Name
Then click the DELETE button to remove it. Select any other messages you wish to send to the LED Sign at this time. Remember the 21-message limit!
STEP 4: CLICK THE SEND PARAMETERS BUTTON.

A Call Scheduler window will open:
Click on a message in the Available Messages list to highlight it. To highlight a group of messages, click once on a message name, then hold down the SHIFT key while clicking on another message name. This will highlight not only these two messages but any other messages between them. To highlight messages that do not fall neatly into a row, hold down the CTRL key while you click on individual message names anywhere in the list to highlight them. You can use the same technique to highlight messages in the Selected Messages list. Press ENTER or click on OK to schedule the selected message(s) to be sent to the selected terminal immediately. Or, enter the appropriate data to schedule the contact for later. The Terminal Parameters window will be closed and the Call Processor application will send the message(s) to the LED Sign-equipped terminal at the scheduled time. For additional information on selecting and scheduling terminals, see the chapter on Terminal Parameters.
STEP 3: Click the Add Button

The selected messages are added to the Selected Messages list (and will be highlighted in red):
Reviewing Messages
The following procedures will show you how to obtain a quick look at the messages that are currently being displayed by a selected terminals LED Sign. The procedures begin at the LED Sign Messages window, so make sure its displayed before beginning. Perform the following steps: Only messages that are highlighted in RED in the Selected Messages window can be sent to the LED Sign. To resend a message that has already been sent, delete the message from the Selected Messages list, then add it again. To remove a message from the Selected Messages list, first click on the message name: STEP 1: CLICK THE VIEW CURRENT SIGN DATA BUTTON. STEP 2: CLICK THE BACK BUTTON.
10-10

STEP 1: Click the View Current Sign Data Button
The Current Sign Data window will open, as shown here:
STEP 2: Click the Back Button

When youve finished reviewing the messages, click this command button to return to the LED Sign Messages main window.
EXAMPLE DATA ONLY! The Sign Data shown is provided for discussion purposes only and does not exist on your system! The sign data will consist of a message file name followed by the content of the message. If necessary, scroll through the list to view multiple messages. This information represents feedback from the LED Sign, obtained during Triton Connects most recent contact with the selected terminal.
10-11
10-12
CHAPTER 11 - REPORTS MANAGER

Triton Connect enables you to produce detailed reports. These reports are based on the parameter, journal, and close data obtained from your terminals. In this chapter, well show you how to access and view reports. 3. Make any needed control selections to further define the output of the selected report type. Click the View button to generate the report. DISABLING ERROR MESSAGES If errors exist in the data being used to generate the report (such as incorrect or corrupted terminal data in the database) a series of error messages will be presented. Each error message must be dismissed before the report can be viewed. If a large number of terminals are included in the report criteria it is possible that the number of error messages could be excessive. In such cases you may wish to place a check mark in the Disable Error Messages checkbox before clicking the View button. This will temporarily disable the display of error messages for ALL reports. To view error message again simply remove the check mark before viewing the next report.
Accessing the Reports Manager

1. 2. Start the Terminal Manager application. From the Utilities menu, select the Reports Manager option. The Reports Manager main window appears:
Changing Report Criteria Viewing Reports

The Available Reports list offers a number of report types. Follow these steps to view a report: 1. Select the type of report from the Available Reports list. The following report types are available:
Call Failures Call List Report * Cassette Status Check Digits * Check Digits Triple DES * Coupon Report Day Close Denied Transactions ISO Numbers Journal Data Journal Dow nloaded * Journal Not Dow nloaded * Most Common Status Messages Schedule Close Status * Terminal Configuration Terminal Dow n Time Terminal Status Terminal Status Messages Terminal Totals Version Numbers * New Reports
The Reports manager will offer additional controls for some report types. These controls allow you to select criteria to further refine the output of the report.
Close-Type Reports
Close reports require additional controls to allow selection of the type of close data to be viewed (trial close or final close) and range of records to view in the report. These report types are: Cassette Close and Day Close. When either of these two close report types is selected, additional control options appear on the Reports Manager main window, as shown here:
2.
When some reports are selected additional controls will appear in the Reports Manager. These controls are used to refine the report criteria. They are described in the next section, Changing Report Criteria.
11-2
CHAPTER 11 - REPORTS MANAGER

Close. Choose this option to generate a report based on final close data. Trial Close. Choose this option to generate a report based on trial close data. Most Recent Record. This option will generate a report based on the most recent close data for each terminal. All Records. This option will generate a report based on all available close data for each terminal. USING FILTERS WITH REPORTS By default, the reports generated by the Reports manager are based on data obtained from all terminals in the terminal database. However, although a good deal of customization of the report content is possible using the available controls for each report type, most of these controls do not allow you to produce reports for specific terminals. To tune your reports to specific terminals, establish a filter using the Filters function of the Terminal Manager. Ensure the filter is enabled before choosing and viewing a report. The Reports Manager will display the selected report using only the data from the terminals that fit the filter criteria. By default, the starting and ending dates for the report are automatically set to the current day, which selects for the most recent one-day range of journal activity. To specify a different starting date, select a month and year using the drop-down lists. When the calendar changes to reflect the chosen month/year, click the day of the month: the day button will depress. Then click the Start Date button to select this day/month/year as the new starting date. Specify a second date (either the same as the starting date, or later, as applicable) and click the End Date button to lock it in. If you wish to see journal data for all dates available in the database, click the Select All command button.
Terminal Status
The Terminal Status report requires additional controls to further refine the data returned by the Reports Manager. When the Terminal Status report type is selected, the window changes to provide additional Report Details controls, as shown here:
Calendar-Style Date Range Selection

The Journal Data, Journals Downloaded, Journals Not Downloaded, Most Common Status Messages, Terminal Down Time, and Terminal Status Messages reports provide a calendar-based date-range selector, as shown here:
All Terminals. Selecting this option will generate a Terminal Status report using all terminals in the database. Any Terminal Error. Selecting this option will generate a Terminal Status report using only those terminals currently experiencing some sort of error condition. Terminals Reporting Low Cash. Selecting this option will generate a Terminal Status report using only those terminals currently reporting a low cash condition. Specific Terminal Error #. If you want to generate a status report for terminals that are experiencing a specific type of error, select this option and enter the error number. See Chapter 6 for a table of error conditions and associated error code numbers.
Note that the Start Date and End Date buttons also become active when the Journal Data report type is selected.
11-3
TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL Report Viewer
After the report is generated, it will appear in a window as illustrated. The controls are described below, from left to right. Printer Button
Tree Button
The Printer button prints the report to the default printer used by the PC.
The Tree button toggles from Preview to Report Only and back again. The Preview is available for every report that requires more than one line of entry for any terminal. Selecting the Terminal ID from the Preview section takes you immediately to the data in the report regarding that terminal. Percentage of View The Percentage of View drop-down changes the size of the page viewed in the report window.
Envelope Button Navigation Control The Envelope button allows the report on screen to be exported into another format or application. The next set of controls are the Navigation controls, allowing you to move quickly from one page to the next, forward and backward. You may also type in the page number you wish to go directly too. Search Button
Lightening Button
The last button is the Search Control, which will bring up the following box:
The Lightening Bolt button refreshes the data on screen with the latest information available from the databases. Type in the text or values you wish to search for, and select Find Next to Search or Cancel to exit the Search mode.
11-4
CHAPTER 11 - REPORTS MANAGER Call Failures Report Call List Report
The Call Failures report provides a listing of all those terminals that Triton Connect was unable to reach after five attempts from the scheduled Call List. Terminal ID -The name used to identify the terminal when it was initially configured. Time to Call - The last scheduled call date and time for which an attempt was made to contact the terminal. Call Interval - The interval that was established when the terminal was scheduled for contact. See Chapter 6, Getting Terminal Data, for additional information on call scheduling and interpreting the Call Interval setting. Retry Count - The Retry Count indicates the number of attempts made by Triton Connect to contact the indicated terminal. Triton Connect will make five attempts to reach a terminal before reporting a call failure. Such failures will be visible in this report. The Call Error list feature of Triton Connect will indicate terminals which were not reached on the first or subsequent attempts. See Chapter 6, Status monitoring, for more information. Total Failed Calls - The total number of failed call entries in the report.
The Call List Report provides information on the currently scheduled and persistently scheduled calls in the active Call List. The Call List Report also provides a list of commands to be performed during the call, the next scheduled time to call, and whether or not that attempt has been made. Commands
Call Summary (Case Sensitive) J a x P p T E B Journal Data All Journal Data X-entries Journal Data Parameters Selected Parameters Synchroniz e Date/Time Error Status Coupon Data
11-5
TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL Cassette Close Report
The Cassette Close Report provides information summarizing the most current financial transactions (involving an indicated cassette) performed by the indicated terminal. Typically, this summary covers the period of time since the last Cassette Close operation was performed on the terminal. Terminal ID - The name used to identify the terminal when it was initially configured. Date - Date on which the Cassette Close operation was performed. Contact Time - Time at which the close information was downloaded from the terminal. Cassette ID - Identification for the cassette(s) installed in the ATM. For single-cassette ATMs, the ID is simply Single. For multi-cassette ATMs, the ID will be an alpha code designation in the series A, B, C, or D, depending upon how many cassettes are installed in the unit. Bill Size - This is the denomination of the currency loaded in the designated cassette. Transactions - This is the total number of withdrawal transactions involving the designated cassette since the last Cassette Close operation was performed. Reject Events - This is the number of times currency designated for dispense to the customer was routed to the reject cassette or vault in the terminal. Rejects can occur
for a number of reasons, such as poor note quality, currency not loaded correctly in the cassette, machine error, etc. Quantity - Number of bills in the cassette applicable to the Start, Dispensed and Remaining headings. Amount - Total value of the currency in the cassette applicable to the Start, Dispensed and Remaining headings. Start - Under the Quantity heading, this is the number of bills in the cassette after the completion of the last Cassette Close operation. Typically, after a cassette close is performed the cassette is restocked with cash and the terminals Starting Quantity parameter is reset to reflect the total number of bills in the cassette when it is placed back in service. Under the Amount heading, this is the total value of the currency in the cassette after the completion of the last Cassette Close operation. Since the cassette is usually restocked with cash after the close, this value will normally represent the total value of cash in a full cassette. Dispensed - Under the Quantity heading, number of notes dispensed (including rejected notes) since the last Cassette Close. Under the Amount heading, the total value of the cash that was dispensed (including rejects) since the last Cassette Close. Remaining - Under the Quantity heading, number of notes remaining in the cassette when the close operation took place. Under the Amount heading, the total value of the cash remaining in the cassette when the close operation took place.
11-6
CHAPTER 11 - REPORTS MANAGER Cassette Status Report
The Cassette Status Report provides information on the cassette as of last contact with the terminal. Terminal ID - The name used to identify the terminal when it was initially configured. Terminal Location - This is the terminal location descriptionwhen the terminal was initially entered into the Triton Connect database. This is usually the name of the store or other location where the terminal is installed. Cassette ID - Identification for the cassette(s) installed in the ATM. Bill Size - This is the denomination of the currency loaded in the designated cassette. Reject Events - This is the number of times currency designated for dispense to the customer was routed to the reject cassette or vault in the terminal. Cash Loaded - Amount of cash loaded in the cassette when it was restocked.
Cash Dispensed - Amount of cash dispensed since the last cassette close. Cash Remaining - Cash remaining in the cassette. Totals - Totals for all cassettes in the indicated terminal. FOR MORE DETAIL The Cassette Status parameters described here summarize descriptions provided in additional detail in the previous section, which covered the Cassette Close Report. See that section for more information on the following parameters: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Terminal ID Cassette ID Reject Events Cash Loaded (See description of the Start parameter) Cash Dispensed (See description of the Dispensed parameter) Cash Remaining (see description of the Remaining parameter)
11-7
TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL Check Digits Check Digits Triple DES
The Check Digits Report displays a management report that shows the check digits string associated with the currently loaded Master and Working keys. Terminal ID - The name used to identify the terminal when it was initially configured. Master Check Digits - The string verifying the PIN Master keys when entered in the terminal.
Comm Check Digits - The string verifying the PIN Working keys when downloaded from the Host processor. Last Contacted - The date and time at which the terminal
The Check Digits Triple DES displays a management report that shows the check digits strings associated with the currently loaded Master nad Working keys for Triple DES encryption. Terminal ID - The name used to identify the terminal when it was initially configured. PIN Master Key Left/Right - The strings verifying the PIN Master keys when entered in the terminal. MAC Master Key Left/Right - The strings verifying the MAC Master keys (if used) when entered in the terminal. PIN Working Key Left/Right - The strings verifying the PIN Working keys when downloaded from the Host processor. MAC Working Key - The strings verifying the MAC Working keys (if used) when downloaded from the Host processor. Last Contacted - The date and time at which the terminal was last contacted.
was last contacted.
11-8
CHAPTER 11 - REPORTS MANAGER Coupon Report
The Coupon Report provides information summarizing the types and numbers of coupons that have been printed by the indicated terminal. Typically, this summary covers the period of time since the terminal was placed in operation. Terminal ID - The name used to identify the terminal when it was initially configured. .TCC File - Name and location of the coupon file associated with the coupon graphic files listed under the Coupon heading.
Total Coupons Printed - Total number of coupons printed since the terminal was placed in operation. Coupon - File name of a Receipt Graphic file. Number Printed - Total number of a particular Receipt Graphic that have been printed since the terminal was placed in operation.
11-9
TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL Day Close Report
The Day Close Report provides information summarizing the most current financial transactions performed by the indicated terminal. Typically, this summary covers the period of time since the last Day Close operation was performed. Terminal ID - The name used to identify the terminal when it was initially configured. Contact Date - Date on which the Day Close operation was performed. Contact Time - Time at which the close information was downloaded from the terminal. Business Date - Business closing date for which the current Day Close operation is applicable.
Host - Total number of transactions (of each type) and a final Settlement value for those transactions, as recorded by the Host processor. Host values are only available if host totals were received by the terminal for Withdrawals, Inquiries, Transfers and Settlement values. Terminal - Total number of transactions (of each type) and a final Settlement value for those transactions, as recorded by the terminal for Withdrawals, Inquiries, Transfers and Settlement values. Withdrawals - This is the total number of withdrawals made from the terminal (including rejects) since the last Day Close operation was performed. The Withdrawals value is reported by the terminal and the Host (if available). Inquiries - Number of balance inquiries performed since the last Day Close, as reported by the terminal and the Host. Transfers - Number of account transfer transactions performed by the terminal since the last Day Close was performed, as reported by the terminal and the Host. Settlement - Total monetary amount of all transactions performed since the last Day Close, as reported by the terminal and the Host.
ABOUT THE BUSINESS DATE The Business Date is provided by the Host Processor at the time of the Day Close. This date reflects the date on which the close is considered officially processed by the Host (much as a banks closing date for a deposit may be different from the date the deposit was made) and may be different from the Contact Date. Time zone differences, time of day, weekends or holidays can all affect the Business Date.
11-10
CHAPTER 11 - REPORTS MANAGER Denied Transactions Report ISO Numbers Report
This report shows the number of terminal transactions (of any type) that have been denied by the Host Processor since the last Day Close operation was performed. Terminal ID - The name used to identify the terminal when it was initially configured. Last Contacted Date/Time - This is the date and time at which the terminal was contacted and Journal data was downloaded. This report will list the current ISO Numbers being used by the listed terminal. Terminal ID - The name used to identify the terminal when it was initially configured. ISO Number(s) - The ISO Numbers that are currently loaded in the indicated terminal will be displayed in this column. The terminal can store up to 100 ISO numbers to block at one time; however, only five numbers can be entered manually at the terminal. Additional ISO numbers (up to the 100-number limit) must be downloaded to the terminal using Triton Connect management software. ISO Action - The International Standards Organization, or ISO, number is used in the terminal to block surcharging and to disable surcharge messages for transactions that use a particular financial institutions ATM or Credit Card. This report shows ISO for which certain actions must be taken by the ATM. See the applicable terminal operations manual for additional information on the Block ISO feature.
Number of Denied Transactions - This is the number of terminal transactions (of any type) that have been denied by the Host Processor since the last Day Close operation was performed. Total Number of Denied Transactions - This is the total number of transactions (for all terminals shown in the report) that have been denied by the Host Processor since the last Day Close operation was performed.
11-11
TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL Journal Data Report
The Journal Data Report provides a concise list of terminal activities, including customer transactions and machinespecific events and operations. Terminal ID - The name used to identify the terminal when it was initially configured. Rec # - The Record Number is simply a counter that increments after each transaction, machine operation or any other event that is tracked by the journal function of the terminal. Date - This is the date at which the specified event took place. Time - This is the time of day at which the specified event took place. Sequence Number - The Sequence Number is a counter that increments after each customer transaction (withdrawal, transfer, balance inquiry) performed by the terminal. Some versions of terminal software allow the Sequence Number to be manually reset to zero. Transaction Type - This is a short description of the specific type of customer transaction that was performed at the indicated date and time, if applicable. Journal Entry - This column indicates the general type of event which took place at the specified date and time. Each customer transaction is generically referred to as a TRANSACTION. Other machine operations and events are described with short, descriptive terms, such as RESET in the case of an operation that re-initializes the terminal hardware and software. When Suppress Account Numbers is enabled, masking characters (=) will be present in the middle of the field. Primary Account # - This is a sequence of numbers that typically consists of a combination of the Bank Identification Number and customer account number associated with the ATM, debit, or credit card that was used to make the transaction. When Suppress Account Numbers is enabled, only the last four (4) digits will be shown. # of Surcharges - This is the number of surcharges that was assessed for a cash transaction. Surcharge Amount - This is the surcharge fee, if any, that was assessed for a cash withdrawal transaction. Amount Dispensed - This is the amount of cash that was dispensed to the customer when a withdrawal-type transaction was performed. Totals - These amounts represent the sum of all Surcharge Amount and Amount Dispensed values applicable to the indicated terminal. Grand Totals - These amounts represent the sum of all Surcharge Amount and Amount Dispensed values applicable to all the terminals shown in a given Journal Data Report.
11-12
CHAPTER 11 - REPORTS MANAGER Journals Downloaded Journals Not Downloaded
The Journal Downloaded report provides information on the first and most recent time journals have been received. Terminal ID - The name used to identify the terminal when it was initially configured. Earliest Time Received - This is the date and time the journal was first downloaded. Latest Time Received - This is the date and time the journal was last downloaded.
The Journal Not Downloaded report provides a list of terminals for which there have been no journals downloaded within the specified date range. Terminal ID - The name used to identify the terminal when it was initially configured. Earliest Time Received - This is the date and time the journal was not downloaded. Latest Time Received - This is the date and time the journal was last not downloaded.
11-13
TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL Scheduled Close Report Most Common Status Messages Report
The Scheduled Close Report provides information on the Scheduled Day Close setup of each terminal, if applicable. Terminal ID - The name used to identify the terminal when it was initially configured. Scheduled Close Time - The time the terminal was scheduled to perform a Day Close. Last Contacted - The date and time the terminal was last contacted to perform a scheduled Day Close.
This report lists all of the status message that have been received over a specified time interval, listed in order of greatest number of occurrences. As a management tool, this report can help you to quickly pinpoint problem areas. Status Messages Reported From - Shows the time interval over which the status messages in the report have occurred. Number of Occurrences - This column will list the number of occurrences of the status messages listed in the Status Message column. The status message with the most occurrences over the specified time frame will appear at the top of the list, followed by the next most common status message, and so on for all status messages logged over the specified time frame. Status Message - This column provides a short description of the corresponding status code listed in the Number of Occurrences column. Total Number of Status Messages - This is the total number of all status messages received over the time interval shown in the Status Messages Reported From block.
11-14
CHAPTER 11 - REPORTS MANAGER Terminal Configuration Report Terminal Down Time Report
This report provides information about each terminal as entered in the Terminal Manager. Terminal ID - The name used to identify the terminal when it was initially configured. Location - This is the terminal location description that was used when the terminal was initially entered into the Triton Connect terminal database. This is usually the name of the store or other location where the terminal is installed. Address - This is the terminal location description that was used when the terminal was initially entered into the Triton Connect terminal database. This is usually the street address, city, state and zip code of the store or other location where the terminal is installed. Phone Number - This entry will include the contact phone number for dial-up terminals, an earth station number for VSAT terminals, or a TCP/IP address for Etherenet or wireless terminals. For more information on these connection types, see Chapter 1, Introduction, and Chapter 3, Call Monitor Setup.
This report logs the number of hours a specific terminal has been out of service for a specified time range. Down Time From - Shows the time frame over which down time has been monitored for the terminals listed in the report. Terminal - The name used to identify the terminal when it was initially entered into the Triton Connect terminal database. Down Time (In Hours) - Number of hours the indicated terminal was out of service over the specified time frame. Total Down Time - Total number of down time hours logged during the specified time frame, for all the terminals listed in the report.
11-15
TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL Terminal Status Report Terminal Status Messages Report
This report provides information on the status of the terminal as of the last contacted date and time. Terminal ID - The name used to identify the terminal when it was initially configured. Location - This is the terminal location description that was used when the terminal was initially entered into the Triton Connect terminal database. This is usually the name of the store or other location where the terminal is installed. Date/Time - This is the date and time at which the terminal was last contacted and error status data was downloaded. Error Description - This is the most recent error code and description for the indicated terminal. See Chapter 6 for a table of error conditions and associated error code numbers.
This report lists the type and number of status messages received from specified terminals over a user-defined time frame. Status Messages Reported From - Shows the time frame over which down time is being reported in the current report. Terminal ID - The name used to identify the terminal when it was initially configured. Date - Date and time on which the indicated status message was received. Status Message - Code number and short description for the indicated status message. Total Number of Status Messages - Shows the total number of status messages in the report.
11-16
CHAPTER 11 - REPORTS MANAGER Terminal Totals Report Version Numbers Report
This report provides information on the status of the terminal The Terminal Totals Report is used to report financial information accumulated from Day Close to Day close. If day Closes are not being performed, the totals will be cumulative. Terminal ID - The name used to identify the terminal when it was initially configured. Debits - This is the number of checking and savings account withdrawal transactions that have taken place since the last Day Close operation was performed. Credits - This is the number of credit card withdrawal transactions that have taken place since the last Day Close operation was performed. Inquiries - This is the number of balance inquiries performed by the terminal since the last Day Close operation was performed. Transfers - This is the number of account transfer transactions performed by the terminal since the last Day Close operation wa performed. Debit Amount - Total monetary value of all Debit transactions that have taken place. Credit Amount - Total monetary value of all Credit transactions that have taken place. Totals - Total of all values for all terminals listed in the Terminal Totals Report.
This report provides information on hardware versions for all terminals reporting information to Triton Connect. Terminal ID - The name used to identify the terminal when it was initially configured. Model # - This is the model number of the indicated terminal. Eprom Version # - The Eprom holds software downloading, initialization, testing and low-level interface routines. This is the version number of the Eprom chip currently installed in the terminal. Program Version # - The Program is the terminal operating software, which is downloaded to the terminal either locally or remotely via Triton Connect. This entry is the version number of the software currently loaded in the terminal. Table/Screen Version # - The term Table refers to the software component that provides the ATM user interface and associated terminal control functionality. Because XScale terminals do not have a Table file but instead have a Screen file, the Version report was changed to reflect this column header. Printer Version # - Printer version number. Availability of this data depends upon the version of ATM software running in the terminal. SPED Version # - Version number of the SPED firmware. Availability of this data depends upon the version of ATM software running in the terminal. Dispenser Version # - Dispenser version number. Availability of this data depends upon the version of ATM software running in the terminal. Total Number of Terminals - This is the total number of terminals in the current Version Numbers Report.
11-17
11-18
CHAPTER 12 - SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD

Triton Connect 4.4 can perform remote software downloads to terminals. Downloads to terminals running version 4.0 or greater ATM software can normally be accomplished with no assistance required at the terminal end, while downloads to terminals running version 3.X or earlier software will require actions by support personnel at the terminal end. In this chapter, well show you how to access this function. Follow these steps to initiate a software download: 1. Select the ID of the terminal you want to load with software. If applicable, select the Broadcast option to select multiple terminals. Click the Select File button and use the file browser window to locate the download file you want to use. Choose the appropriate download options, as applicable. Click the Send File button. When the call scheduling window appears, schedule a time for the download and click the OK button.
2. 3. 4.
Accessing the Software Download Function

Follow these steps to access the Software Download function: 1. 2. Start the Terminal Manager application using the Supervisor password. From the Utilities menu, select the Software Download option. The Load Terminal Software screen appears:
EPROM ACCESS CODE When you select the Send option to schedule a software download, you will be prompted to enter the terminals EPROM Access Code (if the terminal is running version 4.0 ATM software or greater), unless the code was entered when the terminal was initially added to the database.
Download Options
There are three download options available. Use them as needed to make changes to the way the download is normally performed. These options are described next.
Include EEPROM Parameters

Parameters are stored in the terminals EEPROM, and specify particular operational conditions, or provide necessary operating information for the terminal.
Downloading Software
The Load Terminal Software screen is similar in overall appearance to other terminal data screens in Triton Connect. Note that most of the data fields serve only to help identify and locate the terminal you want to work with. The Terminal ID list provides a quick way to select a particular terminal. If there are many terminals, it may be more convenient to use the Search or Filter features to locate a particular terminal or reduce the number of terminals displayed in the list. Normally, during initial software load at the factory the terminal is loaded with default parameter values. These are subsequently modified during the installation of the terminal, to fit specific operational requirements.
*** CAUTION ***

When you check this option, the terminals existing parameters will be erased and replaced with the values contained in the software load file! The terminal will then need to be reconfigured to your specifications, including re-enabling Triton Connect!
12-2
CHAPTER 12 - SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD

RECOGNIZING TERMINAL TYPES If the terminal has previously been contacted and parameters from the terminal have been received and stored in the database, Triton Connect will have the information it needs to automatically choose the correct software download type to use. If the terminal is running version 4.0 software or greater, an unattended remote download will be attempted. If the terminal is running version 3.X or earlier software, a Tricomm download will be attempted (requires manual input at the terminal). TRICOMM DOWNLOADS Tricomm is a separately available, PC-based utility that is used to load terminal software. It is typically installed on a PC or laptop computer, which is placed at the terminal location and physically connected to the terminal by a serial cable (8-bit machines). Tricomm-type downloads require the EPROM Access Code be manually entered at the terminal. Once access is granted, a special menu is used to configure the terminal to accept the software download. For instructions on performing this type of download, see the operating instructions that came with the Tricomm utility or the ATM service manual.
Erase EEPROM Prior to Load

Normally this option is grayed out until the Include EEPROM Parameters option is checked. Once active, you can check the option to specify erasure of the terminals EEPROM prior to loading the parameters contained in the software load file.
Force Tricomm Download

In the event that a software download to a terminal running version 4.0 software or greater is unsuccessful, you can check this option to force a download using the Tricomm protocol. This type of download will require the assistance of support personnel at the terminal location. * NOTE * Forced Tricomm downloads will not be allowed when TCP/IP or VSAT connection types are being used by the selected terminal and will display an error message.
12-3
12-4
CHAPTER 13 - AD DESIGNER

The Ad Designer is used to combine bit-mapped graphics and text together to create Ad Screens for non-PC based units. Triton Connect is used to download these Ad Screens to selected terminals for display. The Ad Designer is an editing utility that is used to import and manipulate bit-mapped graphics (in the BMP format) to create Graphic Ad Screens. Additional tools enable the merging of text with bit-mapped images or the creation of text-only Ad Screens. * NOTE * Graphic Ad Screens can only be downloaded to terminals equipped with one or more Expansion Memory modules (96XX). Text-only Ad Screens do not require this additional storage memory. This message box also shows the allowable colordepth values allowed for Ad Screen images: 16-color or 256-color. AD SCREEN SIZE Why a maximum image size of 320-by-240 pixels? This is the size of the LCD display on the terminal; therefore, images must be no larger than these dimensions in order to be completely visible. In fact, the Ad Designer will not allow you to use images larger than these dimensions. You can find a reminder of the maximum pixel size of the image under the Help/Help option on the menu bar:
Ad Screen Characteristics
The Ad Designer can only import and manipulate bitmapped graphic images; it cannot create them. You must use a third-party graphics application to initially create the graphic images you wish to use as Ad Screens. In creating your graphics, ensure the images conform to the following requirements: The images must be either 16-color or 256-color. Each image must be no larger than 320 pixels wide by 240 pixels high (these limits represent the dimensions of the terminal display screen).
** IMPORTANT **
FILE NAMES MUST CONSIST OF ALPHANUMERIC CHARACTERS ONLY! Triton Connect will not transfer files to a terminal if those files have names that contain nonalphanumeric characters. Use only the characters AZ (upper or lowercase) and the numbers 0-9; any other characters will prevent Triton Connect from downloading the graphics to the terminal. Only the display schedule will be sent, resulting in the display of blank screens on the terminal at scheduled times!
The Windows Paint application creates bitmap files in a generic format that is fully compatible with the Ad Screen capability of the terminal, and should enable you to meet the above requirements. If you decide to use another graphics program to create your bitmapped images it is recommended that before processing the file with the Ad Designer , you open and then re-save the file using Windows Paint, to ensure maximum compatibility with the terminal. * NOTE * The filename of the image must be no longer than eight characters (not including the period and file name extension).
13-2
CHAPTER 13 - AD DESIGNER Accessing the Ad Designer

Follow these steps to access the Ad Designer: 1. 2. Start the Terminal Manager application. From the Utilities menu, select the Ad Designer option. The Ad Designer screen appears: TEXT VS. GRAPHIC AD SCREENS Graphics Ad Screens will take priority over textbased screens in a terminal. If the terminal has been equipped with one or more optional Expansion Memory Modules, and is running Graphics Ad Screens, no text-based screens will be displayed. If no Graphics Ad Screens are loaded in the terminal, or if the Ad Screen function has been turned off (via Triton Connect or by local terminal control), Text Ad Screens, if loaded, will be displayed. This behavior allows you to design both graphic and text versions of Ad Screens, which can then be broadcast to a group of terminals. Those terminals that support graphics will automatically display the graphics versions of the Ads, while terminals not equipped (or not enabled) to display graphics Ads will automatically display the text-based versions.
Display Window
Ad Designer Features
This section provides a brief outline of the functions of the Ad Designer.
The Ad Designer enables you to manipulate Ad Screen content (graphic and text entities) as discrete objects. This gives you the ability to select individual components of an Ad Screen for various editing operations.
Menu
The primary options available through the menu bar allow you to open and save graphics files, place graphic images within the display area, clear the display area, and set the Ad Screen display duration (how long each Ad Screen will be displayed on the terminal screen). Additional options enable you to see the color-depth (16color or 256-color) of the image currently being viewed in the display window, to view various help displays, and to restore warning messages. The Display Window is where you will compose your Ad Screen. You can place both text and graphic elements within the display area, positioning those elements as needed to create the final Ad Screen composition. The text-entry area below the display window provides a place to enter any textual words or phrases you need to add to an existing graphic or to create a text-only Ad Screen.
13-3

The Redraw Screen button enables you to refresh the display as needed during editing operations. Background Color. Select one color from a color pallet of sixteen colors. As with the Foreground Color, this color is also chosen from the current palette. Font Size. Small, Medium, or Large.
Text Display Options
CREATING TEXT Because the Text Display Options provide only a basic set of configuration settings, you may want to consider using a separate graphics application to add text directly to your Ad Screen bitmaps. Most commercial graphics programs enable you to select from many typeface and font size options, offering a wider range of creative choices in the creation of your Ad Screens. Several text display options can be changed to make Ad Screen text appear more distinctly within the display. The options include: Reverse Text. Checking this option reverses the foreground and background color selections in the text object.
Creating an Ad Screen
Follow these procedures to create an Ad Screen: 1. Click the Place BMP selection of the Menu Bar. This displays a BMP file selection window.
Transparent Text. Checking this option allows you to place text directly on a BMP graphic without erasing the image behind the text. The text will appear to float over the underlying image.
Foreground Color. This button calls up a display of the currently available colors that can be applied to the next text entry. These colors are based on the palette of colors available within the currently displayed image. If no image is displayed, a default set of colors willl be available to choose from.
2.
Select the BMP graphic by either double clicking on the desired BMP file name, or by clicking on the file name to highlight it and then clicking Open.
13-4
3. The Ad Designer will evaluate the color depth (number of colors in the image) of the image and will present either of two warning messages to you; which message is displayed will depend upon whether the image is a 16-color or 256-color bitmap. You can take this opportunity to consider the type of terminal the image is to be displayed upon. If the terminal has a 16color display, a 16-color Ad Screen is the only correct choice, in which case you would click the DONT SELECT 256-COLOR BMP option. The selected image will appear in the display area. However, if the terminal uses a 256-color display, you may also wish to select another, 256-color image. This may be a version of the first, 16-color image, or a completely different image. In this case, choose the SELECT 256-COLOR BMP option. You will be presented with the file selection dialog, which will allow you to choose a 256-color image. Both images will be loaded into the display area. The first image (16-color) will be visible, while the second image (256color) will be hidden. You can switch between images using the Window option on the menu bar (see the sidebar for more detail). Of course, a 256-color display can also display a 16-color image (although there will be no improvement in the image), so if the terminal uses a 256-color display either 16-color or 256-color images may be used. SWITCHING BETWEEN 16-COLOR AND 256-COLOR IMAGES If you want to know the color depth of the image currently visible in the display area, select the Window option from the menu bar:
TURNING WARNING MESSAGES ON AND OFF The warning messages that appear when graphics or text are selected can be turned off, so that subsequent operations are not interrupted by the appearance of these screens. A check box appears at the bottom of each screen. This option allows you to turn off the display of that particular warning screen. Click the check box to enable:
To turn all currently disabled warning messages back on, use the Enable Messages option, which can be accessed from the Help menu.
For 16-Color Images:

A check mark will appear next to the type of image currently being displayed. If a second image has been loaded into the display area, you can switch to it by clicking on the appropriate image type.
This screen will give you the option to proceed with the selection of the 16-color bitmap image, or to return to the file-selection dialog to select a 256-color bitmap image.
13-5

5. To place text with the graphic, first type the text that you want to appear with the graphic into the text box.
TEXT-ENTRY LIMITATIONS The text you enter does not wrap. Each line of text must be entered individually. Using Small/Medium font selection, approximately 30 characters will fit on one line; using large font, approximately 20 characters. Ten to fifteen lines of text will fit vertically within the image display window, depending on the font size. This screen will give you the option of proceeding with the selection of the 256-color bitmap image, or of opting to return to the file-selection dialog in order to select a 16color bitmap image to work on as well. If the terminal has a 16-color display, you will have to select a 16-color image instead, since terminals with 16-color displays cannot display 256-color images correctly. In this case, choose the SELECT 16-COLOR BMP option. You will then be presented with the file selection dialog, which will allow you to locate and select a 16-color image. Both images will be loaded into the display area. Use the Window option to select the image you wish to work on. If the terminal has a 256-color display, choose the DONT SELECT 16-COLOR BMP option to proceed with the operation. The selected image will appear in the display area. 4. The BMP graphic will appear in the display area. To move the graphic, click on the image while holding down the left mouse button and drag the graphic to the desired location. Note how the image is replaced by a black bounding-box during the dragging operation. The primary purpose of this screen is to offer a caution concerning the display of text on terminals with 256-color displays.Text will not be correctly displayed on such terminals. To avoid these occurrences, it is recommended that you add text to the bitmap image using a third-party graphics application. This will create a combined bitmap image which can then be converted to an Ad Screen. Images created in this way will display correctly on 256-color terminals. 6. Next, use the Text Display Options to change the text characteristics (transparency, foreground/background colors, font size, etc.) as you see fit. Move the mouse cursor to the point where you want the text to appear on the Ad Screen and click the left mouse button. The first time text is added to the image the following warning message will appear:
7.
13-6
8. PROBLEMS WITH TEXT ON 256-COLOR DISPLAYS To avoid text display problems on 256-color displays you should use a graphics application to add text directly to your Ad Screen bitmaps. You may also wish to create your 16-color Ad Screens (that include text) in this way. An advantage of this technique is that most commercial graphics programs enable you to select from many typeface and font size options, offering a wider range of creative choices in the creation of your Ad Screens. To delete the graphic or a text object, place the mouse cursor on the item and click the right mouse button. A confirmation box will appear.
Note that the selected object has been assigned a number. The bitmap image is assigned object number 1 by default. Text objects are numbered from 2 to 29. To delete the selected object, choose the OK option; otherwise, select Cancel to return to the display area window. 9. Select the Display Duration option from the menu:
Text and 16-color graphics can be combined in the Ad Designer and will display on 16-color terminals. Select OK to add the text to the display. The text will be displayed on the screen using the current text options. Move the text by placing the cursor over the text, then clicking and holding the left mouse button. Drag the text to the desired location and release.
Choose a display duration for the Ad Screen. This is the number of seconds the image will be displayed on the terminal screen. Ad Screens are repeatedly displayed on the terminal screen using a looping system. If you wish, add additional text objects to the Ad Screen by repeating Steps 5-7. Up to 28 text objects can be added to the bitmap, or placed in a text-only Ad Screens. CREATING TEXT-ONLY AD SCREENS To create text-only Ad Screens, simply place the text you want in the display area and save the image (see Step 10). The .TCG file that is created by this process will contain the text of the Ad Screen. 10. Once the Ad Screen graphic is completed, save it by selecting the File optionon the menu bar, then clicking on Save As.
13-7

Name the file and click the Save button. A Triton Connect Graphic (TCG) format will be created. Ads created in the Ad Designer can be set up for download to a terminal using the Ad Graphics/File Manager tab in the Terminal Parameters area (see Chapter 8, Terminal Parameters, for details). ABOUT TCG FILES The .TCG file holds information about the layout, content and characteristics of an Ad Screen. 1. The .TCG file contains any text that was added to the Ad Screen image, including all textformatting information. The .TCG file contains a pointer to the original bitmap image (if any) that was used in the creation of the Ad Screen. The .TCG file also contains the display duration parameter.
** IMPORTANT **
Do not move, rename, or otherwise alter the original bitmap file that was used to create the Ad Screen! To do so can prevent Triton Connect from downloading the file to the terminal!
2.
3.
13-8
CHAPTER 14 - COUPON UTILITY

The Coupon Utility is used to manage the graphic images and display parameters associated with the Coupon Selection feature of Triton Systems ATMs. The Coupon Selection feature, which is available at the conclusion of an ATM transaction, enables the customer to select a coupon of their choice from a graphical menu screen. The selected coupon is immediately printed by the ATM receipt printer. Each coupon has a graphic image associated with it, which is printed on the receipt. Triton Connect is used to download these bitmap images and display parameters to selected terminals.
Accessing the Coupon Utility

Follow these steps to access the Coupon Utility: 1. 2. Start the Terminal Manager application. From the Utilities menu, select the Coupon Utility option. The Coupon Utility screen appears:
** IMPORTANT **
This option is ONLY available on terminalswith software that supports this feature. The Coupon Utility is used to import and assign bitmap graphics to the Coupon Selection Screen, to assign individual receipt coupon graphic images to up to six menu selections and to establish the display duration of the Coupon Selection Screen. These selections are stored in a file called a Triton Connect Coupon, or .TCC file. ABOUT TCC FILES The .TCC file that is created as the final step of the Triton Connect Coupon file creation process is a specially-formatted data file that holds information describing the content and display duration of the Coupon Selection Screen. The .TCC file contains pointers to the bitmap images of the Coupon Section Screen and the Receipt Graphics. * NOTE * The Coupon Selection feature is an optional feature that may not be available on all ATMs.
Coupon Image Characteristics

The Coupon Utility cannot create bitmap images: it can only import them. You must use a third-party graphics application (such as the Paint utility that is included in Microsoft Windows) to initially create the images you want to use as the Coupon Selection Screen graphic and Receipt Graphic images. The images you create must conform to specific requirements, as outlined below.
Coupon Selection Screen

The Coupon Selection Screen image must conform to these specifications: The image must be either 16-color or 256-color. If the image is NOT either 16 or 256 colors it will be rejected! The image must be 320 pixels wide by 240 pixels high. If the image is NOT 240-x-320 it will be rejected!
** IMPORTANT **
Do not move, rename, or otherwise alter the original bitmap files associated with the .TCC file. To do so can prevent Triton Connect from downloading the files to the terminal!
14-2

Receipt Graphics
Each Receipt Graphic image must conform to the following requirements: The image must be monochrome (black and white) format. If the image is not monochrome it will will not be available for selection as a Receipt Graphic! The image must be no larger than 380 pixels wide by 700 pixels high. If the dimensions of the image are greater than these limits the image will not be available for selection as a Receipt Graphic!
Display Window
1. 2.
Display Window. This is where the selected Coupon Selection Screen will appear. Menu Buttons. Buttons 1-3 and 5-7 are used to select a monochrome bitmap image for printing on the selected receipt coupon. HOW MANY MENU LEVELS? If multiple coupon screens are available the customer will use the MORE and CANCEL buttons to navigate through the various coupon selection menus.
Coupon Utility Features

This section provides a brief outline of the features of the Coupon Utility.
Menu
The menu bar options allow you to: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. File. Open and save Triton Connect Coupon (.TCC) files. Place BMP. Place Coupon Selection Screen graphics into the display area. Clear Screen. Clear the screen of the current Coupon Selection Screen and Receipt Graphic selections. Remove BMP. Remove the Receipt Graphic associated with a Coupon Button. Window. See the color-depth (16-color or 256-color) of the Coupon Selection Screen image currently being viewed in the display window. Also allows you to switch between the 16-color or 256-color versions of the image.
Each Triton Connect Coupon (.TCC) file you create in the Coupon Utility can reference ONE Coupon Section Screen and up to SIX Receipt Graphic images. Downloading multiple .TCC files to a terminal will provide multiple Coupon Selection Screens to the customer. The number of .TCC files/ graphics that can be stored on the terminal depends upon the amount of available memory on the selected expansion memory card. To conserve memory for use by Ad Graphics it is recommended that no more than two .TCC files per installed memory card be downloaded to the terminal. For more information on downloading files to the terminal see the Ad Graphics/File Manager topic in Chapter 8, Terminal Parameters.
3.
More/Cancel. Represent the functions available to the customer at the ATM. The More button allows the user to switch to the next Coupon Selection Screen and set of Receipt Graphic menu selections. The Cancel button returns the customer to the previous Coupon Selection Screen, or to the ATM Welcome screen (if currently on the first Coupon Selection Screen).
14-3

4. Display Duration. Used to select the length of Creating a Triton Connect Coupon File
Creating a Triton Connect Coupon File

Follow these procedures to create a Triton Connect Coupon file: 1. Click the Place BMP selection of the Menu Bar. This displays a BMP file selection window. Use it to locate the bitmap file you want to use. LOCATION OF FILES The file selection window allows you to locate and select Coupon Selection Screen files from anywhere on your PC. Once selected, these files will be automatically copied into the .BMP sub-folder of the Triton Connect installation folder.
This screen will give you the option to proceed with the selection of the 16-color bitmap image, or to return to the file-selection dialog to select a 256-color bitmap image. You can take this opportunity to consider the type of terminal the image is to be displayed upon. If the terminal has a 16color display, a 16-color Coupon Selection Screen is the only correct choice, in which case you would click the DONT SELECT 256-COLOR BMP option. The selected image will appear in the display area. However, if the terminal uses a 256-color display, you may also wish to select another, 256-color image. This may be a version of the first, 16-color image, or a completely different image. In this case, choose the SELECT 256-COLOR BMP option. You will be presented with the file selection dialog, which will allow you to choose a 256-color image. Both images will be loaded into the display area. The first image (16-color) will be visible, while the second image (256color) will be hidden. You can switch between images using the Window option on the menu bar (see the sidebar for more detail). Of course, a 256-color display can also display a 16-color image (although there will be no improvement in the image), so if the terminal uses a 256-color display either 16-color or 256-color images may be used.
2.
Select the BMP graphic by either double clicking on the desired BMP file name, or by clicking on the file name to highlight it and then clicking OK. The Coupon Utility will evaluate the color depth (number of colors in the image) of the image and will present either of two messages to you; which message is displayed will depend upon whether the image is a 16-color or 256-color bitmap. TURNING WARNING MESSAGES ON / OFF The warning messages that appear when graphics or text are selected can be turned off, so that subsequent operations are not interrupted by the appearance of these screens. A check box appears at the bottom of each screen. This option allows you to turn off the display of that particular warning screen. Click the check box to enable: To turn all currently disabled warning messages back on, use the Enable Messages option, which can be accessed from the Help menu.
3.
14-4

SWITCHING BETWEEN 16-COLOR AND 256-COLOR IMAGES If you want to know the color depth of the image currently visible in the display area, select the Window option from the menu bar: will be loaded into the display area. The first image (256color) will be visible, while the second image (16-color) will be hidden. You can switch between images using the Window option on the menu bar. 4. Choose a Display Duration for the currently displayed Coupon Selection Screen. This is the number of seconds the image will be displayed on the terminal screen before returning to the terminals customer welcome screen. The duration can be set from 10-255 seconds.
A check mark will appear next to the type of image currently being displayed. If a second image has been loaded into the display area, you can switch to it by clicking on the appropriate image type.
5.
Now you will assign Receipt Graphic images to one or more Coupon Buttons. Buttons 1-3 and 5-7 can each have an associated graphic assigned. When the customer presses a Coupon Button on the terminal, the associated graphic will be printed on a receipt. The customer will only be able to select one coupon item per ATM transaction.
To begin, click a Coupon Button (1-3 or 5-7). A file selection window will appear. Use this window to locate and select a previously created graphic file that conforms to the specifications listed in the section on Image Characteristics. When viewing files only images that are monochrome and 380-x-700 pixels will be visible. Once selected, the image filename will appear in the button caption, as in this example:
This screen will give you the option of proceeding with the selection of the 256-color bitmap image, or of opting to return to the file-selection dialog in order to select a 16color bitmap image to work on as well. If the terminal has a 16-color display, you will have to select a 16-color image instead, since terminals with 16-color displays cannot display 256-color images correctly. In this case, choose the SELECT 16-COLOR BMP option. You will then be presented with the file selection dialog, which will allow you to locate and select a 16-color image. Both images will be loaded into the display area. Use the Window option to select the 16-color image to work on. If the terminal has a 256-color display and you do not wish to load another, 16-color bitmap, choose the DONT SELECT 16-COLOR BMP option to proceed with the operation. If you wish to load a 16-color image as well choose the SELECT 16-COLOR BMP option. Both images
6. 7.
Repeat Step 5 for any remaining Coupon Buttons you wish to assign. Once the Coupon Selection Screen graphic, Receipt Graphic(s) and Display Duration have been set, save the settings by selecting the File option on the menu bar, then clicking Save As. A dialog box will appear. Enter a maximum eightcharacter name for the file and click the Save button. A file in the Triton Connect Graphic (.TCC) format will be created in the .BMP sub-folder of the Triton Connect installation folder.
8.
Use the Ad Graphics/File Manager function to download the coupon file to selected terminals (see Chapter 8, Terminal Parameters, for details on this procedure).
14-5
14-6
APPENDIX A - TERMINAL PARAMETERS

TERMINAL PARAMETERS
N o. Parameter Name
MESSAGES/COUPONS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 STORE MESSAGE COUPON RANDOM MESSAGE COUPON LEVEL MESSAGE WELCOME MESSAGE MARKETING MESSAGE EXIT MESSAGE LEVEL PRIZE ASSIGNED TO CASSETTE RANDOM PRIZE ASSIGNED TO CASSETTE COUPON DISPENSING ENABLED/DISABLED DEFAULT LANGUAGE MULTI-LINGUAL SELECTION RANDOM PERCENTAGE COUPON LEVEL COUPON ENABLE STATUS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 MASTER KEY CHECK DIGITS COMMS KEY CHECK DIGITS SEQUENCE NO. LAST AUTHORIZATION NO. DES CHIP LOADED SECURITY MODULE PRESENT DEMO MODE LAST DISPENSED STATUS ERROR CODE NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO YES YES YES YES YES
TERMINAL PARAMETERS
N o. Parameter Name
ISO No./Ow ner Info. 1 2 3 ISO NUMBERS TERMINAL OWNER SURCHARGE OWNER COMM 1
YES
Changeable?
Changeable?
YES YES YES
DIAL MODE DIAL RATE MKEY INDEX PREDIAL BAUD RATE ROUTING I.D. MODEM INIT. STRING HOST PHONE NO. ALT. HOST PHONE NO. USE 8 DATA BITS, NO PARITY IN PLACE OF7 , DATA BITS, EVEN PARITY FOR HOST COMMUNICATIONS. Terminal Totals
YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO NO
2
NO
3
NO
4
YES
5
YES
6
YES YES YES YES
7 8 9
10
YES
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
TOTAL DEBIT TRANSACTIONS TOTAL CREDIT TRANSACTIONS TOTAL BALANCE INQUIRIES TOTAL TRANSFERS DONE TOTAL DENIED TRANSACTIONS TOTAL DEBIT AMOUNT TOTAL CREDIT AMOUNT
NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
A-2

TERMINAL PARAMETERS
N o. Parameter Name
Text Ad Screens 1 2 3 TEXT MESSAGE DISPLAY DURATION SELECTED SCREEN Amounts
5 RE-FORMAT MEMORY CARD 2 SCHEDULING VIEW/EDIT AD (AD DESIGNER FUNCTION) Printer Graphics 1 2 3 4 5 RECEIPT TYPE JUSTIFICATION LOCATION OVERWRITE EXISTING FILES ON THE TERMINAL ENABLE GRAPHIC PRINTING ON RECEIPTS Advanced Settings 1 BALANCE INQUIRIES ENABLED SAVINGS ACCOUNT TRANSACTIONS ENABLED CREDIT CARD TRANSACTIONS ENABLED TRANSFERS ENABLED INCLUDE COMMS HEADER INCLUDE TERMINAL STATUS RETURN TERMINAL TOTAL TO PROCESSOR IGNORE EOT CHARACTER ALLOW EXTENDED TRANSACTION AMOUNTS DISPENSE OPPOSITE CASSETTE SIDE YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO NO YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES
TERMINAL PARAMETERS
N o. Parameter Name
Ad Graphics/File Manager 1 2 FILES TO REMAIN AFTER SEND PARAMETERS ENABLE ADVERTISEMENT SCREENS OVERWRITE EXISTING FILES ON TERMINAL RE-FORMAT MEMORY CARD 1 YES YES YES YES
Changeable?
Changeable?
YES YES
YES
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
MAX. WITHDRAWAL AMOUNT FASTCASH 1 FASTCASH 2 FASTCASH 3 FASTCASH 4 FASTCASH 5 DENOMINATION Cassette Stat
YES YES YES YES YES YES NO
6 7
1 2 3 4 5
TOTAL TRANSACTIONS CASH LOADED REJECT EVENTS DISPENSED AMOUNTS CASH REMAINING Version Numbers
NO NO
2
NO
3
NO
4
NO
5 6
1 2 3 4
MODEL NO. EPROM VERSION NO. PROGRAM VERSION NO. TABLE VERSION NO.
NO NO NO NO
7 8 9 10
A-3

TERMINAL PARAMETERS
N o. Parameter Name
Advanced Settings - Continued 11 12 13 14 15 16 LOCK CASSETTES ALLOW ANY BILL DENOMINATIONS CASSETTE A IS IN SERVICE CASSETTE B IS IN SERVICE CASSETTE C IS IN SERVICE CASSETTE D IS IN SERVICE Passw ords 1 2 CHANGE TERMINAL MASTER PASSWORD CHANGE TERMINAL ADMIN PASSWORD Surcharge 1 2 3 4 5 SURCHARGE ENABLED SURCHARGE AMOUNT WILL/MAY SURCHARGE PERCENT DISPLAY SURCHARGE SCREEN AFTER AMOUNT SELECTION INSTEAD OF BEFORE SELECTION USE "GREATER" IN PLACE OF "LESSER" IN SURCHARGE SCREENS #7 AND #8 TRITON CONNECT SETTINGS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 TRITON CONNECT CALL BACK TC MAX RETRIES TC REDIAL DELAY TRITON CONNECT PRIMARY PHONE NUMBER TRITON CONNECT BACKUP PHONE NUMBER ALARM MONITOR PRIMARY PHONE NUMBER ALARM MONITOR BACKUP PHONE NUMBER YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES
TERMINAL PARAMETERS
N o. Parameter Name
Control 1 2 3 4
YES
Changeable?
Changeable?
ENABLE SCHEDULED CLOSE CLOSE REPORT TIME LOW CURRENCY CHECK ENABLE SCHEDULED JOURNAL CALL SET JOURNAL CALL TIME ENABLE CALL AT NUMBER OF JOURNAL RECORDS THRESHOLD SET # RECORDS THRESHOLD ENABLE CALL AT LOW CASH THRESHOLD SET LOW CASH THRESHOLD LINES PER RECEIPT RECEIPT OPTION ENABLED STAY IN SERVICE WHEN RECEIPT PAPER LOW ALLOW HEARTBEAT TO BE ENABLED ENABLE HEARTBEAT HEARTBEAT DELAY PERIOD Format
YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES
5
YES
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
YES
1 2 3
CURRENCY SYMBOL USE "CHEQUING" IN PLACE OF "CHECKING" FORMAT TRANSACTION RECEIPT LATIN AMERICAN STYLE USE DATE FORMAT DDMMYY IN PLACE OF MMDDYY
YES YES YES
4
YES YES YES
YES
A-4

EXTENDED PARAMETERS
N o. Parameter Name
Misc 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Default Language Default Transaction Default Account Protocol Type Message Type User List Schedule Reboot Ad Data 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Add Ad Remove Ad Add Screen File Acivate Ad Activaye Screen File Edit Schedule/Field Move Up/Dow n Couponing 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Coupon Type Min/Max Levels Random Percentage Coupon Prompt Configure Printed Coupon Message, Graphic, Layout C o n fig u re D is p e n s e d C o u p o n Cassette and Number of Dispenses E n ab le Aw ard b ased o n IS O Properties Optional Screens 1 2 3 Select Screen Type Select Screen Buttons Enable Screen Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Changeable?
A-5
A-6
APPENDIX B TERMINAL STATUS CODES
Error Code Model Series 0 8100, 9100, 9600, 9610, 9615, 9640, 9650, 9700, 9710, 9705, 9750, RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM), RT2000, 9800, MAKO, SuperScrip 9615 9615 9615 9615 9615 9615 9615 9615 9615 9615 9615 9615 9615 9615 9615 9615 8100, 9100, 9600, 9610, 9615, 9640, 9650, 9700, 9710, 9705, RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM), RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, RT2000, 9800, MAKO, SuperScrip
Description No errors
Recommended Action None
1 2 3 4 9 10 11 12 17 18 19 20 25 26 27 28 32
Unsolicited note channel 1 Unsolicited note channel 4 Unsolicited note channel 3 Unsolicited note channel 4 Stream feed channel 1 Stream feed channel 2 Stream feed channel 3 Stream feed channel 4 Feed failure channel 1 Feed failure channel 2 Feed failure channel 3 Feed failure channel 4 Note jam before DDD channel 1 Note jam before DDD channel 2 Note jam before DDD channel 3 Note jam before DDD channel 4 Good operation No action required. The dispenser sends this status code when a command has been successfully executed. This status code will appear in the electronic journal as code 32 indicating the successful completion of a transaction.
33
9110, 9600, 9610, 9700, 9710, RL5000 (SDD), 9800, MAKO, SuperScrip
Feed Failure
This error is usually associated with an empty note cassette or currency that is in unfit condition. 1. Refill the cassette as needed. 2. Inspect the cassette and feed path for currency that is stuck together or jammed. 3. If no jam is located, remove the first note from the cassette. Purge the dispenser. Do several test dispense operations. a. If the test dispenses are completed normally, and the return code are correct, clear all errors and place the cash dispenser in operation. b. If the test dispenser fails again, try testing while pushing in on the cassette. If it works then, the cassettes may not staying locked in the cassettes. Determine what is causing the cassette to not stay locked in place. 4. If the currency is in fit condition and the error persists, consider replacing the cassette or the dispenser.
33
9600, 9610, 9700, 9710, RL5000 (SDD), 9800, MAKO 9110, 9600, 9610, 9700, 9710, RL5000 (SDD), 9800, MAKO
34
Note jammed between DDM and Exit sensor Mis-tracked note at feed
This is a double detect fault. This is a double detect fault. 1. Inspect the feed path for jammed currency. Remove jammed currency. 2. Inspected both the feed sensor and the double detect sensor to ensure they are not blocked and operating correctly. Clean the sensors a needed. 3. Turn the AC power OFF for a few seconds and then back ON to power cycle and reset the cash dispenser. Clear all errors and perform several test dispenses. If the test dispenses are normal and the status clears, place the cash dispenser in service. If the error persists, replace the dispenser.
34
9615
Note Jammed between DDM and Reject Sensor Mis tracked note at double detect. This status occurs when a note arrives at the double detect without being seen by the feed sensor. 1. Inspected both the feed sensor and the double detect sensor to ensure they are not blocked and operating correctly. Clean the sensors a needed. 2. Turn the AC power OFF for a few seconds and then back ON to power cycle and reset the cash dispenser. Clear all errors and perform several test dispenses. If the test dispenses are normal and the status clears, place the cash dispenser in service. If the error persists, replace the dispenser.
35
9110, 9600, 9610, 9700, 9710, RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM), RL5000 (NMD), 9800, MAKO
35
9615
Denomination Error, Cassette absent
36
9110, 9600, 9610, 9700, 9710, RL5000 (SDD), 9800, MAKO
Mistracked note at exit.
36 37
9615 9110, 9600, 9610, 9700, 9710, RL5000 (SDD), 9800, MAKO
Unidentified cassette code Too long at exit.
This status occurs when a note is detected by the exit sensor when it should not have been. It can occur if there are notes already in the transport before the start of a transaction or if the exit sensor is blocked. 1. Verify that the diverter moves freely and is not binding. If the diverter has excessive binding or appears damaged, replace the dispenser. 2. Inspect the exit area to ensure nothing is blocking the exit sensor. Clean and verify the operation of the exit sensor. Replace the exit sensor if defective. Otherwise, replace the dispenser. 3. Turn the AC power OFF for a few seconds and then back ON to power cycle and reset the cash dispenser. Clear all errors and test the dispenser with a live transaction. It the status clears, place the cash dispenser in service. Otherwise, replace the dispenser This status is reported if the exit sensor is covered for a longer that allowed time for the current notes. 1 Inspect the note transport and delivery throat make sure all belts are on track and there are no documents jammed in the transport or exit areas. Place all belts on their respective rollers and gears. Clear the jammed documents. 2. Make sure that the exit sensor is clean and operation correctly. 3. Turn the AC power OFF for a few seconds and then back ON to power cycle and reset the cash dispenser. Clear all errors and test the dispenser with a live transaction. It the status clears, place the cash dispenser in service. Otherwise, replace the dispenser. Note, if this occurs on a Mini Mech, only during a multi note dispense, the exit sensors may have become weak. Consider sending the dispenser to repair to have new sensors installed.
37
9615
38
9110, 9600, 9610, 9700, 9710, RL5000 (SDD), 9800, MAKO
Diverter 1 did not go to reject position. Blocked exit
38
9615
39
9110, 9600, 9610, 9700, 9710, RL5000 (SDD), 9800, MAKO 9615
Diverter 2 did not go to reject position. Too many notes
This status appears if the exit sensor is covered or defective when the dispenser starts. 1. Inspect the note transport make sure all belts are on track and there is no currency jammed in the transport or exit areas. Place all belts on their respective rollers and gears. Clear the jammed documents. 2. Make sure that the exit sensor is clean and operation correctly. 3. Turn the AC power OFF for a few seconds and then back ON to power cycle and reset the cash dispenser. Clear all errors and test the dispenser with a live transaction. It the status clears, place the cash dispenser in service. Otherwise, replace the dispenser
Clean the all sensors. Verify that all sensors are operation correctly. If all sensors are operation correctly, and the error persists, replace the replace the dispenser.
41
Miscount Channel 1
42
9110, 9600, 9610, 9700, 9710, RL5000 (SDD), 9800, MAKO
Transport error.
This is a timing wheel or timing wheel sensor error.. 1. Inspect the dispenser to make sure all belts are on track and in good physical condition. Place all belts on their rollers and gears. If a belt displays excessive wear or damage you may be able to replace it. Otherwise, replace the dispenser. 2. Verify that the DC voltages to the dispenser are correct. Replace the power supply or dispenser DC power if either is defective. 3. Examine the timing wheel for physical defect. Make sure the electrical connections to the timing wheel sensor are secure and the time wheel sensor is clean. Replace the timing wheel or the timing wheel sensors if they are defective. Otherwise, it may be necessary to replace the dispenser. 4. Turn the AC power OFF for a few seconds and then back ON to power cycle and reset the cash dispenser. Clear all errors and test the dispenser by completing several TEST DISPENSES. If the status clears and the return code are normal place the cash dispenser in service. If these actions have no effect, replace the dispenser.
42 43 44
9615 9615 9110, 9600, 9610, 9700, 9710, RL5000 (SDD), 9800, MAKO
Miscount Channel 2 Miscount Channel 3 Bad Roller Profile This status is generated if the double detect is unable to calibrate. Probable cause for this error is a faulty or uncalibrated double detect module, or a jammed currency in the double detect. 1. Clear any jammed currency. 2. Turn the AC power OFF for a few seconds and then back ON to power cycle and reset the cash dispenser. Clear all errors and test the dispenser by completing several TEST DISPENSES. If the status clears and the return code are normal place the cash dispenser in service. If these actions have no effect, replace the dispenser.
44 45
9615 9110, 9615, 9700, 9710, RL5000 (SDD), 9800, MAKO
Miscount Channel 4 Diverter error This error occurs when the diverter is in the wrong position during a dispense. 1. Inspect the feed path for any jammed notes. Remove any jammed notes. 2. Turn the AC power OFF for a few seconds and then back on to power cycle and reset the cash dispenser. Clear the error. Purge the dispenser with the purge command. Complete several live dispenses to ensure the dispenser is working correctly. If the error persists, replace the dispenser.
46
9110, 9615, 9700, 9710, RL5000 (SDD), 9800, MAKO
Exit quantified
This status appears when the count at the exit is greater than the number of documents requested. 1. A mechanical error has occurred. It may be necessary to replace the dispenser. This status is generated if the double detect fails to detect a document already seen by the feed sensor. 1. Inspect the transport before the double detect for jammed currency. Clear the jammed currency. 2. Turn the AC power OFF for a few seconds and then back ON to power cycle and reset the cash dispenser. Clear all errors and test the dispenser by completing several TEST DISPENSES. If the status clears and the return code are normal place the cash dispenser in service. If these actions have no effect, replace the dispenser.
47
9110, 9615, 9700, 9710, RL5000 (SDD), 9800, MAKO
Note missing at double detect
48
8100, 9100, 9600, 9610, 9705, 9750, RL5000 Reject rate (TDM), RL5000 (NMD), 9800, MAKO exceeded.
This status is generated when there are 8 rejects during the current dispense. It is usually caused by attempting to dispense currency that is unacceptable or currency that has not been properly prepared. 1. Inspect the currency for excessive wear. Remove any unacceptable currency from the cassette. 2. Inspect the feed path for jammed currency. Remove any jammed currency. 3. Clear all error and purge the dispenser using the purge command. 4. Test the dispenser by completing several test dispenses with the test dispense command. If the error clears, put the cash dispenser back in service. If these actions have no effect, replace the dispensing mechanism. This status is generated when exit sensor is blocked. 1 Inspect the feed path for jammed currency. Remove any jammed currency. 2. Clear all error and purge the dispenser using the purge command. 3. Clean and verify the operation of the exit sensor. Replace the exit sensor if necessary. 4. Test the dispenser by completing several test dispenses with the test dispense command. It the error clears put the cash dispenser back in service. If these actions have no effect, replace the dispensing mechanism.
49
9110, 9600, 9610, 9700, 9710, RL5000 (SDD), 9800, MAKO
Jam at exit
49
9615
50
9600, 9610, 9700, 9710, RL5000 (SDD), 9800, MAKO
Too few notes dispensed Channel 1 Interference recovery
Possible damage due to static discharge 1. Check the incoming power and dispenser mechanism for proper grounding. 2. Turn the AC power OFF for a few seconds and then back ON to power cycle and reset the cash dispenser. 3. Clear all errors and test the dispenser by completing several test dispenses. If the status clears and the return code are normal place the cash dispenser in service. If these actions have no effect, replace the dispenser.
50
9615
51
51
52 52
53
8100, 9100, 9110, 9600, 9610, 9700, 9710, 9705, RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM), RT2000, 9800, MAKO 9615 Too few notes dispensed Channel 3 9110, 9600, 9610, 9700, 9710, RL5000 RAM error (SDD), 9800, MAKO 9615 Too few notes dispensed Channel 4 9110, 9600, 9610, 9700, 9710, RL5000 EPROM error (SDD), 9800, MAKO
Too few notes dispensed Channel 2 Accountancy error
A mechanical failure has occurred. Replace the dispensing mechanism.
54
9110, 9600, 9610, 9700, 9710, RL5000 (SDD), 9800, MAKO
Operation time-out
1. Check the incoming power and dispenser mechanism for proper grounding. 2. Turn the AC power OFF for a few seconds and then back ON to power cycle and reset the cash dispenser. 3. Clear all errors and test the dispenser by completing several test dispenses. If the status clears and the return code are normal place the cash dispenser in service. If these actions have no effect, replace the dispenser A mechanical failure has occurred. Replace the dispensing mechanism. 1. Configuration jumpers may have been changed. Inspect jumper block LK5 on the dispenser main board. There should be no jumpers installed. 2. Turn the AC power OFF for a few seconds and then back ON to power cycle and reset the cash dispenser. 3. If the problem persists, replace the dispensing mechanism Reset the ATM. If error occurs again it may be necessary to replace the dispensing mechanism or main board assembly.
55 56
9110, 9600, 9610, 9700, 9710, RL5000 (SDD), 9800, MAKO 9110, 9600, 9610, 9700, 9710, RL5000 (SDD), 9800, MAKO
RAM corruption Link error
57 58 59 60 61
9615, 9800, 9840, 9850 9615, 9800, 9840, 9850 9615, 9800 9615, 9800, 9840, 9850 9615, 9800, 9840, 9850
Invalid data command Too many notes dispensed Timing wheel error Counting sensor blocked Loss of power during payment or purge Loss of power during payment RAM error
Verify the correct operation of each sensor in the transport path. Reset the ATM. Perform required audit of the cash. Place the machine into service.
62 63
9615, 9800, 9840, 9850 9615, 9800, 9840, 9850
Reset the ATM. Perform required audit of the cash. Place the machine into service. Reset the ATM. Perform several test dispenses. If they are normal, place the ATM into service. If the error occurs again, it may be necessary to replace the dispenser main board assembly The dispenser main board assembly will need to be replaced.
64 65 66 67 68
9615, 9800, 9840, 9850 9615, 9840, 9850 9615, 9800, 9840, 9850 9615, 9800, 9840, 9850 9615, 9800, 9840, 9850
Damaged USART Cassettes Shuffled. Ram Access Error Diverter 1 not energized at start Diverter 1 in wrong position at start Diverter 2 did not go to reject position Diverter 2 did not go to payment position Diverter 2 did not energize Diverter 2 in wrong position at start Aborting download of journal entries
69
9615, 9800, 9840, 9850
70
9615, 9800, 9840, 9850
71 73
9615, 9800, 9840, 9850 9615, 9800, 9840, 9850
75
9600, 9610, 9615, 9640, 9650, 9800, 9840, 9850, MAKO, SuperScrip
76
78 79 80
8100, 9100, 9600, 9610, 9615, 9640, 9650, 9700, 9710, 9705, RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM), RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, RT2000, 9800, MAKO, SuperScrip 9615, 9800, 9840, 9850 9615, 9800, 9840, 9850 9615, 9800, 9840, 9850
Communications error with EJ
Reject Box filled Reject Box Absent No Cassette in feed channel (test dispense) Dispenser Time out (approx. 2 min. Purge did not occur before first dispense LVDT double detect out of tolerance Purge error following dispense error Unexpected note in extension Reject Box Absent
81
9615, 9800, 9840, 9850
82
9615, 9800, 9840, 9850
83
9615, 9800, 9840, 9850
84
9615, 9800, 9840, 9850
89 90
9615, 9635, 9515 9615, 9840, 9850
91 92 93 94
9615, 9800, 9840, 9850 9615, 9800, 9840, 9850 9615, 9800, 9840, 9850 9615, 9800, 9840, 9850
Dispense sensor failure Error in last dispense Error in double detect Dispenser purge failed on power up
Check for presence of Reject Box. Inspect and verify the operation of the Reject Box present sensor. Reject Box or reject Box present sensor may be damaged. Possible wiring, connection or main board problem.
95
9615, 9640, 9650, 9750, RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9800, 9840
Multiple cassettes of This is a multi-cassette dispenser error. 1. Verify that there is only one of each type of cassette installed in the dispensing the same type mechanism. installed 2. If two or more of the same type cassette are installed, inject a new cassette ID into one of the cassettes that is different from the other cassette. Extension Cable Error The Extension has four sensors that detect when the extension is not closed. One or more of the four are reporting it is opened. 1. Open the extension. Inspect the four clips. 2. Close the extension ensuring all four clips seat fully. 3. If you are still unable to clear the error, replace the dispensing mechanism. Note: Dispenser Status (Click Counts) should be run and available before contacting Tech Support
96
RT2000
97
RT2000
Extension exit trailing edge timeout
The leading edge of the note made it to the extension exit sensor in the allotted time, but the trailing edge of the note did not clear the exit sensor in the allotted time. 1. Inspect for jams or blockage stopping the note from clearing the exit of the extension. 2. If the error clears put the Cash Dispenser into service. Otherwise, replace the dispensing mechanism. Note: Dispenser Status (Click Counts) should be run and available before contacting Tech Support
98 99
RT2000 RT2000
Extension exit timeout Extension Skew detected
The leading edge of the note made it to the extension exit sensor in the allotted time, but the trailing edge of the note did not clear the exit sensor in the allotted time. 1. Inspect for jams or blockage stopping the note from clearing the exit of the extension. 2. If the error clears put the Cash Dispenser into service. Otherwise, replace the dispensing mechanism. Note: Dispenser Status (Click Counts) should be run and available before contacting Tech Support No Action Necessary. The dispenser sends this status code when a command has been successfully executed. This status code will appear in the electronic journal as code 32 or 100 indicating the successful completion of a transaction.
100
8100, 9100, 9705, RL5000 (TDM)
Good operation
100
RT2000
Trailing edge timeout at extension entrance 2-second timeout waiting for pick. (Feed failure). This error is usually associated with unfit currency or an empty cassette. 1. Refill the cassette as needed. 2. Inspect the feed path for currency that is stuck together or jammed. If no jams are found, remove the note closest the pick rollers in the cassette. 3. Inspect the detent clips (the clips that hold the cassette in place). Cracked or broken clips should be replaced 4. Install the cassette. Purge the dispensing mechanism with the PURGE command from the DIAGNOSTICS function. Test the TDM-100 by completing several Test Dispenses. If the error clears, put the cash dispenser in service. 5. If the currency is in fit condition and the error condition persists, consider replacing the note cassette or the dispensing mechanism. Note: Dispenser Status (Click Counts) should be run and available before contacting Tech Support
101
8100, 9100, 9705, RL5000 (TDM), RT2000
102
8100, 9100, 9705, RL5000 (TDM), RT2000
Timeout at Exit Sensor
1. Inspect for jammed currency in the feed path and at the Exit sensor. Remove any jammed currency. 2. Purge the dispenser using the purge command. Test the dispensing mechanism by completing several Test Dispenses. 3. If the error clears put the Cash Dispenser into service. Otherwise, replace the dispensing mechanism. Note: Dispenser Status (Click Counts) should be run and available before contacting Tech Support
104
8100, 9100, 9705, RL5000 (TDM), RT2000
Unable to clear width sensor.
Remove the cassette and inspect for jammed currency in the width sensor and at the output of the cassette. The width sensor may be dirty. Clean the width sensor with compressed air. Purge the dispenser using the purge command. Test the dispensing mechanism by completing several test dispenses. If the error does not occur again, put the cash dispenser in service. If the error persists in may be necessary to replace either the cassette or dispensing mechanism. Note: Dispenser Status (Click Counts) should be run and available before contacting Tech Support
105
8100, 9100, 9705, RL5000 (TDM), RT2000
106
8100, 9100, 9705, RL5000 (TDM), RT2000
Insufficient notes to There may be an insufficient number of notes in the cassette to complete the learn from requested learn note thickness command. Put more currency in the cassette and repeat the learn note thickness command. Note: Dispenser Status (Click Counts) should be run and available before contacting Tech Support FIFO error The dispensing mechanism may have corrupt software. Reset the cash dispenser. Purge the dispenser using the purge command. Test the dispensing mechanism by completing several test dispenses. If the error clears put the cash dispenser into service. If the error persists, replace the dispensing mechanism. Note: Dispenser Status (Click Counts) should be run and available before contacting Tech Support Time out waiting for FIFO Unexpected note at double detect, width sensor did not detect note
107 108
8100, 9100, 9705, RL5000 (TDM), RT2000 8100, 9100, 9705, RL5000 (TDM), RT2000
A note has been detected in the double detect sensor without being detected at the width sensor first. 1. Inspect the dispensing mechanism for of damaged components or broken wires. 2. Remove the cassette and visually inspect for loose or disconnected connectors on both the upper and lower width sensor printed circuit boards. 3. Ensure the ATM is mounted on a hard steady surface. Vibrations can cause this error. 4. If there is no visible damage and the connectors are attached to the sensor boards the best course of action is to replace the dispensing mechanism. Note: Dispenser Status (Click Counts) should be run and available before contacting Tech Support
109
8100, 9100, 9705, RL5000 (TDM), RT2000
Time-out at Exit sensor
110
8100, 9100, 9705, RL5000 (TDM), RT2000
Trailing edge timeout at exit.
1. Inspect for jammed currency in the feed path and at the Exit sensor. Remove any jammed currency. 2. Purge the dispenser using the purge command. Test the dispensing mechanism by completing several Test Dispenses. 3. If the error clears put the Cash Dispenser into service. Otherwise, replace the dispensing mechanism. Note: Dispenser Status (Click Counts) should be run and available before contacting Tech Support 1. Inspect for jammed Currency in the feed path and at the Exit sensor. Remove any jammed currency. 2. Purge the dispenser using the purge command. 3. Test the dispensing mechanism by completing several test dispenses. 4. If the error clears put the cash dispenser into service. If the error persists, replace the dispensing mechanism. Note: Dispenser Status (Click Counts) should be run and available before contacting Tech Support
111
8100, 9100, 9705, RL5000 (TDM), RT2000
Diverter timeout
Inspect for jammed currency at the diverter. Remove jammed currency. 2. Verify that all access panels are closed and secured. Clear the error. Test the dispenser by completing several test dispenses. 3. If the error clears, put the cash dispenser in service. 4. Verify clearance at the diverter. If the test dispenses pass, but the error returns upon live dispenses, do dispenses with the vault door open. If it works with the door open, remove obstruction causing the diverter to contact the vault door. 5. If these actions have no effect on dispenser operation, replace the dispenser mechanism. Note: Dispenser Status (Click Counts) should be run and available before contacting Tech Support A note that was expected to be seen at reject sensor was not detected at the reject sensor. 1. Inspect for jammed currency in the transport path between the width sensors and the reject sensor. Remove jammed currency. 2. Verify that all access panels are closed and secured. Clear the error. Test the dispenser by completing several test dispenses. 3. Verify clearance at the diverter. If the test dispenses pass, but the error returns upon live dispenses, do dispenses with the vault door open. If it works with the door open, remove obstruction causing the diverter to contact the vault door. 4. If the error clears, put the cash dispenser in service. 5. If these actions have no effect on dispenser operation, replace the dispenser mechanism. Note: Dispenser Status (Click Counts) should be run and available before contacting Tech Support 1. Inspect for a jammed currency in the reject sensor. 2. Verify that all access panels are closed and secured. Ensure the reject bin is empty, or that there is enough room for the rejects and test notes to fall into the reject bin. Reset the cash dispenser. Clear the error. Test the dispenser by completing several test dispenses. 3. If the error clears, put the cash dispenser in service. 4. If these actions have no effect on dispenser operation, replace the dispenser mechanism. Note: Dispenser Status (Click Counts) should be run and available before contacting Tech Support 1. Inspect the dispensing mechanism for jammed currency at the exit sensor. Clear any jammed currency. 2. Clean the exit sensor using a soft brush and a vacuum cleaner. Reset the cash dispenser. Clear the error. 3. Test the dispenser by completing several test dispenses. 4. If the error clears, put the cash dispenser in service. 5. If these actions have no effect on dispenser operation, replace the dispenser mechanism. Note: Dispenser Status (Click Counts) should be run and available before contacting Tech Support
112
8100, 9100, 9705, RL5000 (TDM), RT2000
Timeout waiting for leading edge at reject
113
8100, 9100, 9705, RL5000 (TDM), RT2000
Timeout waiting for trailing edge at reject
114
8100, 9100, 9705, RL5000 (TDM), RT2000
Exit blocked during purge
115
8100, 9100, 9705, RL5000 (TDM), RT2000
116
8100, 9100, 9705, RL5000 (TDM), RT2000
117 118
8100, 9100, 9705, RL5000 (TDM), RT2000 8100, 9100, 9705, RL5000 (TDM), RT2000
Diverter timeout on 1. Inspect the dispensing mechanism for jammed currency at the diverter. Clear any purge jammed currency. 2. Make sure the shelf that the dispenser is mounted on is level and seated at all four corners. 3 Make sure the diverter moves freely. 4. Reset the cash dispenser. Clear the error. 5. Test the dispenser by completing several test dispenses. If the error clears, put the cash dispenser in service. 6. If these actions have no effect on dispenser operation, replace the dispenser mechanism. Note: Dispenser Status (Click Counts) should be run and available before contacting Tech Support Motor Fault 1. Inspect for jammed currency in the feed path and at the Exit sensor. Remove any jammed currency. 2. Purge the dispenser using the purge command. Test the dispensing mechanism by completing several Test Dispenses. 3. If the error clears put the Cash Dispenser into service. Otherwise, replace the dispensing mechanism. Note: Dispenser Status (Click Counts) should be run and available before contacting Tech Support Timeout waiting for note to divert Exit sensor blocked 1. Inspect for jammed currency at the Exit. Remove jammed currency. on start of dispense 2. Verify that all access panels are closed and secured. 3. Use a soft brush and vacuum cleaner to clean the exit sensor. or learn 4. Clear the error. Test the dispenser by completing several test dispenses. 5. If the error clears, put the cash dispenser in service. 6. If these actions have no effect on dispenser operation, replace the dispenser mechanism. Note: Dispenser Status (Click Counts) should be run and available before contacting Tech Support Diverter in dispense 1. Inspect for jammed currency at the Diverter. Remove jammed currency. position on start of 2. Check the operation of the diverter solenoid. 3. Verify that all access panels are closed and secured. Clear the error. Test the dispense or learn dispenser by completing several test dispenses. 4. If the error clears, put the cash dispenser in service. 5. If these actions have no effect on dispenser operation, replace the dispenser mechanism. Note: Dispenser Status (Click Counts) should be run and available before contacting Tech Support Note cassette not present Unexpected note at exit
119
8100, 9100, 9705, RL5000 (TDM), RT2000
121 122
9100, RL5000, RT2000 8100, 9100, 9705, RL5000 (TDM), RT2000
1. Purge the dispenser using the purge command from diagnostic menu. 2. Test the dispenser by completing several test dispenses. If the error clears, put the cash dispenser in service. 3. If these actions have no effect on dispenser operation, replace the dispenser mechanism and/or the note cassette. Note: Dispenser Status (Click Counts) should be run and available before contacting Tech Support
123
8100, 9100, 9705, RL5000 (TDM), RT2000
Hardware Error
1. Purge the dispenser using the purge command from diagnostic menu. 2. Test the dispenser by completing several test dispenses. If the error clears, put the cash dispenser in service. 3. If these actions have no effect on dispenser operation, print a dispenser status report, scan the click count history, starting at the bottom. Find the first occurrence of 116. The next entry, below 116 is the Hardware Status. Look up the definition on the Hardware Status listing. 4. If problems still persist, replace the dispenser mechanism and/or the note cassette. Note: Dispenser Status (Click Counts) should be run and available before contacting Tech Support 1. Inspect for a currency jam at the diverter. 2. Verify that the diverter moves freely. 3. Test the dispenser by completing several test dispenses. 4. If the error clears, put the cash dispenser in service. 5. If these actions have no effect on dispenser operation, replace the dispenser mechanism. Note: Dispenser Status (Click Counts) should be run and available before contacting Tech Support 1. Reset the cash dispenser. Clear the error. 2. If the error persists replace the dispensing mechanism. Note: Dispenser Status (Click Counts) should be run and available before contacting Tech Support Inspect for a note jam at the diverter. Verify that the diverter moves freely. Test the dispenser by completing several test dispenses. If the error clears, put the cash dispenser in service. If these actions have no effect on dispenser operation, replace the dispenser mechanism. Note: Dispenser Status (Click Counts) should be run and available before contacting Tech Support 1. Inspect for a currency jam at in the extension. 2. Test the dispenser by completing several test dispenses. 3. If the error clears, put the cash dispenser in service. 4. If these actions have no effect on dispenser operation, replace the dispenser mechanism. Note: Dispenser Status (Click Counts) should be run and available before contacting Tech Support 1. Verify that the power supply is operating and the DC voltages being supplied to the main board and dispenser are correct. Seat connectors or replace the power supply as needed. 2. Verify that main board to electronic journal and the electronic journal to dispenser cables securely seated at both ends of the cable. The cables may be defective. 3. Other components that may cause this error are the main board or the dispensing mechanism. 1. Verify that the power supply is operating and the DC voltages being supplied to the main board and dispenser are correct. Seat connectors or replace the power supply as needed. 2. Verify that main board to electronic journal and the electronic journal to dispenser cables securely seated at both ends of the cable. The cables may be defective. 3. Other components that may cause this error are the main board or the dispensing mechanism.
124
8100, 9100, 9705, RL5000 (TDM), RT2000
Diverter moved to exit position during reject purge
125
8100, 9100, 9705, RL5000 (TDM), RT2000
Initial status check failed
126
8100, 9100, 9705, RL5000 (TDM), RT2000
Diverter moved to reject position during dispense
127
RT2000
Jam in TDM extension
128
8100, 9100, 9110, 9600, 9610, 9615, 9640, Error in reply from 9650, 9700, 9710, 9705, 9750, RL5000 the dispenser (SDD), RL5000 (TDM), RL5000 (NMD), FT5000 mechanism RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850, MAKO
129
8100, 9100, 9110, 9600, 9610, 9615, 9640, No response from 9650, 9700, 9710, 9705, 9750, RL5000 the dispenser (SDD), RL5000 (TDM), RL5000 (NMD), FT5000 mechanism RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850, MAKO
130
8100, 9100, 9110, 9600, 9610, 9615, 9640, 9650, 9700, 9710, 9705, 9750, RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM), RL5000 (NMD), FT5000 RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850, MAKO
Command not acknowledged by the dispenser mechanism
1. Verify that the power supply is operating and the DC voltages being supplied to the main board and dispenser are correct. Seat connectors or replace the power supply as needed. 2. Verify that main board to electronic journal and the electronic journal to dispenser cables securely seated at both ends of the cable. The cables may be defective. 3. Other components that may cause this error are the main board or the dispensing mechanism. 1. Verify that the power supply is operating and the DC voltages being supplied to the main board and dispenser are correct. Seat connectors or replace the power supply as needed. 2. Verify that main board to electronic journal and the electronic journal to dispenser cables securely seated at both ends of the cable. The cables may be defective. 3. Other components that may cause this error are the main board or the dispensing mechanism.
131
CTS (Clear To Send) line from the dispenser is not active.
132
8100, 9100, 9110, 9610, 9615, 9700, 9710, 9705, RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM), RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, RT2000, 9800, MAKO
Status reports bad 1. Remove the cassette and inspect the dispensers feed path for jammed currency double detect in last and other debris in the double detect assembly. Replace the cassette. 2. Reset the Cash Dispenser by turning OFF the AC power switch for a few seconds dispense and switching it back ON. Clear the error. Purge the dispenser using PURGE command. Complete several Test Dispenses to verify correct operation. 3. If the problem persists, replace the dispensing mechanism. +5 VDC not present 1. Verify that the power supply is operating and the DC voltages being supplied to on carrier detect the main board and dispenser are correct. Seat connectors or replace the power supply as needed. 2. Verify that main board to electronic journal and the electronic journal to dispenser cables securely seated at both ends of the cable. The cables may be defective. 3. Other components that may cause this error are the main board or the dispensing mechanism. Exit blocked as reported by status check 1. Inspect the feed path and exit sensor for jammed currency and broken components. The exit sensor may be dirty. Clean as needed with soft brush and vacuum cleaner. 2. Reset the cash dispenser by turning OFF the AC power switch for a few seconds and switching it back ON. Clear the error. Purge the dispenser with the purge command. Verify correct operation with a live transaction. 3. If the problem persists, replace the dispensing mechanism. Feed sensor blocked 1. Inspect the feed path and Feed sensors for jammed currency and broken components. The feed sensors may be dirty. Clean as needed with soft brush and as reported by vacuum cleaner. status check 2. Reset the Cash Dispenser by turning OFF the AC power switch for a few seconds and switching it back ON. Clear the error. Purge the dispenser with the purge command. 3. Complete several test dispenses to verify correct operation. If the problem persists, replace the dispensing mechanism. Modem initialization 1. Reset the Cash Dispenser by turning OFF the AC power switch for a few seconds failed and switching it back ON. 2. If the problem persists, remove the main board and replace the modem. 3. If replacing the modem does not correct the problem, replace the main board.
133
8100, 9100, 9110, 9600, 9610, 9615, 9640, 9650, 9700, 9710, 9705, 9750, RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM), RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850, MAKO, SuperScrip
134
135
136
8100, 9100, 9110, 9600, 9610, 9615, 9700, 9710, 9705, 9750, RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM), RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, RT2000, 9800, MAKO, SuperScrip
137
9500
Print failure to journal
138
139
140
1. Verify that there is paper in the printer. Replenish paper as needed. Refer to Section 5 of the RL5000 Service Manual or the RL5000 Quick Reference Guide for instructions. 2. Release the printer locking screw. Open the printer support bracket and verify that there are no jams in the printer or the paper path. Verify the blue lever on the left side of the printer in the print position. 3. Inspect the cable supplying DC power from the power supply to the printer. Make sure it is connected to CN1 on the printer control board. Verify that all DC voltages applied to the printer control board are correct. If the voltages are not within tolerance, the cable or power supply may be defective. 4. Inspect the printer data cable for damage. Make sure it is seated at the main board and at the printer control board at CN6. 5. Inspect the cables connected to CN2, CN3, CN4, and CN5. Make sure they are seated at the printer control board and not damaged. 6. If the voltages are correct, and the cables are undamaged and correctly connected causes of this error may be a defective cable a defective printer printer con 1. Verify that there is paper in the printer. Replenish paper as needed. Refer to the Printer controller appropriate Service Manual or Quick Reference Guide for instructions. not responding to 2. On all models other then 96XX, Release the printer locking screw. Open the commands printer support bracket and verify that there are no jams in the printer or the paper path. Verify the blue lever on the left side of the printer in the print position. 3. Inspect the cable supplying DC power from the power supply to the printer. Make sure it is connected to CN1 on the printer control board. Verify that all DC voltages applied to the printer control board are correct. If the voltages are not within tolerance, the cable or power supply may be defective. 4. Inspect the printer data cable for damage. Make sure it is seated at the main board and at the printer control board at CN6. 5. Inspect the cables connected to CN2, CN3, CN4, and CN5. Make sure they are seated at the printer control board and not damaged. 6. If the voltages are correct, and the cables are undamaged and correctly connected, causes of this error may be a defective cable, a defective printer, printer con 7. On 96XX models, open the printer access latch and inspect for jams and blockage. 8 Inspect the cable supplying DC power from the power supply to the printer Make Time-out waiting for 1. Verify that there is paper in the printer. Replenish paper as needed. Refer to printer to be ready Section 5 of the RL5000 Service Manual or the RL5000 Quick Reference Guide for instructions. 2. Release the printer locking screw. Open the printer support bracket and verify that there are no jams in the printer or the paper path. Verify the blue lever on the left side of the printer in the print position. 3. Inspect the cable supplying DC power from the power supply to the printer. Make sure it is connected to CN1 on the printer control board. Verify that all DC voltages applied to the printer control board are correct. If the voltages are not within tolerance, the cable or power supply may be defective. 4. Inspect the printer data cable for damage. Make sure it is seated at the main board and at the printer control board at CN6. 5. Inspect the cables connected to CN2, CN3, CN4, and CN5. Make sure they are seated at the printer control board and not damaged. 6. If the voltages are correct, and the cables are undamaged and correctly connected causes of this error may be a defective cable a defective printer printer con Printer failed while printing to the receipt printer
141
142
Paper jam reported 1. Release the printer locking screw. Open the printer support bracket and verify that there are no jams in the printer or the paper path. Verify the blue lever on the by the controller during status check. left side of the printer in the print position. 2. Release the printer locking screw. Open the printer support bracket and verify that there are no jams in the printer or the paper path. Verify the blue lever on the left side of the printer in the print position. 3. Inspect the cable supplying DC power from the power supply to the printer. Make sure it is connected to CN1 on the printer control board. Verify that all DC voltages applied to the printer control board are correct. If the voltages are not within tolerance, the cable or power supply may be defective. 4. Inspect the printer data cable for damage. Make sure it is seated at the main board and at the printer control board at CN6. 5. Inspect the cables connected to CN2, CN3, CN4, and CN5. Make sure they are seated at the printer control board and not damaged. 6. If the voltages are correct, and the cables are undamaged and correctly connected causes of this error may be a defective cable a defective printer printer con 8100, 9100, 9110, 9600, 9610, 9615, 9640, Dispenser returns 1. Verify that the power supply is operating and the DC voltages being supplied to 9650, 9700, 9710, 9705, 9750, RL5000 bad command error. the main board and dispenser are correct. Seat connectors or replace the power (SDD), RL5000 (TDM), RL5000 (NMD), FT5000 supply as needed. 2. Verify that main board to electronic journal and the electronic journal to dispenser RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850, MAKO cables securely seated at both ends of the cable. The cables may be defective. 3. Other components that may cause this error are the main board or the dispensing mechanism. 8100, 9100, 9110, 9600, 9610, 9615, 9640, 9650, 9700, 9710, 9705, 9750, RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM), RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850, MAKO, SuperScrip 8100, 9100, 9110, 9600, 9610, 9615, 9640, 9650, 9700, 9710, 9705, 9750, RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM), RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850, MAKO, SuperScrip No reply from the electronic journal. 1. Inspect main board to electronic journal (EJ) communication cable for damage. Make sure the connectors are seated securely on the main board and on the electronic journal. a. When troubleshooting the 8100, 9100, RL and RT be aware that the electronic journal is built into the main board of the dispenser. b. On all 8100/9100 machines, ensure the EJ data cable is connected to the lower RJ45 data port on the 9100 main board. The upper RJ-45 port is used for downloading software only. Note, if the EJ is connected to the load port of the 9100 main board, permanent damage may result. 2. If it is necessary to check continuity of the cable assembly, refer to the appropriate ATM Service Manual for pin out of the cable assembly. 3. Inspect electronic journal to dispenser communication cable for damage. Make sure the connectors are seated securely on the main board and on the electronic journal. 4. If it is necessary to check continuity of the cable assembly, refer to the appropriate ATM Service Manual for pin out of the cable assembly 1. Inspect main board to electronic journal communication cable for damage. Make sure the connectors are seated securely on the main board and on the electronic journal. 2. If it is necessary to check continuity of the cable assembly, refer to the appropriate ATM Service Manual for pin out of the cable assembly. 3. Inspect electronic journal to dispenser communication cable for damage. Make sure the connectors are seated securely on the main board and on the electronic journal. 4. If it is necessary to check continuity of the cable assembly, refer to the appropriate ATM Service Manual for pin out of the cable assembly 5. If the cables are undamaged, the main board or electronic journal may be defective
144
145
Error in reply from the electronic journal
146
No reply from command to electronic journal
147
8100, 9100, 9705, RL5000 (TDM), RT2000
Error in reply from electronic journal.
148
8100, 9100, 9110, 9600, 9610, 9615, 9640, 9650, 9700, 9710, 9705, 9750, MAKO, SuperScrip
Write to electronic journal failed
149
8100, 9100, 9705, RL5000 (TDM), RT2000
Read from electronic journal failed
1. Inspect main board to electronic journal communication cable for damage. Make sure the connectors are seated securely on the main board and on the electronic journal. 2. If it is necessary to check continuity of the cable assembly, refer to the appropriate ATM Service Manual for pin out of the cable assembly. 3. Inspect electronic journal to dispenser communication cable for damage. Make sure the connectors are seated securely on the main board and on the electronic journal. 4. If it is necessary to check continuity of the cable assembly, refer to the appropriate ATM Service Manual for pin out of the cable assembly 5. If the cables are undamaged, the main board or electronic journal may be defective 1. Inspect main board to electronic journal communication cable for damage. Make sure the connectors are seated securely on the main board and on the electronic journal. 2. If it is necessary to check continuity of the cable assembly, refer to the appropriate ATM Service Manual for pin out of the cable assembly. 3. Inspect electronic journal to dispenser communication cable for damage. Make sure the connectors are seated securely on the main board and on the electronic journal. 4. If it is necessary to check continuity of the cable assembly, refer to the appropriate ATM Service Manual for pin out of the cable assembly. 5. If the cables are undamaged, the main board or electronic journal may be defective Most probable cause, the electronic journal is full. State by verify if this is associated with error code 151. If so, work to resolve error code 151. 1. Inspect main board to electronic journal communication cable for damage. Make sure the connectors are seated securely on the main board and on the electronic journal. 2. If it is necessary to check continuity of the cable assembly, refer to the appropriate ATM Service Manual for pin out of the cable assembly. 3. Inspect electronic journal to dispenser communication cable for damage. Make sure the connectors are seated securely on the main board and on the electronic journal. 4. If it is necessary to check continuity of the cable assembly, refer to the appropriate ATM Service Manual for pin out of the cable assembly 5. If the cables are undamaged, the main board or electronic journal may be defective 1. Inspect main board to electronic journal communication cable for damage. Make sure the connectors are seated securely on the main board and on the electronic journal. 2. If it is necessary to check continuity of the cable assembly, refer to the appropriate ATM Service Manual for pin out of the cable assembly. 3. Inspect electronic journal to dispenser communication cable for damage. Make sure the connectors are seated securely on the main board and on the electronic journal. 4. If it is necessary to check continuity of the cable assembly, refer to the appropriate ATM Service Manual for pin out of the cable assembly 5. If the cables are undamaged, the main board or electronic journal may be defective
150
8100, 9100, 9705, RL5000 (TDM), RT2000
151
Status command to 1. Inspect main board to electronic journal communication cable for damage. Make journal failed sure the connectors are seated securely on the main board and on the electronic journal. 2. If it is necessary to check continuity of the cable assembly, refer to the appropriate ATM Service Manual for pin out of the cable assembly. 3. Inspect electronic journal to dispenser communication cable for damage. Make sure the connectors are seated securely on the main board and on the electronic journal. 4. If it is necessary to check continuity of the cable assembly, refer to the appropriate ATM Service Manual for pin out of the cable assembly 5. If the cables are undamaged, the main board or electronic journal may be defective Electronic journal The electronic journal on 8-bit machines (9600, 9700, and 9100) can store as many full as 2400 records. The journal on these machines should be printed on a regular basis (i.e. when completing a cassette close function.) to keep it from filling up. If the journal becomes, full the only way it can be cleared and have a copy of it records is to print to the receipt printer or download the journal to the Triton Connect host. On 32-bit machines (RLs, FT's, RTs) the electronic journal can store as many as 32,768 records, it is recommended that you do not print the journal. Instead, save the journal to an external USB storage device or download to Triton Connect. Once records have been viewed or saved, they need to be marked as audited. Audited records can then be archived to an external device or deleted. (Note: Records can be archived to the internal flash. Doing this will not clear any available memory, and will not aid in clearing Error Code 151.) Below are steps to take to clear Error code 151 on 32-bit machines: 1. View Unaudited Records. Once they are displayed on the screen, print or save them 2 Download to Triton Connect Ensure they are marked as audited 1. Inspect main board to electronic journal communication cable for damage. Make sure the connectors are seated securely on the main board and on the electronic journal. 2. If it is necessary to check continuity of the cable assembly, refer to Appendix B for pin out of the cable assembly. 3. Inspect electronic journal to dispenser communication cable for damage. Make sure the connectors are seated securely on the main board and on the electronic journal. 4. If it is necessary to check continuity of the cable assembly,refer to the appropriate ATM Service Manual for pin out of the cable assembly 5. If the cables are undamaged, the main board or electronic journal may be defective 1. Inspect main board to electronic journal communication cable for damage. Make sure the connectors are seated securely on the main board and on the electronic journal. 2. If it is necessary to check continuity of the cable assembly, refer to Appendix B for pin out of the cable assembly. 3. Inspect electronic journal to dispenser communication cable for damage. Make sure the connectors are seated securely on the main board and on the electronic journal. 4. If it is necessary to check continuity of the cable assembly, refer to Appendix B for pin out of the cable assembly 5. If the cables are undamaged, the main board or electronic journal may be defective
152
8100, 9100, 9705, RL5000 (TDM), RT2000
Electronic journal corrupt
153
Electronic journal mode
154
8100, 9100, 9705, RL5000 (TDM), RT2000
155
8100, 9100, 9705, RL5000 (TDM), RT2000
156
8100, 9100, 9615, 9640, 9650, 9705, 9750, RL5000 (TDM), RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, RT2000, 9840, 9850
Unknown electronic 1. Inspect main board to electronic journal communication cable for damage. Make journal status sure the connectors are seated securely on the main board and on the electronic journal. 2. If it is necessary to check continuity of the cable assembly, refer to the appropriate ATM Service Manual for pin out of the cable assembly. 3. Inspect electronic journal to dispenser communication cable for damage. Make sure the connectors are seated securely on the main board and on the electronic journal. 4. If it is necessary to check continuity of the cable assembly, refer to the appropriate ATM Service Manual for pin out of the cable assembly 5. If the cables are undamaged, the main board or electronic journal may be defective 1. Inspect main board to electronic journal communication cable for damage. Make Electronic journal sure the connectors are seated securely on the main board and on the electronic modify record journal. failure 2. If it is necessary to check continuity of the cable assembly, refer to Appendix B for pin out of the cable assembly. 3. Inspect electronic journal to dispenser communication cable for damage. Make sure the connectors are seated securely on the main board and on the electronic journal. 4. If it is necessary to check continuity of the cable assembly, refer to Appendix B for pin out of the cable assembly 5. If the cables are undamaged, the main board or electronic journal may be defective Cassette out of This occurs when the last cassette has been taken out of service. Cassettes are taken service. out of service because of feed failures or excessive rejects. 1. Inspect cassettes. Fill if needed. If they are not empty, see corrective action for Error Code 33. 2. If excessive rejects are suspected, see corrective action for Error Code 48. 3. Place cassettes in service. Erase command to electronic journal failed 1. Inspect main board to electronic journal communication cable for damage. Make sure the connectors are seated securely on the main board and on the electronic journal. 2. If it is necessary to check continuity of the cable assembly, refer to the appropriate ATM Service Manual for pin out of the cable assembly. 3. Inspect electronic journal to dispenser communication cable for damage. Make sure the connectors are seated securely on the main board and on the electronic journal. 4. If it is necessary to check continuity of the cable assembly, refer to the appropriate ATM Service Manual for pin out of the cable assembly 5. If the cables are undamaged, the main board or electronic journal may be defective
157
8100, 9100, 9705, RL5000 (TDM), RT2000
158
159
160
161
8100, 9100, 9110, 9600, 9610, 9615, 9640, Format command to 1. Inspect main board to electronic journal communication cable for damage. Make sure the connectors are seated securely on the main board and on the electronic 9650, 9700, 9710, 9705, 9750, RL5000 electronic journal journal. (SDD), RL5000 (TDM), RL5000 (NMD), FT5000 failed 2. If it is necessary to check continuity of the cable assembly, refer to the RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850, MAKO appropriate ATM Service Manual for pin out of the cable assembly. 3. Inspect electronic journal to dispenser communication cable for damage. Make sure the connectors are seated securely on the main board and on the electronic journal. 4. If it is necessary to check continuity of the cable assembly, refer to the appropriate ATM Service Manual for pin out of the cable assembly 5. If the cables are undamaged, the main board or electronic journal may be defective 8100, 9100, 9110, 9600, 9610, 9615, 9640, Electronic journal 1. Inspect main board to electronic journal communication cable for damage. Make 9650, 9700, 9710, 9705, 9750, RL5000 test feature failed sure the connectors are seated securely on the main board and on the electronic (SDD), RL5000 (TDM), RL5000 (NMD), FT5000 journal. 2. If it is necessary to check continuity of the cable assembly, refer to the RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850, MAKO appropriate ATM Service Manual for pin out of the cable assembly. 3. Inspect electronic journal to dispenser communication cable for damage. Make sure the connectors are seated securely on the main board and on the electronic journal. 4. If it is necessary to check continuity of the cable assembly, refer to the appropriate ATM Service Manual for pin out of the cable assembly 5. If the cables are undamaged, the main board or electronic journal may be defective 8100, 9100, 9110, 9600, 9610, 9615, 9640, Electronic journal 1. Inspect main board to electronic journal communication cable for damage. Make 9650, 9700, 9710, 9705, 9750, RL5000 set featured failed sure the connectors are seated securely on the main board and on the electronic (SDD), RL5000 (TDM), RL5000 (NMD), FT5000 journal. 2. If it is necessary to check continuity of the cable assembly, refer to Appendix B for RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850, MAKO pin out of the cable assembly. 3. Inspect electronic journal to dispenser communication cable for damage. Make sure the connectors are seated securely on the main board and on the electronic journal. 4. If it is necessary to check continuity of the cable assembly, refer to the appropriate ATM Service Manual for pin out of the cable assembly 5. If the cables are undamaged, the main board or electronic journal may be defective 8100, 9100, 9110, 9600, 9610, 9615, 9640, Electronic journal 1. Inspect main board to electronic journal communication cable for damage. Make 9650, 9700, 9710, 9705, 9750, RL5000 clear feature failed sure the connectors are seated securely on the main board and on the electronic (SDD), RL5000 (TDM), RL5000 (NMD), FT5000 journal. 2. If it is necessary to check continuity of the cable assembly, refer to the RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850, MAKO appropriate ATM Service Manual for pin out of the cable assembly. 3. Inspect electronic journal to dispenser communication cable for damage. Make sure the connectors are seated securely on the main board and on the electronic journal. 4. If it is necessary to check continuity of the cable assembly, refer to the appropriate ATM Service Manual for pin out of the cable assembly 5. If the cables are undamaged, the main board or electronic journal may be defective
162
Electronic Journal get serial number failed
163
Terminal did not answer. This is a Triton Connect error.
164
8100, 9100, 9110, 9610, 9615, 9700, 9710, 9705, RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM), RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, RT2000, 9800, MAKO 8100, 9100, 9110, 9610, 9615, 9700, 9710, 9705, RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM), RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, RT2000, 9800, MAKO
Terminal did not return call. Triton Connect error. Electronic journal not present
1. Inspect main board to electronic journal communication cable for damage. Make sure the connectors are seated securely on the main board and on the electronic journal. 2. If it is necessary to check continuity of the cable assembly, refer to the appropriate ATM Service Manual for pin out of the cable assembly. 3. Inspect electronic journal to dispenser communication cable for damage. Make sure the connectors are seated securely on the main board and on the electronic journal. 4. If it is necessary to check continuity of the cable assembly, refer to the appropriate ATM Service Manual for pin out of the cable assembly 5. If the cables are undamaged, the main board or electronic journal may be defective 1. This error is not displayed at the cash dispenser. The Triton Connect Host Computer generates the error when the terminal does not respond to a telephone call from the Triton Connect Host Computer. 2. The cash dispenser may be turned OFF, the modem may be defective, or the telephone line may be shared with another device that connects to the line before the cash dispenser. Additionally, the Triton Connect feature may be disabled at the Cash Dispenser. This error is not displayed at the Cash Dispenser. The Triton Connect Host Computer generates this error when a terminal does not return a call to the Triton Connect Host Computer as requested. The modem may be defective. 1. Inspect main board to electronic journal communication cable for damage. Make sure the connectors are seated securely on the main board and on the electronic journal. 2. If it is necessary to check continuity of the cable assembly, refer to the appropriate ATM Service Manual for pin out of the cable assembly. 3. Inspect electronic journal to dispenser communication cable for damage. Make sure the connectors are seated securely on the main board and on the electronic journal. 4. If it is necessary to check continuity of the cable assembly, refer to the appropriate ATM Service Manual for pin out of the cable assembly 5. If the cables are undamaged, the main board or electronic journal may be defective 1. Open the Security Cabinet and inspect the cash dispenser for broken parts. Replace the dispenser if it is broken. Check for and clear any foreign matter the note path. 2. Reset the Cash Dispenser by turning OFF the AC power switch for a few seconds and switching it back ON. 3. Replace the dispenser if the error persists. This is an indication that the cash in the cassette has gone below the threshold level set in the terminal configuration. This is a warning message that will not put the cash dispenser out of service.
165
166
8100, 9100, 9110, 9600, 9610, 9615, 9700, 9710, 9705, 9750, RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM), RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, RT2000, 9800, MAKO, SuperScrip
Bad dispense
167
168
8100, 9100, 9110, 9600, 9610, 9615, 9640, 9650, 9700, 9710, 9705, 9750, RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM), RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850, MAKO, SuperScrip 8100, 9100, 9110, 9600, 9610, 9615, 9640, 9650, 9700, 9710, 9705, 9750, RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM), RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850, MAKO, SuperScrip
Reported low cash to Triton Connect
Software download to terminal failed.
This is a Triton Connect error. Consult
182
9600, 9610, 9700, 9710, RL5000 (SDD), 9800, MAKO
Currency cassette low. Valid for SDD and GND mechanisms only.
With the low currency feature enabled, this error condition will occur before the cassette is actually empty. There should be about 1/4 inch of currency (approximately 60 bills) in the cassette when the error is detected. To clear an Error 182: 1. Reset the cash dispenser by switching the main power switch OFF for a few seconds and then switching it back ON. 2. Remove the cassette from the dispensing mechanism. 3. Press the reset error key. 4. Refill and install the cassette in the dispensing mechanism. 5. When the low currency function is disabled, the dispenser will dispense every note in the cassette then go out of service for an error code 33 (feed failure). 1. Install a new roll of paper if needed. 2. If this does not correct the problem, verify that the paper low sensor is correctly attached to the paper bracket and that the cable between the paper low paper feed assembly and the docking assembly is undamaged and securely connected at both ends. 3. The paper low sensor may be dirty and require cleaning. 4. Otherwise, the possible causes of the problem may be a defective paper low sensor, cable, docking assembly or. A temporary fix to this problem may be to set the low receipt paper parameter to in service so that the terminal software does not read the input from the low paper sensor. When this is done, the terminal will operate normally until it is completely out of paper. Then it will go out of service for and error code 195 out of paper.
183
Receipt printer paper is low
184 185
9500
Journal printer paper low

Enter Management Functions and configure the telephone number.
8100, 9100, 9110, 9600, 9610, 9615, 9640, Telephone number 9650, 9700, 9710, 9705, 9750, RL5000 not configured (SDD), RL5000 (TDM), RL5000 (NMD), FT5000 RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850, MAKO 9600, 9610, 9615, 9640, 9650, MAKO, SuperScrip 8100, 9100, 9110, 9600, 9610, 9615, 9640, 9650, 9700, 9710, 9705, 9750, RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM), RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850, MAKO, SuperScrip 8100, 9100, 9110, 9600, 9610, 9615, 9640, 9650, 9700, 9710, 9705, 9750, RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM), RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850, MAKO, SuperScrip 8100, 9100, 9110, 9600, 9610, 9615, 9640, 9650, 9700, 9710, 9705, 9750, RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM), RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850, MAKO, SuperScrip 8100, 9100, 9110, 9600, 9610, 9615, 9640, 9650, 9700, 9710, 9705, 9750, RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM), RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850, MAKO, SuperScrip Bill Size not configured Maximum withdrawal not configured
186 187
This value is factory defaulted to $0.00. Allowable bill sizes are 5, 10, 20, 50, and 100. Enter the Management Functions and configure the bill size. Enter the management functions and configure the multiple amount parameter. The maximum withdrawal cannot exceed 50 time the denomination of the bill size in the cassette.
188
PIN working key not Enter the management functions and configure (download) the working key. configured
189
Terminal ID not configured
Enter the management functions and configure the terminal ID number.
190
PIN Master key not configured
Enter the management functions and configure the PIN master key. Note: This error code is often caused by a SPED tamper. If you suspect SPED tamper or Error code 205, see the corrective action for Error Code 205.
191
Feed Failure
This error is usually associated with an empty note cassette or currency that is in unfit condition. 1. Refill the cassette as needed. 2. Inspect the cassette and feed path for currency that is stuck together or jammed. 3. If no jam is located, remove the first note from the cassette. Purge the dispenser. Do several test dispense operations. a. If the test dispenses are completed normally, and the return code are correct, clear all errors and place the cash dispenser in operation. b. If the test dispenser fails again, try testing while pushing in on the cassette. If it works then, the cassettes may not staying locked in the cassettes. Determine what is causing the cassette to not stay locked in place. 4. If the currency is in fit condition and the error persists, consider replacing the cassette or the dispenser. 1. Enter management functions and verify that all terminal parameters have been entered correctly. 2. Verify that the telephone line is operational. 3. Reset the Cash Dispenser by turning OFF the AC power switch for a few seconds and switching it back ON. Clear the error. 4. If the error persist, possible causes may be the modem or main board assembly. 1. Inspect the Electronic Journal to make sure it is the correct part number. ATMs with NMD or Mini Mech dispensers require electronic journals with part number that start with 9600 or 09600. 2. Reset the Cash Dispenser by turning OFF the AC power switch for a few seconds and switching it back ON. Clear the error. 3. If the Error persists, replace the Electronic Journal. This is more of a status code then an error code. A dispense command was sent to the dispenser when no cassettes are locked or they are not in service. 1. If working with an 8100, print a test receipt printer, Verify that the A cassette is in service. If not, place in service using the Cassette Service menu option. Purge then test dispense. If they pass, clear the error and place the ATM in service. 2. If working with a 9100, print a test receipt printer. Verify the Cassette Summery. It should say Cassette A, B, C or D. Below Cassette Service on the receipt, verify that the cassette listed in Cassette Summery, is In Service. If not, place in service using the Cassette Service menu option. Purge then test dispense. If they pass, clear the error and place the ATM in service. 3. If working with a 96XX or 97XX ATM, with an NMD dispenser, lock the cassettes, then print the test receipt printer. Verify the Cassette Summery. It should say Cassette A, B, C or D. Below Cassette Service on the receipt, verify that the cassette listed in Cassette Summery, is In Service. If not, place in service using the Cassette Se 4. If working with an RL, FT or RT use The Cassette Parameters menu to lock the casse 5. If any of the above steps fail, there should be an error code displayed. Reference th 1. Replenish the paper. Reset the Cash Dispenser by turning OFF the AC power switch for a few seconds and switching it back ON. Clear the error. 2. Make sure that the ribbon cable from the docking station to the low paper sensor assembly is fastened at both ends of the cable and the orientation of the cable is correct. 3. If the error persists, possible causes of the problem may be the low paper sensor assembly, the docking station, the main board, or cables.
192
Communication error
193
9640, 9650, 9840, 9850, MAKO
Baud rate setting for electronic journal failed
194
8100, 9100, 9615, 9640, 9650, 9750, RL5000 An Attempt to Dispense is made (TDM), RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, RT2000, the Cassettes are 9840, 9850 not Locked
195
Receipt printer out of paper
196
Card reader error
1. Inspect the card reader assembly. Make sure that there is no foreign material in the card slot. 2. Clean the card reader assembly with a cleaning card. 3. Make sure the ribbon cable from the docking station to the card reader is fastened at both ends of the cable and the orientation of the cable is correct. 4. If the error persists, replace the card reader This error indicates that the bills are not moving the notes through the dispenser fast enough. This is most often caused by slipping stacker pulleys. 1. Inspect the cassette and feed path for currency that is stuck together or jammed. 2. If no jam is located, remove the first note from the cassette. Purge the dispenser. Do several test dispense operations. 3. Next try a live dispense (note, you can not fully test this dispenser for this error without doing live dispenses). If the error returns, inspect the stacker pulleys to ensure they are not slipping. 4. If the problems persist, consider replacing the dispenser.
197
MAKO
Dispenser detect blocked stacker during dispense
198
MAKO
This error is usually associated with an empty note cassette or currency that is in Dispenser did not detect note going to unfit condition. 1. Refill the cassette as needed. stacker 2. Inspect the cassette and feed path for currency that is stuck together or jammed. 3. If no jam is located, remove the first note from the cassette. Purge the dispenser. Do several test dispense operations. 4. If the test dispenses are completed normally, and the return code are correct, clear all errors and place the cash dispenser in operation. 5. If the currency is in fit condition and the error persists, consider replacing the cassette or the dispenser. Dispense width errors Dispenser fed extra note into stacker This status appears when the count at the exit can not be guaranteed. 1. A mechanical error has occurred. It may be necessary to replace the dispenser. This status appears when the count at the exit can not be guaranteed. 1. A mechanical error has occurred. It may be necessary to replace the dispenser.
199
MAKO
200
MAKO
201
MAKO
Dispenser detected This status is generated when there are 6 rejects during the current dispense. It is more than six errors usually caused by attempting to dispense currency that is unacceptable or currency that has not been properly prepared. in a dispense 1. Inspect the currency for excessive wear. Remove any unacceptable currency from the cassette. 2. Inspect the feed path for jammed currency. Remove any jammed currency. 3. Clear all error and purge the dispenser using the purge command. 4. Test the dispenser by completing several test dispenses with the test dispense command. If the error clears, put the cash dispenser back in service. If these actions have no effect, replace the dispensing mechanism. Dispenser busy This status is generated when both the stacker and exit sensor are both blocked. 1. Inspect the feed path for jammed currency. Remove any jammed currency. 3. Clear all error and purge the dispenser using the purge command. 4. Test the dispenser by completing several test dispenses with the test dispense command. If the error clears, put the cash dispenser back in service. If these actions have no effect, replace the dispensing mechanism.
202
9800, 9840, 9850, MAKO
203
8100, 9100, 9110, 9600, 9610, 9615, 9640, 9650, 9700, 9710, 9705, 9750, RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM), RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850, MAKO, SuperScrip 9800, 9840, 9850, MAKO
SPED keypad is not replying to main board
204
Number of bills dispensed not equal to bills requested SPED keypad reported tamper condition SPED keypad could not perform a successful command within SPED_MAX_ATTEMP TS tries SPED not detected
Status valid only for units with SPED keypad device installed. 1. Make sure the battery is seated secure in the battery holder. 2. Make sure the tamper screw is secure to the SPED Module. Reset the Cash Dispenser by turning OFF the AC power switch for a few seconds and switching it back ON. Clear the error. 3. If the error persists, replace the SPED keypad module.
205
206
8100, 9100, 9110, 9640, 9650, 9700, 9710, 9705, RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM), RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850, MAKO, SuperScrip 8100, 9100, 9110, 9640, 9650, 9700, 9710, 9705, RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM), RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850, MAKO, SuperScrip
Status valid only for units with SPED keypad device installed. Make sure the battery is seated secure in the battery holder. Make sure the tamper screw is secure to the SPED module. Reset the cash dispenser and clear the error. If the error persists, replace the SPED keypad module. Status valid only for units with SPED keypad device installed. Reset the cash dispenser and clear the error. If error persists, replace the SPED keypad module.
207
8100, 9100, 9110, 9640, 9650, 9700, 9710, 9705, RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM), RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850, MAKO, SuperScrip
This Error/Status Code is valid for units with SPED keypad device installed. 1. Check the cable and connections from J7A on the docking station to the SPED board. 2. Verify that the SPED board has the correct DC voltages applied to it. 3. If the DC voltages applied to the SPED board correct and the cables are in good condition and seated properly, replace the SPED board.
208
9800, 9840, 9850, MAKO
Dispenser did not reply after dispense command Check number of notes delivered command failed Dispenser type unknown
209
9640, 9650, 9840, 9850
210
211 212 231
8100, 9100, 9110, 9640, 9650, 9700, 9710, 9705, RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM), RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850, MAKO 9800, 9840, 9850, MAKO
See Error Code 130
Reply from dispenser invalid SuperScrip Wrong SPED for Super Scrip RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), Card Reader Error FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 (Smart Card)
233
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), Smart Card Reader FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 not installed SPED Version number is not 3DES compatible MAP Stack overflow
234
235
236
8100, 9100, 9110, 9600, 9610, 9615, 9640, 9650, 9700, 9710, 9705, 9750, RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM), RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850
237
8100, 9100, 9110, 9600, 9610, 9615, 9640, 9650, 9700, 9710, 9705, 9750, RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM), RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850
The main board does not see any activity on the TCP-IP Communication. 1. If you are not using TCP-IP / Ethernet for transactions or Triton Connect, ensure you do not have TCP-IP selected for any option in processors, communications or Triton Connect. 2. Verify the quality of your incoming TCP-IP connection and your TCP-IP configuration. 3. Suspect the main board, the TCP-IP connection device (Quad Port Board in 96XX, Docking board on RL, FT or RT) or the TCP-IP equipment. TCP/IP device failed Out going commutations seems to be successful, but there is not returning communications. 1. Start by verify your communications settings and external TCP-IP equipment. 2. Verify the quality of your incoming TCP-IP connection and your TCP-IP configuration. 3. Suspect the main board, the TCP-IP connection device (Quad Port Board in 96XX, Docking board on RL, FT or RT) or the TCP-IP equipment. Failed to make connection to TCP/IP host
238
239
8100, 9100, 9110, 9600, 9610, 9615, 9640, Power failure during A reset has occurred in the middle of a dispense. 9650, 9700, 9710, 9705, 9750, RL5000 dispense 1. This can be confirmed by referencing the electronic journal. Look for a reset entry (SDD), RL5000 (TDM), RL5000 (NMD), FT5000 directly after an incomplete transaction. 2. If resets are suspected, determine what could have caused the main board to RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850, MAKO reset. Suspect the ATM power supply, incoming power, the dispenser software or the main board / CPU. SPED serial number The serial number stored in the software does not match the serial number of the 8100, 9100, 9110, 9600, 9610, 9615, 9640, change VEPP. 9650, 9700, 9710, 9705, 9750, MAKO, 1. Either the VEPP was changed or the software was reloaded, such as when you do a SuperScrip VEPP upgrade, or if the VEPP was changed. 2. Can only be cleared in Diagnostics>Keypad>Clear Tamper. On an 8 bit machine, such as 9100 or 9600, choose Diagnostics>More>More Keypad>Clear Tamper. 8100, 9100, 9650, 9700, SuperScrip 8100, 9100, 9650, 9700, SuperScrip 9110, 9600, 9610, 9615, 9640, 9710, 9705, 9750, MAKO, 9110, 9600, 9610, 9615, 9640, 9710, 9705, 9750, MAKO, SPED Self Test Error The SPED has returned an error during self test. 1. Reset the error. If error fails to reset, or the error reoccurs in a short amount of time, consider replacing the SPED. SPED Warning: Self See Error Code 240 Test error, low battery Stuck key Unable to display user defined surcharge screen Min. partial dispense enabled with no doc count Min. partial dispense enabled with no usable bills Master password must be changed from default Successful Command The Master and/or Adminstrative password must be changed from the factory default numbers. The NMD dispenser sends this status code when a command has been successfully executed. This status code will appear in the electronic journal as code 300 indicating the successful completion of a transaction. When performing a purge or test dispense operation the return code will be 0 in the first digit returned by the dispenser. It will be display as the hexadecimal number 30 when running the dispenser with the NMD test software.
240
241
242 243
244
245
246
8100, 9100, 96XX, 97XX, RL2000, RT2000, RL5000, FT5000 9640, 9650, 9750, RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
300
301
9640, 9650, 9750, RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
Low level in cassette
This error code is returned by the dispenser when the number of notes in one or more of the cassettes is below a preset level, indicating the low level sensor in the note cassette has been activated. This occurs when the currency in any cassette reaches a thickness of approximately 25-35 mm. This is a warning message. It will not place the cash dispenser out of service. This condition is also displayed on the configuration summary printout under dispenser as a lower case a, b, c, or d for the cassette in the low currency condition. Otherwise, the error code for cassettes not in a low currency condition would normally be upper case characters A, B, C, or D. Remove and fill the affected cassette using normal procedures. Refilling may be delayed for several transactions if the error code is the first warning that the cassette is nearly empty. However, actions to fill the cassette should be taken as soon as possible. This error code is generated when a cassette is empty or when it attempts to dispense and fails to pick. With Note Feeder 100 and 101 there is an empty sensor that check for notes in the cassettes with an optical sensor. Note Feeder 200 does not have this sensor. Either version of Note Feeder will report this error if there is a pick failure. The cash dispenser will attempt to complete the transaction from other cassettes. If the requested amount cannot be dispensed, the customer will receive the cash that can be dispensed. The transaction will be completed with the customers receipt indicating the amount of cash actually received. The cash dispenser will then attempt to complete a Reversal Transaction to notify the financial institution of the error. 1. This error alone will not put the cash dispenser out of service. It will cause that cassette to be taken out of service. The cash dispenser will only be placed out of service when all cassettes are out of service. 2. Remove and refill the affected cassette using normal replenishment procedures. This error code is generated when a cassette is not open (locked) and any command other than open cassettes, reset, and close cassettes are sent to the system. It is feasible that this error code could be generated even if the lifts are in the up position. This will occur if the machine is switched off and on during normal daily operation. This is done to indicate that the power has been off. 1. Clear this error code by restarting the cash dispense or by unlocking and locking the cassettes. 2. If the error recurs, a faulty cassette, note feeder or CMC module may be cause the problem. This error code indicates that notes were rejected during the transaction or test dispense operation. This is a warning message there is no action required.
302
9640, 9650, 9750, RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
Empty cassette
303
9640, 9650, 9750, RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
Lifts are down
304
9640, 9650, 9750, RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
Rejected notes
305
9640, 9650, 9750, RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
Diverter failure
This error code indicates that the system has recognized a document intended for the reject vault has reached the note transport sensor. The most probable cause is either mechanical or electrical failure of the note diverter in the note transport module. This error will place the cash dispenser out of service. 1. Inspect the note diverter in the note transport module. Verify that there are no documents jammed in the note diverter area. Make sure the note diverter moves freely. Check to make sure that cables connecting the note transport and the CMC module are not damaged. Make sure all connectors attached to the CMC are seated in their receptacles. 2. Remove and empty the reject vault. Install the Reject Vault. Purge the dispensing mechanism. Complete several test dispenses. If the error does not repeat again, complete a live dispense to verify the note diverter moves the currency to the exit position. 3. If the error reoccurs the most likely causes of the problem may be note transport or CMC. There are several possible reason for this error code being generated. One cause is that the note feeder fails to feed notes. Another cause is that there are to many single rejected notes in the transactions. 1. Check the condition of the currency to ensure is fit for dispensing. 2. Verify that the cassettes are operation correctly. Replace cassette as needed. 3. Check the operation of the note feeder sensors. Clean the note feeder sensors and needed. 4. Replace the noted feeder or note feeder controller as necessary. This error code occurs when the message received by the dispenser is incorrect. The reason that the error code is generated is the detection of an This error code occurs when the message received by the dispenser is incorrect. The reason that the error code is generated is the detection of an incorrect LRC character or a parity error. 1. Inspect all communication cables to make sure they are not damaged and are properly connect to their termination points. 2. Restart the cash dispenser. Reset the dispenser and try to complete a test dispense. 3. If the error code is reported again, replace the CMC module. Otherwise, put the cash dispenser into service.
306
9640, 9650, 9750, RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
Failure to feed.
307
9640, 9650, 9750, RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
Transmission Error
308
9640, 9650, 9750, RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
Illegal command or This error occurs when the logical sequence of the commands sent to the dispenser is command sequence not the one expected by the system. Examples of this are two move commands sent one after another or a deliver command that is sent without a previous move command. 1. Inspect all communication cables to make sure they are not damaged. Make sure all cables are properly connected. 2. Reset the dispenser and try to send the command that caused the error code. 3. If the error code is reported again, replace the CMC module.
309
9640, 9650, 9750, RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
Jam in Note Qualifier
This error code is generated when the note transport sensor does not detect a note that was detected by the note qualifier. This may be due to jammed documents in the transport path between the note qualifier and the note diverter. This error code will place the cash dispenser out of service. 1. Inspect the documents in each cassette to insure they are in fit condition. Make sure that note qualifier and the note transport modules are mechanically aligned. Play close attention to the gears where the Note Qualifier and Note Transport meet. 2. Open all access panels and inspect for jammed documents in note path between the note qualifier and note transport. Remove the jammed documents as needed. 3. Inspect the note qualifier and note transport for broken components (belts, gears, cables, or sensors). 4. Inspect the note diverter for proper operation and damage. 5. Replace the note qualifier or note transport if the problem persists.
310
9640, 9650, 9750, RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
Cassette not properly installed.
This error code occurs when documents are requested from a cassette that is not present or is not open. This error code will place the cash dispenser in an out of service condition. 1. Verify the physical presence of each cassette. If present, unlock and remove each cassette from its feed channel. Put the cassettes back into its feed channel. Lock the cassettes. 2. Clear the error and perform a test dispense. If the error is repeated, proceed to the next paragraph. If the error does not show again put the cash dispenser back into service. 3. Verify that the identity of each cassette can be read through read cassette ID function. Cassettes with no identity must be injected with a new cassette ID. 4. If a cassette cannot be injected with a new ID, verify that the cable between the top feed channel and the CMC is in good condition and connected at both ends. 5. Try to inject an ID into another cassette. If the inject cassette ID function works on a different cassette. Then the original cassette is faulty. If the inject cassette ID function fails on a different cassette the CMC is defective.
311 312 313 9640, 9750, RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850 9640, 9650, 9750, RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
Config record size invalid No notes retracted Cassette hopper map invalid
This error code appears after the retract command is issued. This is a warning code only no action is required. This error code occurs when one cassette has no cassette ID, or it has an ID that is incompatible with this cash dispenser. 1. Using inject cassette ID, send a new cassette ID to any cassette that is suspected until you have verified the ID of all cassettes 2. If one or more cassette can not have an ID resent, that cassette is suspect.
314
Dispenser offline cannot resolve dispense count
315
9640, 9650, 9750, RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
Reject vault not properly installed
316
9640, 9650, 9750, RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
Delivery failure.
This error code is generated when the reject vault is not present or not properly installed. Attempting to operate the cash dispenser without the reject vault will normally cause it to go to an out of service condition. 1. Make sure the reject vault is installed correctly. Note: a common mistake with the NMD 50 is to tuck the green handle under the reject vault. This handle should just dangle. 2. Inspect the reject vault present sensor visually for proper operation. 3. Use the cash dispenser diagnostic functions to check the electrical operation of the sensor. 4. If the sensor is properly connected and operating correctly the CMC module may be defective. If the sensor is not operating normally, replace the note transport module This error code is generated by the system when the bundle carrier unit fails to move the note from the home position to the delivery throat. 1. Inspect the transport path for damage. 2. Inspect the bundle carriage unit for proper alignment in the transport path. 3. Inspect the bundle carriage power connection at the CMC or Note Stacker Controller. 4. Reset the error code and utilize the dispenser diagnostic purge and test dispense functions to verify operation. A reject command/movement failed. This may be a single or bundle reject failure. The bundle carriage unit failed to move from the home position to the reject position, back to the home position. 1. Inspect the note diverter for single reject failures. 2. Inspect the bundle carriage unit for bundle failures. 3. Inspect the transport path for damage. 4. Inspect the bundle carriage unit for proper alignment in the transport path. 5. Inspect the reject cassette. Consider replacing the reject vault 6. Inspect the bundle carriage power connection at the CMC or Note Stacker Controller. 7. Reset the error code and utilize the dispenser diagnostic purge and test dispense functions to verify operation. 8. This can be an electrical or mechanical failure, including the reject vault, the stacker unit, the note stacker controller or the CMC. This error code occurs while running the dispenser on the NMD test software and when too many notes are requested during a dispense command. The maximum number of notes that can be dispensed from the dispenser during a transaction is defaulted to fifty. Retry the test operation and request fifty or fewer notes. This error code is generated when a document from a note feeder fails to reach the note qualifier with in a specified time. This failure may be caused by a blockage in the transport path between the note feeder and the note qualifier, or if a document passes through the note qualifier unseen. This error code will cause the cash dispenser to go out of service. 1. Check the cassettes. Make sure they are not overfilled. Make sure the documents are fit condition. 2. Open all access panels and remove any jammed documents from the transport path. Inspect the note feeders and note qualifier for damage. 3. Restart the cash dispenser. Reset the error. Complete several test dispenses. If the test dispenses are normal and the error does not show again, the cash dispenser may be returned to service. If the error recurs, change the note feeder for the affected channel.
317
9640, 9650, 9750, RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
Reject failure
318
9640, 9650, 9750, RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
Too many notes requested
319
9640, 9650, 9750, RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
Jam in note transport
320
9640, 9650, 9750, RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
Reject cassette almost full
This error code is generated when the number of reject events exceeds 37 events. Error code 320 will not put the cash dispenser out of service. It is not displayed directly to the operator or customer. The error code will be sent to the Triton Connect host if Triton Connect feature is enabled. It will also be stored as part of the transaction data in the electronic journal. 1. The reject vault should be emptied as soon as possible in order to avoid an out of service condition that occurs when the number of reject events reaches 50. The reject event counter can be reset by removing the reject vault from the dispenser and then putting it back into the dispenser while power is applied to the dispenser. This error code is generated when there is a checksum error in data stored in the note cassette. 1. Program the cassette by injecting a new cassette ID into the cassette. If injecting a new cassette ID into the cassette does not correct the problem, replace the cassette. Error code 322 is generated when the main motor fails to reach normal speed with in a specified time, or if there are several pulses missing from the transport clock wheel (timing wheel) in one transaction. This error code causes an Out of Service condition. 1. Open all access panels and remove any jammed documents from the transport path. Verify the documents are fit for dispensing. Inspect the note qualifier for any damage (broken belts, broken gears, disconnected or damaged cables, broken timing wheel or timing wheel sensor not locked into place etc.). Make sure all access panels are closed. 2. Restart the cash dispenser and reset the error. Complete several test dispenses. If cash dispenser operates normally when performing the test dispense function, put the cash dispenser in service. 3. If the error code repeats, verify the power supply output voltages are within expected values. Replace the power supply if necessary. 4 If the power supply if operating normally replace the note qualifier to correct the
321
9640, 9650, 9750, RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
Cassette data corrupted
322
9640, 9650, 9750, RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
Main motor failure
323
9840, 9850
324 325 9640, 9650, 9750, RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
Dispenser offline Dispense count check error Reserved for warning status Note qualifier faulty Error code 325 is generated when the double detect sensors in the note qualifier can not be calibrated, or when the gain value cannot be adjusted when learning a new documents. 1. Verify that the cable that connects the double detect module to the CMC module is undamaged and connected at both ends. 2. Make sure the access panel on the bottom of the note qualifier is closed and locked in position. 3. Carefully remove the double detect module from the note qualifier. Use clean compressed air to remove any dust or dirt from the sensor lenses. Carefully install the double detect module into the note qualifier. Make sure all connections between the double detect module and the CMC are seated properly. 4. If at any time during the following checks, the faulty note qualifier error code recurs. It will be necessary to replace the note qualifier. 5. Restart the cash dispenser. Reset the error the error code. If it clears, initiate the learn note thickness operation. Perform a test dispense. If cash dispenser operates normally, it will pick from seven to fifteen notes from each cassette to calibrate the dou 6 If the operation is normal you may put the cash dispenser in service If these check
326
9640, 9650, 9750, RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
Note feed sensor failure
This error code is generated when there is a sensor error in one or more of the note feeders or when there is a document jammed in the note feeder exit sensor. 1. Make sure there are no documents jammed at any of note feeder exit sensors. 2. Check the calibration value for the pressure, empty, and exit sensors. If any sensor is out of its calibration limits, clean all of the sensors and attempt to do a transaction. 3. If error code reoccurs, replace the note feeder module.
327
9640, RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840
Shutter failure
This error code is generated if the system fails to operate the shutter when required. 1. Reset the system. If the response to the reset command indicates successful execution, operation and be resumed. 2. If the problem persists, it may be necessary to replace the external shutter assembly, the shutter sensor board (if present), shutter cable, or the CMC module.
329
9640, 9650, 9750, RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
Notes in delivery throat
An attempt to feed or dispense documents has been made when there is a note in the note transport throat. 1. Remove any documents blocking the throat opening. Make sure the diverter is not jammed. Inspect the note transport for damage and verify that all connectors are plugged into their respective receptacles. 2. Use the reject channel error code function to verify the operation of the sensors on the note transport module. Clean the sensors in the note transport a needed. 3. Restart the cash dispenser. Reset the error code. Perform the test dispense function several times (two or three). Complete a live transaction. If the error does not show again put the cash dispenser into service. 4. If the error code returns, and a jam is not the cause, replace the note transport module.
330
9640, 9650, 9750, RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
Communication timeout
This error is reported when the transmission of each one of the characters in the command string is not completed within the time restriction imposed by the electrical interface. 1. Inspect all cables for damage. Verify that the both ends of each cable are securely connected to its termination points. This problem may be caused by incompatibilities between terminal software and dispensing mechanism software. 2. Check with Triton Systems Technical Support for known software incompatibilities.
332
9640, 9650, 9750, RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
Cassettes may have This error code is generated when a movement command is sent before read cassette been changed ID command after the cassettes, including the reject vault are removed. This is error code will set an out of service condition. 1. Verify that each cassette is placed in a feed channel and the cassettes are locked. Complete the test receipt printer function to determine which if any of the cassettes are not responding. If a cassette is not responding it may be necessary to inject a new identity into the cassette by completing the inject new cassette ID command. 2. A defective cassette may also cause this problem.
333
9640, 9650, 9750, RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
Reject vault full
339
9650, 9750, RL5000 (NMD), 9850
Error in throat
This error code is produced when the single reject event counter exceeds 50 reject events or the bundle reject event counter exceeds 250 notes. This error code will cause an out of service condition. 1. Remove all documents from the reject vault. To clear the error code, the reject vault must be removed and inserted with the power on. This will reset the reject event counters. This error code is reported by the dispensing mechanism when a document is jammed in the throat sensor during a live dispenses or when a reset is performed. 1. Make sure all cables between the note transport and the other units are undamaged and securely seated at their termination point. 2. Check the operation of all sensors in the note transport module. Inspect the diverter area to make sure that it is not blocked and that it moves freely. Make sure that the access panels before and after the diverter are closed and secured in place. Remove any documents from the tote transport. 3. Restart the cash dispenser. Reset the error code. Perform a live transaction. If the cash dispenser operates normally put it back in service. 4. If the error code persists, replace the note transport module.
343
8100, 9100, 9640, 9650, 9705, 9750, RL5000 Sensor error or (TDM), RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850 sensor covered
348
9640, 9650, 9750, RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
Dispenser internal error.
With an NMD, this error is produced when a sensor in note transport module is not working correctly during an internal self-test preceding the movement commands. 1. Inspect all cables for damage. Make sure that all cables are securely fastened to their termination points. 2. Open the access panels on the note transport and remove any documents that may be in the transport path. Access the error code command to determine if any sensors in the reject channel are dirty of defective. Clean the dirty sensor, or replace the note transport as needed. 3. Restart the cash dispenser. Reset the error. Perform a live transaction. If the cash dispenser operates normally put it in service. 4. If the problem persists, replace the note transport module. With a TDM dispenser, this error is produced when a Width Sensor can not be calibrated. 1. Run a dispenser status report (Click Counts) and reference the Width Sensor X Voltage Y (Note X= sensor 0, 1 or 2 in Ys feed channel. Y = the feed channel. A= feed channel 1, B = feed channel 2. C= feed channel 3 and D = feed channel 4). Cross reference the click counter section in your service manual to determine what click 2 A clean calibrated sensor will read just below 5 000vdc A sensor that is hard to ca This error code is reported when an internal error occurs in the dispenser. The most likely cause is internal communication problems within the dispenser. 1. Inspect all cables for possible damage. Ensure that each cable is securely fastened to its termination point. 2. Restart the cash dispenser. Reset the error. If the response to the RESET command indicates a successful execution, put the cash dispenser back in service. 3. If the error code is reported again, it may be necessary to replace the CMC or one of the note feeder controllers.
349
9640, 9650, 9750, RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
Cassette lock faulty This error code is generated when the LIFTS UP command fails to open a note cassette to the operating position. 1. Verify that the currency is properly installed in the cassette. If necessary, reload the currency in the cassette. 2. If the problem remains after reloading the cassette, replace the cassette, the denomination extension, or the note feeder controller associated with the cassette causing the problem.
350
9640, 9650, 9750, RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
Jam in note stacker This status may be generated: A) When a note is jammed in the note stacker, B) When the note stacker is not turning, C) Or when the bundle carriage unit cannot move. 1. Inspect for and clear any jammed notes that are found in the note stacker. Clean all sensors as needed. 2. Reset the error. If the error persists, it may be necessary to replace the note stacker or the CMC module. Module needs service This error code is generated by the dispensing mechanism when the calibration value for at least one of the sensors in any of the note feeders has exceeded the upper limits of its calibration range. 1. Use the diagnostic functions or NMD test software to determine if a note feeder has a faulty or dirty sensor. 2. Remove each note feeder module from the dispensing mechanism and clean their associated empty, pressure and exit sensors with clean compressed air. 3. Install the note feeders and recheck their operation to determine if the error code has been cleared. If the error code has been cleared, the cash dispenser can be put back in service. If the error code is repeated, replace the note feeder or note feeder controller for the affected feed channel. This error code may indicate a power loss/firmware restart has occurred at the dispenser controller and no information could be retrieved. 1. Restart the cash dispenser. Reset the error. Perform several test dispenses. 2. If the cash dispenser operates normally while performing a test dispense, put it back into service. 3. If the error code recurs, there may be a problem with the CMC module.
351
9640, 9650, 9750, RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
353
9640, 9650, 9750, RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
No message to resend
356
9640, 9650, 9750, RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
Error in note transport
This error code will be generated when the following conditions occur: A) When the note is stuck in the note transport sensor. B) When the note is stuck in between the note transport sensor and the throat. 1. Inspect the note transport sensor for blockage. If the sensor is blocked, remove the blockage. Clean the sensors if needed. 2. Restart the cash dispenser. Reset the error. If the error code continues, replace the note transport module. Otherwise, put the cash dispenser into service. Restart the operating system. Clear terminal error code. This problem may be resolved by replacing the CMC board or by replacing the dispenser mechanism. Restart the operating system. Clear terminal error code. This problem may be resolved by replacing the CMC board or by replacing the dispenser mechanism. Restart the operating system. Clear terminal error code. This problem may be resolved by replacing the CMC board or by replacing the dispenser mechanism. Restart the operating system. Clear terminal error code. This problem may be resolved by replacing the CMC board or by replacing the dispenser mechanism.
357
RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
Dispenser data size error Dispenser device read error Dispenser device record error Dispenser invalid return ID
358
RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
359
RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
360
RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
361
RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
Dispenser sequence Restart the operating system. Clear terminal error code. This problem may be error resolved by replacing the CMC board or by replacing the dispenser mechanism.
362
RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
Dispenser device write error Dispenser device not found Dispenser device offline Dispenser BCC error
Restart the operating system. Clear terminal error code. This problem may be resolved by replacing the CMC board or by replacing the dispenser mechanism. Restart the operating system. Clear terminal error code. This problem may be resolved by replacing the CMC board or by replacing the dispenser mechanism. Restart the operating system. Clear terminal error code. This problem may be resolved by replacing the CMC board or by replacing the dispenser mechanism. Restart the operating system. Clear terminal error code. This problem may be resolved by replacing the CMC board or by replacing the dispenser mechanism. Access management functions and enable cassettes. Make sure that the cassettes are physically removes and inserted into each bin before clearing the error Check the dispenser data and power cable connections. Restart the operating system. Clear terminal error code. This problem may be resolved by replacing the CMC board or by replacing the dispenser mechanism. Requested amount may exceed the dispensers one time limit. Enter a smaller value. If error persists, it may be necessary to replace the dispenser mechanism.
363
RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
364
RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
365
RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
366 367
RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850 RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
Dispenser cassettes disabled Dispenser communication error. Dispenser cannot dispense the request
368
RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
369
RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
Dispenser device reset Check data and power connections to the dispenser device. Clear terminal error code. This problem may be resolved by replacing the CMC board or by replacing the dispenser mechanism. Dispenser - EOT error Check data and power connections to the dispenser device. Clear terminal error code. This problem may be resolved by replacing the CMC board or by replacing the dispenser mechanism. Check data and power connections to the dispenser device. Clear terminal error code. This problem may be resolved by replacing the CMC board or by replacing the dispenser mechanism. Clear terminal error code and retry previous request. This problem may be resolved by replacing the CMC board or by replacing the dispenser mechanism. Access the management functions menu and lock all cassettes. Verify that all cassettes used are in service. Clear terminal error code. This problem may be resolved by replacing the CMC board or by replacing the dispenser mechanism. Clear terminal error code and retry previous request. This problem may be resolved by replacing the CMC board or by replacing the dispenser mechanism. Restart operating system. Clear terminal error code and retry previous request. This problem may be resolved by replacing the CMC board or by replacing the dispenser mechanism.
370
RL5000 (SDD), 9800
371
RL5000 (SDD), 9800
Dispenser com error header-trailer Dispenser item value error Dispenser machine not opened Dispenser rejected check Dispenser invalid request Dispenser multiple device error
372
RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
373 374 375
RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850 RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850 RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
376
RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
377
RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
Dispenser device error Restart operating system. Clear terminal error code and retry previous request. This problem may be resolved by replacing the CMC board or by replacing the dispenser mechanism. Dispenser cassette low
378 379 RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
Dispenser unknown error code Dispenser setup incomplete Dispenser cassette invalid
380 381
RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850 RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
Restart operating system. Clear terminal error code and retry previous request. This problem may be resolved by replacing the CMC board or by replacing the dispenser mechanism. Check and verify that all dispenser configuration have been entered into the terminal parameters. See error code 321
382
8100, 9100, 9640, 9650, 9750, RL5000 (TDM), RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
Dispenser cassettes disabled (ALL)
The error indicates that all cassettes were taken out of service. Cassettes are take out of service for two reasons: A) Feed failure or empty. See Error Code 101, 302 or 306 B) Excessive rejects. See Error Code 48 1. Once the cause has been resolved, place desired cassettes into service and reset the error. All cassettes have reached low cash level. Reload cassettes. Clear terminal error code. All cassettes report no notes. Replenish cassettes. Clear terminal error code. Verify that the dispenser mechanism has data and power cable connected. Verify power is applied to the dispenser The hoppers are not detected. Check the computer area network connectors in the dispenser. Restart operating system. Clear terminal error code. If error persists, replace the dispenser mechanism.
383 384 385
RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850 RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850 RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
Dispense cassettes low (ALL) Dispenser cassettes empty (ALL) Dispenser offline, no reject vault and no hoppers Dispenser offline - no hoppers
386
RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
387
RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
Dispenser offline - error- Dispenser failed to identify the dispenser type installed. validating configuration 1. Verify all connectors to the dispenser mechanism. 2. Restart operating system. Clear terminal error code. 3. If error persists, replace the dispenser mechanism or the CMC of an NMD dispenser Dispenser offline - NMD Verify that the Reject Vault and one cassette are present in the dispenser mechanism. Clear terminal require Reject Vault and error code. If error persists, replace the dispenser mechanism at least one cassette Dispenser offline. Detected offline error check op state Dispenser offline storing configuration Dispenser sensor failure 2 Error in last dispense Restart the operating system. Verify the error code lights on the dispenser are operating in proper sequence. Use the NMD test software (available to Triton Certified Service Technicians) and verify t operational error code of the dispenser. Restart the operating system. Verify the error code lights on the dispenser are operating in proper sequence. Use the NMD test software (avail able to Triton Certified Service Technicians) and verify the operational error code of the dispenser. Access the management function diagnostics menus to verify the operational error code of dispenser mechanism sensors. Clean sensors as needed. Replace dispenser components or dispenser if the error persists. Check operational error code of dispenser. This problem may be resolved by replacing the CMC board or by replacing the dispenser mechanism.
388
RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
389
RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
390
RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
391
RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
392
RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
393 394 395 396
RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850 RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850 RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850 RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9840, 9850
Error in double detect 2 Purge failed upon power-up Multiple cassette of the NMD dispenser allows for only one of each cassette ID to be installed. Verify each cassette ID. same type Replace cassette or Inject New Cassette ID. Dispenser offline found no reject bin Verify all SPED connections. Restart the operating system. Clear any errors conditions. Inspect the battery for a voltage reading of greater than 2.8 VDC. Replace SPED battery is below 2.8 VDC. Replace SPED module if error persists. Verify all SPED connections. Restart the operating system. Clear any errors conditions. Inspect the battery for a voltage reading of greater than 2.8 VDC. Replace SPED battery is below 2.8 VDC. Replace SPED module if error persists.
500
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), SPED Read Error FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), SPED invalid return record FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850
501
502
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), SPED read type error FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850
Verify all SPED connections. Restart the operating system. Clear any errors conditions. Inspect the battery for a voltage reading of greater than 2.8 VDC. Replace SPED battery is below 2.8 VDC. Replace SPED module if error persists.
503
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), SPED invalid command Verify all SPED connections. Restart the operating system. Clear any errors FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 conditions. Inspect the battery for a voltage reading of greater than 2.8 VDC. Replace SPED battery is below 2.8 VDC. Replace SPED module if error persists. RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), SPED invalid return ID Verify all SPED connections. Restart the operating system. Clear any errors FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 conditions. Inspect the battery for a voltage reading of greater than 2.8 VDC. Replace SPED battery is below 2.8 VDC. Replace SPED module if error persists. RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), SPED device busy FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 Verify all SPED connections. Restart the operating system. Clear any errors conditions. Inspect the battery for a voltage reading of greater than 2.8 VDC. Replace SPED battery is below 2.8 VDC. Replace SPED module if error persists. Verify all SPED connections. Restart the operating system. Clear any errors conditions. Inspect the battery for a voltage reading of greater than 2.8 VDC. Replace SPED battery is below 2.8 VDC. Replace SPED module if error persists. Verify all SPED connections. Restart the operating system. Clear any errors conditions. Inspect the battery for a voltage reading of greater than 2.8 VDC. Replace SPED battery is below 2.8 VDC. Replace SPED module if error persists. Verify all SPED connections. Restart the operating system. Clear any errors conditions. Inspect the battery for a voltage reading of greater than 2.8 VDC. Replace SPED battery is below 2.8 VDC. Replace SPED module if error persists. Verify all SPED connections. Restart the operating system. Clear any errors conditions. Inspect the battery for a voltage reading of greater than 2.8 VDC. Replace SPED battery is below 2.8 VDC. Replace SPED module if error persists.
504
505
506
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850
SPED invalid request
507
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), SPED sequence error FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850
508
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), SPED LRC error FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850
509
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), SPED no data FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850
510
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), SPED invalid message Verify all SPED connections. Restart the operating system. Clear any errors ID conditions. Inspect the battery for a voltage reading of greater than 2.8 VDC. FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 Replace SPED battery is below 2.8 VDC. Replace SPED module if error persists. RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), SPED Data overflow FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 Verify all SPED connections. Restart the operating system. Clear any errors conditions. Inspect the battery for a voltage reading of greater than 2.8 VDC. Replace SPED battery is below 2.8 VDC. Replace SPED module if error persists. Verify all SPED connections. Restart the operating system. Clear any errors conditions. Inspect the battery for a voltage reading of greater than 2.8 VDC. Replace SPED battery is below 2.8 VDC. Replace SPED module if error persists. Verify all SPED connections. Restart the operating system. Clear any errors conditions. Inspect the battery for a voltage reading of greater than 2.8 VDC. Replace SPED battery is below 2.8 VDC. Replace SPED module if error persists. Verify all SPED connections. Restart the operating system. Clear any errors conditions. Inspect the battery for a voltage reading of greater than 2.8 VDC. Replace SPED battery is below 2.8 VDC. Replace SPED module if error persists.
511
512
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), SPED device idle FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850
513
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), SPED device offline FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850
514
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), SPED device bit stuck FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850
515
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), SPED device attention Verify all SPED connections. Restart the operating system. Clear any errors stuck conditions. Inspect the battery for a voltage reading of greater than 2.8 VDC. FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 Replace SPED battery is below 2.8 VDC. Replace SPED module if error persists.
516
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), SPED device no attention FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850
Verify all SPED connections. Restart the operating system. Clear any errors conditions. Inspect the battery for a voltage reading of greater than 2.8 VDC. Replace SPED battery is below 2.8 VDC. Replace SPED module if error persists. Verify all SPED connections. Restart the operating system. Clear any errors conditions. Inspect the battery for a voltage reading of greater than 2.8 VDC. Replace SPED battery is below 2.8 VDC. Replace SPED module if error persists. Verify all SPED connections. Restart the operating system. Clear any errors conditions. Inspect the battery for a voltage reading of greater than 2.8 VDC. Replace SPED battery is below 2.8 VDC. Replace SPED module if error persists.
517
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), SPED device timeout FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850
518
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), SPED command sequence error FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850
519
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), SPED invalid command Verify all SPED connections. Restart the operating system. Clear any errors data conditions. Inspect the battery for a voltage reading of greater than 2.8 VDC. FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 Replace SPED battery is below 2.8 VDC. Replace SPED module if error persists. RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), SPED device reset FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 Verify all SPED connections. Restart the operating system. Clear any errors conditions. Inspect the battery for a voltage reading of greater than 2.8 VDC. Replace SPED battery is below 2.8 VDC. Replace SPED module if error persists. Verify all SPED connections. Restart the operating system. Clear any errors conditions. Inspect the battery for a voltage reading of greater than 2.8 VDC. Replace SPED battery is below 2.8 VDC. Replace SPED module if error persists. Restart operating system. If the problem persists, it may be necessary to replace the ATM main board assembly on Xscale systems, or the PC assembly or hard drive on the xp or 9800 systems.. Restart operating system. If the problem persists, it may be necessary to replace the ATM main board assembly on Xscale systems, or the PC assembly or hard drive on the xp or 9800 systems.. Restart operating system. If the problem persists, it may be necessary to replace the ATM main board assembly on Xscale systems, or the PC assembly or hard drive on the xp or 9800 systems.. Restart operating system. If the problem persists, it may be necessary to replace the ATM main board assembly on Xscale systems, or the PC assembly or hard drive on the xp or 9800 systems.. Restart operating system. If the problem persists, it may be necessary to replace the ATM main board assembly on Xscale systems, or the PC assembly or hard drive on the xp or 9800 systems.. Restart operating system. If the problem persists, it may be necessary to replace the ATM main board assembly on Xscale systems, or the PC assembly or hard drive on the xp or 9800 systems.. Restart operating system. If the problem persists, it may be necessary to replace the ATM main board assembly on Xscale systems, or the PC assembly or hard drive on the xp or 9800 systems.. Restart operating system. If the problem persists, it may be necessary to replace the ATM main board assembly on Xscale systems, or the PC assembly or hard drive on the xp or 9800 systems.. Restart operating system. If the problem persists, it may be necessary to replace the ATM main board assembly on Xscale systems, or the PC assembly or hard drive on the xp or 9800 systems.. Restart operating system. If the problem persists, it may be necessary to replace the ATM main board assembly on Xscale systems, or the PC assembly or hard drive on the xp or 9800 systems..
520
521
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), SPED clear key FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850
522
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), EJ error FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), EJ data size error FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), EJ bad command FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), EJ invalid ID FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), EJ device busy FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), EJ invalid request FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), EJ sequence error FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), EJ device offline FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), EJ EXT error FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), EJ SOH error FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), EJ STX error FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), EJ BCC error FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), EJ device reset FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850
Restart operating system. I the problem persists, it may be necessary to replace the ATM main board assembly on Xscale systems, or the PC assembly or hard drive on the xp or 9800 systems.. Restart operating system. If the problem persists, it may be necessary to replace the ATM main board assembly on Xscale systems, or the PC assembly or hard drive on the xp or 9800 systems..
533
534
535
Restart operating system. If the problem persists, it may be necessary to replace the ATM main board assembly on Xscale systems, or the PC assembly or hard drive on the xp or 9800 systems.. RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), Card Reader - Data size Inspect card reader cabling. Inspect card reader for foreign objects. Clean the card error FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 reader with an approved cleaning device. Clear the terminal error code. Reboot the ATM. If error persists, replace the card reader. RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), Card Reader - Device read error FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 Inspect card reader cabling. Inspect card reader for foreign objects. Clean the card reader with an approved cleaning device. Clear the terminal error code. Reboot the ATM. If error persists, replace the card reader. Inspect card reader cabling. Inspect card reader for foreign objects. Clean the card reader with an approved cleaning device. Clear the terminal error code. Reboot the ATM. If error persists, replace the card reader.
536
537
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), Card Reader - Invalid Record FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850
538
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), Card Reader - Reader Inspect card reader cabling. Inspect card reader for foreign objects. Clean the card type error reader with an approved cleaning device. Clear the terminal error code. Reboot the FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 ATM. If error persists, replace the card reader. RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), Card Reader - Invalid track FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 Inspect card reader cabling. Inspect card reader for foreign objects. Clean the card reader with an approved cleaning device. Clear the terminal error code. Reboot the ATM. If error persists, replace the card reader. Inspect card reader cabling. Inspect card reader for foreign objects. Clean the card reader with an approved cleaning device. Clear the terminal error code. Reboot the ATM. If error persists, replace the card reader. Inspect card reader cabling. Inspect card reader for foreign objects. Clean the card reader with an approved cleaning device. Clear the terminal error code. Reboot the ATM. If error persists, replace the card reader. Inspect card reader cabling. Inspect card reader for foreign objects. Clean the card reader with an approved cleaning device. Clear the terminal error code. Reboot the ATM. If error persists, replace the card reader. Inspect card reader cabling. Inspect card reader for foreign objects. Clean the card reader with an approved cleaning device. Clear the terminal error code. Reboot the ATM. If error persists, replace the card reader. Inspect card reader cabling. Inspect card reader for foreign objects. Clean the card reader with an approved cleaning device. Clear the terminal error code. Reboot the ATM. If error persists, replace the card reader. Inspect card reader cabling. Inspect card reader for foreign objects. Clean the card reader with an approved cleaning device. Clear the terminal error code. Reboot the ATM. If error persists, replace the card reader.
539
540
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), Card Reader - Invalid message FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850
541
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), Card Reader - Com error FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850
542
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), Card Reader - Device busy FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850
543
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), Card Reader Sequence error FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850
544
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), Card Reader - Invalid request FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850
545
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), Card Reader - LRC error FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850
546
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), Card Reader - No data Inspect card reader cabling. Inspect card reader for foreign objects. Clean the card FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 reader with an approved cleaning device. Clear the terminal error code. Reboot the ATM. If error persists, replace the card reader. RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), Card Reader - Start sentinel not found FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 Inspect card reader cabling. Inspect card reader for foreign objects. Clean the card reader with an approved cleaning device. Clear the terminal error code. Reboot the ATM. If error persists, replace the card reader. Inspect card reader cabling. Inspect card reader for foreign objects. Clean the card reader with an approved cleaning device. Clear the terminal error code. Reboot the ATM. If error persists, replace the card reader. Inspect card reader cabling. Inspect card reader for foreign objects. Clean the card reader with an approved cleaning device. Clear the terminal error code. Reboot the ATM. If error persists, replace the card reader.
547
548
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), Card Reader - End sentinel not found FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850
549
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), Card Reader - Parity error FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850
550
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), Card Reader - Card not Inspect card reader cabling. Inspect card reader for foreign objects. Clean the card removed reader with an approved cleaning device. Clear the terminal error code. Reboot the FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 ATM. If error persists, replace the card reader. RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), Card Reader - Card removed to slow FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 Inspect card reader cabling. Inspect card reader for foreign objects. Clean the card reader with an approved cleaning device. Clear the terminal error code. Reboot the ATM. If error persists, replace the card reader.
551
552
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), Card Reader - Device Inspect card reader cabling. Inspect card reader for foreign objects. Clean the card received invalid request reader with an approved cleaning device. Clear the terminal error code. Reboot the FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 ATM. If error persists, replace the card reader. RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), Card Reader - device offline FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 Inspect card reader cabling. Inspect card reader for foreign objects. Clean the card reader with an approved cleaning device. Clear the terminal error code. Reboot the ATM. If error persists, replace the card reader. Inspect card reader cabling. Inspect card reader for foreign objects. Clean the card reader with an approved cleaning device. Clear the terminal error code. Reboot the ATM. If error persists, replace the card reader.
553
554
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), Card Reader - device reset FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850
555
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), Card Reader - System Inspect card reader cabling. Inspect card reader for foreign objects. Clean the card timeout reader with an approved cleaning device. Clear the terminal error code. Reboot the FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 ATM. If error persists, replace the card reader. RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), System timeout FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), System device reset FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 An operating system timeout has occurred. Check operation of the power supply. Restart ATM. Clear the error. If error persists, it may be necessary to reload the operating system software or replace the ATM main board assembly. An operating system timeout has occurred. Check operation of the power supply. Restart ATM. Clear the error. If error persists, it may be necessary to reload the operating system software or replace the ATM main board assembly. An operating system timeout has occurred. Check operation of the power supply. Restart ATM. Clear the error. If error persists, it may be necessary to reload the operating system software or replace the ATM main board assembly. An operating system timeout has occurred. Check operation of the power supply. Restart ATM. Clear the error. If error persists, it may be necessary to reload the operating system software or replace the ATM main board assembly.
556
557
558
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), System sync error FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850
559
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), System error FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850
560
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), Unknown device error FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850
An operating system timeout has occurred. Check operation of the power supply. Restart ATM. Clear the error. If error persists, it may be necessary to reload the operating system software or replace the ATM main board assembly.
561 562
Software error RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), SPED error FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), Low Memory FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), Unable to access external memory device FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), Cabinet door open FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), Vault door open FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9800, 9840, 9850 RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9800, 9840, 9850 Security module not found Security module com failed
Inspect cable from Main Board assembly to the SPED module for damage. Make sure that cable is connected at both ends. Verify that the DC operating voltages are correct. Restart ATM. Clear the error. If error persists, replace the SPED module.
563
564
565
Close the control panel door. Reset error code. If error persists, verify the operation of cabinet door switch. Replace as needed. Close vault door. Reset error code. If error persists, check the operation of the vault door switch. Replace as needed See Error Code 568 This error indicates that the communications from the security module to the main board is not operational. 1. Inspect cable from security module to the docking board for damage. Make sure that the cable is connected at both ends. 2. Restart ATM. Clear the error. If error persists, suspect the security module, cable from the securi module to the docking board, the docking board and the main board.
566
567 568
569
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9800, 9840, Security module This error indicates that the communications from the security module to the dispenser is not 9850 attached dev com failed operational. 1. Inspect cable from security module to the dispenser for damage. Make sure that the cable is connected at both ends. 2. Inspect the dispenser (Follow steps for Error Code 130). 3. Restart ATM. Clear the error. If error persists, suspect the security module, cable from the securi module to the dispenser, the dispenser, power to the dispenser. RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, 9800, 9840, Security module dev 9850 port setup RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), Invalid default transaction FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), SPED key from pad cmd aborted by user FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 Inspect cable from main board assembly to the security module for damage. Make sure that the cable is connected at both ends. Restart ATM. Clear the error. If error persists, replace the security module. TBD
570
571
572
Inspect cable from docking board assembly to the SPED module for damage. Make sure that the cable is connected at both ends. Restart ATM. Clear the error. If error persists, it may be necessary to replace the main board, the docking board, the SPED module or related cabling. Inspect cable from docking board assembly to the SPED module for damage. Make sure that the cable is connected at both ends. Restart ATM. Clear the error. If error persists, it may be necessary to replace the main board, the docking board, the SPED module or related cabling. To be determined
573
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), SPED keys from pad cmd verify failed FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850
574
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), SNA comms error FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850
575
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), Timeout waiting to send Inspect the serial communication cables from the main board assembly to the dispenser for damage. command to dispenser Make sure that each end of the cable is connected securely. Replace the cable if it appear damaged. FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 Check the power supply for the proper DC operating voltages and that they are applied to the dispenser mechanism. Possible defective components include main board assembly, the docking board, the serial communications cables, the DC power cables, the power supply, and the dispenser mechanism. Inspect the serial communication cables from the main board assembly to the dispenser for damage. RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), Timeout waiting to receive response from Make sure that each end of the cable is connected securely. Replace the cable if it appear damaged. FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 Check the power supply for the proper DC operating voltages and that they are applied to the dispenser dispenser mechanism. Possible defective components include main board assembly, the docking board, the serial communications cables, the DC power cables, the power supply, and the dispenser mechanism. RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), Card reader disabled FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), Card reader present timeout FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 Inspect card reader cable. Inspect the card reader for foreign objects. Replace the cable or clean the card reader as needed. Clear the error. Restart the ATM. If the error persists, replace the card reader. Inspect card reader cable. Inspect the card reader for foreign objects. Replace the cable or clean the card reader as needed. Clear the error. Restart the ATM. If the error persists, replace the card reader.
576
577
578
579
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), SPED - Enable keypad Inspect cable from docking assembly to the SPED Module for damage. Make sure that the cable is command failed connected at both ends. Verify that the DC operating voltages are correct. Restart ATM. Clear the FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 error. If error persists, replace the SPED module. RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), SPED - Disable keypad Inspect cable from docking assembly to the SPED Module for damage. Make sure that command failed the cable is connected at both ends. Verify that the DC operating voltages are FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 correct. Restart ATM. Clear the error. If error persists, replace the SPED module. Inspect cable from docking assembly to the SPED Module for damage. Make sure that RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), SPED - Enable key from pad module failed the cable is connected at both ends. Verify that the DC operating voltages are FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 correct. Restart ATM. Clear the error. If error persists, replace the SPED module. RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), SPED - Disable key from pad module FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 Inspect cable from docking assembly to the SPED Module for damage. Make sure that the cable is connected at both ends. Verify that the DC operating voltages are correct. Restart ATM. Clear the error. If error persists, replace the SPED module. Inspect cable from docking assembly to the SPED Module for damage. Make sure that the cable is connected at both ends. Verify that the DC operating voltages are correct. Restart ATM. Clear the error. If error persists, replace the SPED module. Inspect cable from docking assembly to the SPED Module for damage. Make sure that the cable is connected at both ends. Verify that the DC operating voltages are correct. Restart ATM. Clear the error. If error persists, replace the SPED module.
580
581
582
583
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), SPED - Enable PIN entry mode failed FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850
584
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), SPED - Disable PIN entry mode failed FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850
585
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), SPED - Enable JETCO Inspect cable from docking assembly to the SPED Module for damage. Make sure that PIN entry mode failed the cable is connected at both ends. Verify that the DC operating voltages are FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 correct. Restart ATM. Clear the error. If error persists, replace the SPED module. RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), SPED - Enable JETCO Inspect cable from docking assembly to the SPED Module for damage. Make sure that PIN entry mode failed the cable is connected at both ends. Verify that the DC operating voltages are FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 correct. Restart ATM. Clear the error. If error persists, replace the SPED module. NMD 50 required Cassette in TOP hopper
586
587
588
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), ERR PRESENTER OFFLINE FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850
Verify that a cable from the docking board to the presenter controller board is securely connected at both ends. If the cable appears undamaged, and it is securely connected at the docking board and t presenter controller board, replace the presenter assembly. If replacing the presenter does not clear the error, other possible causes of this problem may be the main board assembly or the docking board. Inspect the gears assembly on the presenter for possible damage. Replace the presenter if gear damage is apparent. Open printer and inspect the presenter paper path for jammed paper. Remove any jammed paper or other debris. Open printer and inspect the presenter paper path for jammed paper. Remove any jammed paper or other debris. Restart the cash dispenser. If the error persist, replace the presenter module. Open the printer and verify that the paper is not jamming in the printer between the printer output and the input to the cutter. Clear all debris from the printer path. Restart the ATM. If the paper continues to jam, it may be necessary to replace the cutter or printer. If replacing the printer of cutter does not clear the error replace the presenter module. Inspect cable from main board assembly to the SPED module for damage. Make sure that the cable connected at both ends. Verify that the DC operating voltages are correct. Restart ATM. Clear the error. If error persists, replace the SPED module. Inspect cable from main board assembly to the SPED module for damage. Make sure that the cable connected at both ends. Verify that the DC operating voltages are correct. Restart ATM. Clear the error. If error persists, replace the SPED module. Inspect cable from main board assembly to the SPED module for damage. Make sure that the cable connected at both ends. Verify that the DC operating voltages are correct. Restart ATM. Clear the error. If error persists, replace the SPED module.
589
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), ERR PRESENTER MOTOR STALLED FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), ERR PRESENTER EXIT JAM FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), ERR PRESENTER PAPER NOT FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 DETECTED
590
591
592
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), ERR SPED DEVICE REPORTED FAILED FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), ERR SPED IN USE FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), ERR SPED DEVICE REPORTED COMM FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 ERROR
593
594
595
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), ERR SPED RETURNE Inspect cable from main board assembly to the SPED module for damage. Make sure that the cable INVALID AMOUNT OF connected at both ends. Verify that the DC operating voltages are correct. Restart ATM. Clear the FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 DATA error. If error persists, replace the SPED module. RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), ERR SPED INVALID SPED TYPE FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), ERR SPED INVALID SPED COMMS FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 PROTOCOL Inspect cable from main board assembly to the SPED module for damage. Make sure that the cable connected at both ends. Verify that the DC operating voltages are correct. Restart ATM. Clear the error. If error persists, replace the SPED module. Inspect cable from main board assembly to the SPED module for damage. Make sure that the cable connected at both ends. Verify that the DC operating voltages are correct. Restart ATM. Clear the error. If error persists, replace the SPED module.
596
597
598
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), ERR_SPED_INVALID_ Inspect cable from main board assembly to the SPED module for damage. Make sure that the cable DEVICE_CLASS connected at both ends. Verify that the DC operating voltages are correct. Restart ATM. Clear the FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 error. If error persists, replace the SPED module. RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), ERR SPED REPORTED FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 UNRECOGNIZED COMMAND RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), ERR SPED REPORTED BLOCK FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 DOES NOT EXIST RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), ERR SPED REPORTED INVALID FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 ENCRYPT MODE RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), ERR SPED REPORTED FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 UNSUPPORTED CLEAR OPTION Inspect cable from main board assembly to the SPED module for damage. Make sure that the cable is connected at both ends. Verify that the DC operating voltages are correct. Restart ATM. Clear the error. If error persists, replace the SPED module. Inspect cable from main board assembly to the SPED module for damage. Make sure that the cable connected at both ends. Verify that the DC operating voltages are correct. Restart ATM. Clear the error. If error persists, replace the SPED module. Inspect cable from main board assembly to the SPED module for damage. Make sure that the cable is connected at both ends. Verify that the DC operating voltages are correct. Restart ATM. Clear the error. If error persists, replace the SPED module. Inspect cable from main board assembly to the SPED module for damage. Make sure that the cable is connected at both ends. Verify that the DC operating voltages are correct. Restart ATM. Clear the error. If error persists, replace the SPED module.
599
600
601
602
603
Inspect cable from main board assembly to the SPED module for damage. Make sure RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), ERR SPED REPORTED TAMPER that the cable is connected at both ends. Verify that the DC operating voltages are FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 PRESENT correct. Restart ATM. Clear the error. If error persists, replace the SPED module. RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), ERR SPED REPORTED INVALID FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 KEY INDEX Inspect cable from main board assembly to the SPED module for damage. Make sure that the cable is connected at both ends. Verify that the DC operating voltages are correct. Restart ATM. Clear the error. If error persists, replace the SPED module.
604
605
Inspect cable from main board assembly to the SPED module for damage. Make sure RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), ERR SPED REPORTED PARENT that the cable is connected at both ends. Verify that the DC operating voltages are FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 KEY NOT LOADED correct. Restart ATM. Clear the error. If error persists, replace the SPED module. RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), ERR SPED REPORTED WRONG FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 DATA LENGTH RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), ERR SPED REPORTED PIN FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 RETRY TOO SOON Inspect cable from main board assembly to the SPED module for damage. Make sure that the cable is connected at both ends. Verify that the DC operating voltages are correct. Restart ATM. Clear the error. If error persists, replace the SPED module. Inspect cable from main board assembly to the SPED module for damage. Make sure that the cable is connected at both ends. Verify that the DC operating voltages are correct. Restart ATM. Clear the error. If error persists, replace the SPED module.
606
607
608
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), ERR SPED SELFTEST Inspect cable from main board assembly to the SPED module for damage. Make sure CRC FAILED that the cable is connected at both ends. Verify that the DC operating voltages are FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 correct. Restart ATM. Clear the error. If error persists, replace the SPED module. RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), ERR SPED SELFTEST Inspect cable from main board assembly to the SPED module for damage. Make sure CRYPTOGRAPHIC that the cable is connected at both ends. Verify that the DC operating voltages are FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 ERROR correct. Restart ATM. Clear the error. If error persists, replace the SPED module. RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), ERR SPED SELFTEST Inspect cable from main board assembly to the SPED module for damage. Make sure BATTERY LOW that the cable is connected at both ends. Verify that the DC operating voltages are FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 STATUS correct. Restart ATM. Clear the error. If error persists, replace the SPED module. RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), ERR SPED SELFTEST Inspect cable from main board assembly to the SPED module for damage. Make sure SERIAL NUMBER that the cable is connected at both ends. Verify that the DC operating voltages are FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 ERROR correct. Restart ATM. Clear the error. If error persists, replace the SPED module. RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), ERR SPED TAMPER STATUS COLD FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 Verify all SPED connections. Restart the operating system. Clear any errors conditions. Inspect the battery for a voltage reading of greater than 2.8 VDC. Replace SPED battery is below 2.8 VDC. Replace SPED module if error persists. Inspect cable from main board assembly to the SPED module for damage. Make sure that the cable is connected at both ends. Verify that the DC operating voltages are correct. Restart ATM. Clear the error. If error persists, replace the SPED module.
609
610
611
612
613
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), ERR SPED TAMPER STATUS FRONT FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850
614
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), ERR_SPED_TAMPER Inspect cable from main board assembly to the SPED module for damage. Make sure _STATUS_BACK that the cable is connected at both ends. Verify that the DC operating voltages are FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 correct. Restart ATM. Clear the error. If error persists, replace the SPED module. RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), ERR SPED TAMPER STATUS GRID FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 Inspect cable from main board assembly to the SPED module for damage. Make sure that the cable is connected at both ends. Verify that the DC operating voltages are correct. Restart ATM. Clear the error. If error persists, replace the SPED module.
615
616
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), ERR SPED TAMPER STATUS VOLTAGE FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850
Inspect cable from main board assembly to the SPED module for damage. Make sure that the cable is connected at both ends. Verify that the DC operating voltages are correct. Restart ATM. Clear the error. If error persists, replace the SPED module. Inspect cable from main board assembly to the SPED module for damage. Make sure that the cable is connected at both ends. Verify that the DC operating voltages are correct. Restart ATM. Clear the error. If error persists, replace the SPED module. Inspect cable from main board assembly to the SPED module for damage. Make sure that the cable is connected at both ends. Verify that the DC operating voltages are correct. Restart ATM. Clear the error. If error persists, replace the SPED module.
617
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), ERR SPED SERIAL NUMBER CHANGE FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850
618
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), SPED serial number change FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850
619
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), NMD 100 shutter failed Inspect cable from Dispenser CMC assembly to the Shutter Assembly for damage. after reset Make sure that the cable is connected at both ends. Verify that the DC operating FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 voltages are correct. Restart ATM. Clear the error. If the Error persists consider replacing the cable between the Dispenser CMC Board and The Shutter Assembly, the Shutter Assembly PCB, the Shutter Assembly or the Dispenser CMC Assembly. RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM) RL5000 (NMD), NMD 100 shutter OK after reset FT5000, RT2000, 9800, 9840, 9850 To be determined
620
Modem Communication Status Codes

Status Code 1 Description 8100, 9100, 9110, 9600, 9610, 9615, 9640, 9650, 9700, 9710, 9705, 9750, MAKO, SuperScrip Time-out Possible Cause: 1. Request has been sent. Time-out waiting for response or carrier was dropped. No characters were received. Time-out is typically 60 seconds. 2. Request has been sent. Time-out waiting for response or carrier was dropped. At least one character was received (ETX was never received). Time-out is typically 60 seconds. 3. EOT was received as first character after sending a NAK due to a bad response message. Result: No money is dispensed screen and receipt display system unavailable BCD NO-ANSWER Possible Cause: Possible may be a processor or telephone hardware problem. Results: No money is dispensed, screen and receipt display system unavailable ERROR IN MODEM Possible Cause: DATA Unexpected data received from processor in response to message. Results: No money is dispensed, screen and receipt display system unavailable Can be a symptom of a bad modem or a modem not properly seated. Connect 1200 Baud Possible Cause: then lost carrier or 1. Telephone line is not dedicated. (ATM is being used with another devices connection. Host hung connected to the line. up. 2. Telephone line is noisy and in general has poor quality characteristics. 3. Baud rate set to high for telephone line conditions. Change baud rate settings. 4. Modem may be defective. Results: No money is dispensed, screen and receipt display system unavailable.
8100, 9100, 9110, 9600, 9610, 9615, 9640, 9650, 9700, 9710, 9705, 9750, MAKO, SuperScrip 8100, 9100, 9110, 9600, 9610, 9615, 9640, 9650, 9700, 9710, 9705, 9750, MAKO, SuperScrip
8100, 9100, 9110, 9600, 9610, 9615, 9640, 9650, 9700, 9710, 9705, 9750, MAKO, SuperScrip
8100, 9100, 9110, 9600, 9610, 9615, 9640, 9650, 9700, 9710, 9705, 9750, MAKO, SuperScrip
BGD NO DIAL TONE
8100, 9100, 9110, 9600, 9610, 9615, 9640, 9650, 9700, 9710, 9705, 9750, MAKO, SuperScrip 8100, 9100, 9650, 9700, SuperScrip 8100, 9100, 9650, 9700, SuperScrip 9110, 9600, 9610, 9615, 9640, 9710, 9705, 9750, MAKO, 9110, 9600, 9610, 9615, 9640, 9710, 9705, 9750, MAKO,
BGD Busy
Possible Cause: 1. Used up all redial attempts and got No Dial Tone for each attempt. 2. Check local telephone line for proper operation. 3. Telephone hardware problems. Results: No money is dispensed, screen and receipt display system unavailable. Possible Cause: 1. Dialed out, reached a busy signal 2. If problem persist, verify the phone number, try calling the number with a hand set to verify, work with the processor to rectify.
10
BGD Logon
11
No connect
Possible Cause: 1. Used up all redial attempt and got Busy Signal for each attempt or No Dial Tone for each attempt. 2. Got connected and never received ENQ within time-out period (14 Seconds). Results: No money is dispensed, screen and receipt display system unavailable. Possible Cause: Communication was normal, but response header does not match request. Results: No money is dispensed, screen and receipt display system unavailable. Possible Cause: 1. EOT was received as first character after the first request message was sent. 2. If EOT is received on subsequent attempts, then Error Code 1 is reported Results: No money is dispensed, screen and receipt display system unavailable.
13
8100, 9100, 9110, 9600, 9610, 9615, 9640, 9650, 9700, 9710, 9705, 9750, MAKO, SuperScrip
BGD DONE GOOD
14
8100, 9100, 9110, 9600, 9610, 9615, 9640, 9650, 9700, 9710, 9705, 9750, MAKO, SuperScrip
BGD DONE BAD
15
8100, 9100, 9110, 9600, 9610, 9615, 9640, 9650, 9700, 9710, 9705, 9750, MAKO, SuperScrip
Timeout waiting for Possible Cause: End of Transmission 1. EOT from processor was not received within time out period. 2. Carrier was not lost, but no EOT was received before the time-out period expired. EOT Results: No money is dispensed, screen and receipt display system unavailable. Communication problem NO EOT Possible Cause: 1. EOT from processor was not received within time out period. 2. Carrier was lost before receiving EOT. Results: No money is dispensed, screen and receipt display system unavailable. Possible Cause: Received more characters, than expected after request causing modem buffer overflow. Results: No money is dispensed, screen and receipt display system unavailable. Possible Cause: 1. Modem response was good, but operation was not performed. 2. This is normally an internal terminal problem. Results: No money is dispensed, screen and receipt display system unavailable.
16
17
8100, 9100, 9650, 9700, SuperScrip 8100, 9100, 9650, 9700, SuperScrip
9110, 9600, 9610, 9615, 9640, 9710, 9705, 9750, MAKO, 9110, 9600, 9610, 9615, 9640, 9710, 9705, 9750, MAKO,
18
8100, 9100, 9110, 9600, 9610, 9615, 9640, 9650, 9700, 9710, 9705, 9750, MAKO, SuperScrip
OVERFLOW
48
8100, 9100, 9110, 9600, 9610, 9615, 9640, 9650, 9700, 9710, 9705, 9750, MAKO, SuperScrip
NO ANSWER
65
8100, 9100, 9110, 9600, 9610, 9615, 9640, 9650, 9700, 9710, 9705, 9750, MAKO, SuperScrip
100
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM), RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, RT2000
101
Processor not Possible Cause: communicating with the This is normally a terminal problem. The modem or the main board may cause the modem correctly problem. Results: No money is dispensed, screen and receipt display system unavailable. Time-Out - Request has Possible Cause: been sent, time-out 1. Request has been sent. Time-out waiting for response or carrier was dropped. No waiting for response characters were received. Time-out is typically 60 seconds. 2. Request has been sent. Time-out waiting for response or carrier was dropped. At least one character was received (ETX was never received). Time-out is typically 60 seconds. 3. EOT was received as first character after sending a NAK due to a bad response message. Result: No money is dispensed screen and receipt display system unavailable No-Connect Possible Cause: 1. Used up all redial attempt and got Busy Signal for each attempt or No Dial Tone for each attempt. 2. Got connected and never received ENQ within time-out period (14 Seconds). Results: No money is dispensed, screen and receipt display system unavailable. No-Answer Possible Cause: Possible may be a processor or telephone hardware problem. Results: No money is dispensed, screen and receipt display system unavailable Possible Cause: 1. EOT from processor was not received within time out period. 2. Carrier was lost before receiving EOT. Results: No money is dispensed, screen and receipt display system unavailable. The Customer has terminated the transaction prior to the approval command being sent This is a notification, not an error. Request was sent but no response received after the specified time (60 seconds). See 100 Negotiation with host was complete, but no ENQ was received. (Dial-up protocol only). Request was sent but invalid data was received while waiting for the beginning of a response (STX). The LRC received in response was not valid. Possible Cause: There is an error with the Terminal ID or Comm Header. 1. Verify the Terminal ID and Comm Header with the processor. 2. Bring up the section for entering the Terminal ID and Comm Header, hit clear, then re-enter the Terminal ID and Comm Header. A response was received, the LRC was validated, but an error in the response format was found. Possible Cause: The processor is send data not correct for the modem ATM. 1. Verify the terminal type with the processor. 2. Verify the terminal configuration with the processor.
103
105
No EOT
107
RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM), RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, RT2000 RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM), RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, RT2000 RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM), RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, RT2000 RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM), RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, RT2000 RL5000 (SDD), RL5000 (TDM), RL5000 (NMD), FT5000, RT2000
User Cancelled Transaction No response
108
109 110 112
No ENQ Invalid response Invalid LRC
113
Response format error

Tri Ton Connect User Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Tri Ton Connect User Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Tri Ton Connect User Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TRITON CONNECTTM

TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL

TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL

CHAPTER 2 - INSTALLATON .............................................................................................. 2-1

CHAPTER 3 - CALL MONITOR ......................................................................................... 3-1

TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL

CHAPTER 4 - TERMINAL SETUP ......................................................................................... 4-1

CHAPTER 5 - GETTING TERMINAL DATA ............................................................................ 5-1

CHAPTER 6 - STATUS MONITORING ................................................................................. 6-1

TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL

CHAPTER 8 - TERMINAL PARAMETERS ............................................................................... 8-1

CHAPTER 9 - JOURNAL DATA .......................................................................................... 9-1

TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL

CHAPTER 10 - LED SIGN MESSAGES ............................................................................ 10-1

CHAPTER 11 - REPORTS MANAGER ................................................................................ 11-1

TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL

CHAPTER 13 - AD DESIGNER .......................................................................................... 13-1

CHAPTER 14 - COUPON UTILITY ................................................................................... 14-1

TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL

What is Triton Connect?

TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL

CHAPTER 1 - INTRODUCTION Whats New in Triton Connect 4.4

ISO S CREEN ACTIONS

Figure 1-1. Modified ISO No. / Owner Information tab

TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL

Figure 1-2. The new ISO Entry form

Spreadsheet / Flex Grid

TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL

Figure 1-5. Bulk deletion tool form.

Figure 1-7. Input file error message.

Figure 1-9. Successful completion message.

TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL

Figure 1-11. Archive journal records form.

Figure 1-12. Archive journal records form with status of progress.

Figure 1-13. Open Load File dialog box for X2.

Figure 1-14. Open Load File dialog box for X-Scale.

Figure 1-15. Data access error.

TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL

CALL MONITOR SUPPORTS UP TO 20 CALL PROCESSORS

Figure 1-17. Call Monitor with new menu option.

Figure 1-18. Maximum Call Processors configuration dialog.

TRITON CONNECT INSTALLER WILL NOT COPY D ATABASES BY DEFAULT

TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL

Figure 1-21. Select Journal Archive to View - Browse dialog.

DATA MANAGER WILL RESPECT DATABASE SIZE LIMIT

TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL Features introduced in Triton Connect 4.3

TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL Triton Connect System Configurations

TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL

Recommended System Configurations

Network Configuration (Used for database storage only)

Main Application PC (Used to run the Call Monitor application)

TRITON CONNECT USER MANUAL

Click Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and then click OK.

Click OK to continue. 2. The following dialog appears:

Install Triton Connect

The following dialog appears:

* CAUTION *

WARNING

WARNING

WARNING

IMPORTANT Accessing the Add New Terminal Function